Skip to main content

Full text of "Thinking; an introduction to its history and science"

See other formats


THINKING 

AN   INTRODUCTION 
TO  ITS  HISTORY  AND   SCIENCE 


FRED  CASEY 


THE  LIBRARY 
OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


GIFT  OF 

Hilde  Dietzgen  Charlton 
In  Memory  of 
Her  Mother 


THINKING 


THINKING 


AN    INTRODUCTION    TO 


ITS    HISTORY    AND    SCIENCE 


BY 


FRED    CASEY 


1922. 
THE   LABOUR  PUBLISHING  COMPANY    LTD, 

6,  TAVISTOCK    SQUARE,  LONDON,  W.C.i 


PREFACE 

It  i>  hoped  that  this  little  sketch  of  the  story  of 
thinking  will  be  of  service  to  those  who  have  neither 
the  time  to  study  or  money  to  purchase  the  more 
extensive  and  expensive  wor 

Beyond  the  manner  of  presentation,  the  ch . 
diagrams  and  a  few  opinions  at  the  end  of  each  part, 
the  writer  can  lay  no  claim  to  originality,  and  since 
this  is  obvious,  no  attempt  has  been  made  to  give  the 
sources  of  quotations,  as  such  would  only  burden  the 
book  with  references  of  no  practical  value  to  those 
for  whom  it  is  intended.  Some  of  the  sources  of 
information  taken  generally  are  indicated  in  the 
bibliography. 

•  A  print  of  two  charts  illustrating  the  development  of  the  main 
lines  of  thought  of  the  principal  thinkers  from  Thales  to  Marx  and 
Bergson  with  their  names,  dates  and  the  chief  characteristics  of 
their  thinking,  for  use  in  connection  with  Chapters  I — VIII,  can  be 
obtained  from  The  Plebs  Book  Department.  162a.  Buckingham 
Palace  Road,  London    S.W.1       Price  1  -.  post  free  1  2. 


CONTENTS 


PART  I. 

THE  HISTORY  OF  PHILOSOPHY. 
CHAP.  PACE 

I     Introduction 1 1 

II  Rise  of  Greek  Philosophy     . 

III  Decadence  of  Greek  Philosophy  .  41 

IV  Philosophy  in  the  Middle  Agi  .  si 
V  Philosophy  from  Descartes  to  Kant    .  65 

VI    The  Philosophy  of  Immamti.  Kant       .        7s 
VII     Idealism  from  Kant  to  Bergson  . 
VIII     Materialism  from  Roger  Bacon  to  Marx      ioi 


PART  II. 
LOGIC,  OR  THE  SCIENCE  OF  UNDERSTANDING. 

IX    Logic  Applied  to  the  General  Nam 
of  Thought   (Mind)    and  of  Thin 
(Matter)    .         .         .         .         .         .121 

X    Logic  Applied  to  Physical  Sen  .       138 

XI     Logic    Applied    to    MENTAL  and   Moral 

Problems  .         .         .         .         •         .15- 
XII    Various  Examples  of  Applied  Logic      .       17" 

Bibliography 

Index     


PART  I 
THE    HIS!  i  >RY  I  IF  PHILOSi  >I'H\ 


THINKING 

ITS 

HISTORY    and    SCIEN(  I 


PART  /. 
The    History    of    Philosophy. 

CHAPTER  I* 

Introduction 

Has  the  render  ever  (old  a  lie?  If  50,  was  if 
to  tell  that  lie.  or  better,  could  it  ever  he  right  to  lie' 
It  is  easy  to  say  people  ought  not  to  tell  lie-,  but 
when  deciding  about  oneself  it  becomes  a  most  un- 
comfortable question;  we  will  therefore  change  the 
subject  by  asking  a  few   others  of  varying  character. 

What  is  Irue  democracy? 

Would    the    practice    of    humanitarian    principl. 
good  for  society  ? 

Ts  education  good  for  the  working  class? 

If    socialism    is    bound    to    come,    of    what    use    air 
social   science  classes  ? 

Has  man  a  free  will  ? 

Why  do  we  say  that  living  things  have  life? 

Why  is  evil  desirable? 

Does  machine  production  benefit   society? 

Ts  happiness  as  an  end  in  view  morally  JUStil 

Would   it   be   right    for   socialists    •  the 

property  of  capitalists,   or.   is  it  r i L,r  1 1 1   to  -teal  - 

*  See  footnote  to  Preface. 


12  THINKING 

Is  it  desirable  that  all  people  should  have  good 
health  ? 

Are  strikes  unreasonable? 

Are  majorities  always  right  ? 

Should  workers  serve  on  trade  union  executives  ? 

The  essential  character  of  all  these  questions— 
of  every  question  in  fact — is  contained  in  the  one 
question  what  is  truth  ?  What  is  the  truth  concerning 
this  ?  What  is  the  truth  concerning  that  ?  In 
various  ways  this  great  master  question  has  occupied 
the  attention  of  human  beings  ever  since  their  brains 
began  to  think.  In  the  following  chapters  it  will  be 
our  business  to  briefly  review  the  development  of  the 
enquiry.  In  the  last  chapter  we  shall  attempt  answers 
to  the  questions  already  posed,  whilst  in  the  present 
one  we  shall  prepare  our  minds  for  what  is  to  follow, 
but  will  first  take  a  look  at  some  fallacious  methods 
employed  in  endeavouring  to  arrive  at  truth. 

In  places  where  there  is  sawdust  on  the  floor 
and  where  men  go  to  drink  beer,  budding  politicians 
can  often  be  heard  loudly  asking  "  What  did  Gladstone 
say  in  1864?"  In  more  refined  circles  it  takes 
the  form  of  "  What  did  Herbert  Spencer  say  in 
his  'First  Principles'?"  In  ultra  religious  circles 
it  is  "What  did  Christ  say?"  And  in  some 
socialist  circles  "What  did  Marx  say?"  Not  one 
of  the  three  latter  is  any  more  intellectual  than 
the  politician  of  the  "  sawdust  school,"  for  if  a 
man  cannot  demonstrate  the  truth  of  his  propositions 
"  off  his  own  bat,"  then  his  appeal  to  authority  is 
nothing  but  a  demonstration  of  his  own  ignorance. 
Of  course  the  above  contains  no  prejudice  against 
merely  quoting  a  source  of  information  so  long  as  it  is 
not  taken  as  proved  without  further  consideration. 
Another  form  of  this  argument  occurs  when  some 
person  appeals  for  the  acceptance  of  what  he  calls  his 
views,  on  the  ground  that  they  are  held  by  millions  of 
people  and  therefore  they  are  likely  to  be  right.  And 
still  another  form  exists  in  cases  where  men  claim 
knowledge  because  of  the  length  of  time  they  have  held 
certain  views,  as,  for  example,  in  many  socialist  clubs 


I  HIV:    : 

when-  men  can  be  heard  that  th< 

members  for  twelve    ■ 

know  what  socialism  is.  whereupon  01 

years   and   a    hall   and   ti  i  equent    i 

their  view9  accepted   becau  e 

better." 

Another   attempted   way    ol    arriving    at    truti 
take   an  example   from   tne 
is  to  go  round  to  the  churches  of  dil 
dons,  pick  out  the  best  from  their  d 
and  add  them  together  in  a  new  combinati 
"mixed  pickles."       But,  how  does  a  man  knov 
the  best  t    The  same  kind  ol   i 

political  schools  of  thought. 

Then  there  arc  people  who  Ba>   tl 
we   do   we   ought    at    leasl    he   broadminded     ju 

though  it  were  po--il.lt'  •  sdminded  about 

propositions  as  that   two  and  two  make  four         I: 

question  ^roadmindedness  i-,  a- a  matter 

superfine  name  for  ignorance  a  do  no- 

action  because  they  suspend  judgment,  s,,  n    • 

being    broadminded    amount-    to    them    acting    wit! 

knowled 

A    species    of    broadmindedness    more    pan 
relating  to  the  question  of  whether  there 
a  God,  appears  under  the  nai 
from   the    inconsistency   of    contemplating 
the    same    time    two    possibilities    each    of    which 
tradicts    the    other,    in    | 
any   chance   act    as    though    " 
in  reality  proves  them  to  be  materialisl 
believe   there    is    no    God,    though    in    the    face    of   the 
dominant  respectability  of  pre-ent  ■' .'. 
too  cowardly  to  admit  it. 

Then  again,  some  people  rel)  upon  comn 
just  as  if  common  sense  w a-  bound  to  be  ritfhl 
quite  re^ardle--  of  the  fact  that  in  different 
different  aspects  of  common  .ail 

Returning  to  the  question  of  truth 

UggeSt     that     all     pei 
truth,*'  for  if  they  did  not  know  when  they  were  i 


14  THINKING 

they  could  never  tell  when  they  were  wrong;  so  no 
great  harm  will  be  done  by  applying  a  test.  If  every 
reader  will  put  the  above  questions  to  a  dozen  friends, 
separately,  he  will  not  get  exactly  the  same  answers  to 
every  question  from  every  person.  Under  such  circum- 
stances how  will  he  know  which  is  right  ?  for  evidently 
two  different  answers  to  the  same  question  cannot  both 
be  true.  This  leaves  us  just  where  we  were.  We  are 
still  seeking  truth,  as  the  old  Greeks  were  two 
thousand  six  hundred  years  ago.  Truth  is  only 
another  name  for  knowledge,  or  wisdom,  and  the 
Greek  word  for  wise  is  "  sophos." 

Now,  how  much  of  this  wisdom  do  we  possess,  how 
much  do  we  really  know  ?  We  are  all  acquainted  with 
the  old  saying  "  seeing  is  believing,"  so  let  us  tackle 
the  problem  from  that  standpoint.  Take  a  piece  of 
board,  two  feet  square  and  half  an  inch  thick,  say  a 
small  drawing-board;  if  this  is  held  at  arm's  length  it 
gives  us  the  impression  of  a  square,  but  if  we  turn  it 
part  way  round,  like  a  half-open  door,  we  see  an 
oblong;  if  wre  continue  turning  it  goes  narrower, 
until  it  gives  us  the  impression  of  a  straight  line  half 
an  inch  wide.  What  shape  is  it?  Square,  of  course, 
because  we  saw  it  that  way  first.  But  suppose  we  had 
seen  it  the  other  way  first,  would  it  in  that  case  not  be 
square  ?  Moreover,  if  a  lighted  spirit  lamp  be  placed 
between  us  and  the  board,  but  low  down  so  that  it 
heats  the  air  between  ourselves  and  the  board,  the 
straight  edges  of  the  board  appear  as  wavy  lines. 
Again,  if  we  see  it  through  a  child's  telescope,  with 
the  small  lens  nearest  the  board,  it  will  appear  to  be 
smaller.  Or  a  person  troubled  with  astigmatism  (a 
faulty  curvature  of  the  lens  of  the  eye)  may  see  it  with 
some  edges  blurred,  or  out  of  focus,  whilst  others  are 
sharp.  The  shape  of  the  board,  then,  depends  upon 
its  position  in  relation  to  ourselves,  our  eyes,  and  the 
condition  of  the  air  or  other  medium  through  which  we 
see  it;  and  since  this  shape  varies  with  different 
persons,  or  with  variations  in  the  combination  of  other 
factors,  how  can  we  say  which  is  the  true  shape? 

Or  consider  its  colour.     Let  us  agree  that  the  board 


1  HINK1 

nice   light  brown    « 
shadow  is  cast  on  some  , 
darker  shade  than  the 
will  have  no  colour  at  all;    so  1.    i 
IS  its   true   COloui 

Ah,  well;    it  seeing  i>  not  beli< 
should  give  us  a  better  foundation 

the  board  hard  01 

our  fingers  but  soft  it  we  feel  with 

chisel,  bo  in  itsell  we  cannol 

ts  it  heavy?    It  is  heavy  to  i  luld  hut 

a  strong  man.    [s  it  solid?     It  is  sohd  ii 

our  fingers  though  it  hut  it  cannot 

given   sufficient   time,   water   would   pass   tin 

therefore   we  cannol   say   whether  the  b 

heavy  or  truly  -olid,   lor  meieU    feeling  at   ii 

no  clue. 

The    foregoing,    of    course,    <h  I 
problems    by    any    means.      As    anol 
might  ask  how  can  three  individuals  be 
time  one  individual:      How  can  ma 
say  that  an  individual  man  is  such  hecai; 
ot     mankind,     then     mankind     i>    the     unit    and 
individual  man  is  a  part  of  that  unit,  cons< 
part  is  only  a  traction  and  not  a  o  I 
Again,  the  universe  remain-  I 
it  is  constantly  changing  ;    how  can  that  t 
be  said  that  the  universe  doe-  chang< 
are  changing,  what  possibility  ts  there  QJ 
all.'     And  yet.   there  must   be   truth 
could  only  find  it;  at  least  so  it  seemed  to  t:.-- 
Greeks  who   were   the   first   I 
tematically  with  such  questions.      1; 
did   not   possess   truth,   hut   they   were   longifl 
they   "  loved  truth    for   its   own   sake,"  and 
irrespective  of  consequence-.      1  he) 
lovers    of   truth,    and    the    <  ireek    word    foi    lovil 
'•  philos,"  wherefore  putting  "  pi 
together  we  see  how  the  men  wl. 
truth,  were  "  lovers  of  wisdom  " 

In  those  days  a  philosopher 


16  THINKING 

truth  in  any  field  of  enquiry,  astronomy,  mathematics, 
logic,  ethics;  though  as  time  went  on  certain  branches 
of  knowledge  became  specialised,  as,  for  example, 
theology,  and  later  different  sciences,  such  as  chemistry, 
geology,  botany,  astronomy,  mathematics,  physics, 
psychology,  and  many  others,  so  that  in  modern  times 
philosophy  is  left  with  such  questions  as  the  relation  of 
the  one  to  the  many,  the  essential  or  underlying  natures 
of  matter,  of  mind  and  of  life;  the  existence  of  God, 
the  question  of  free  will,  the  question  of  a  future  life, 
the  relation  between  mind  and  matter,  or  as  it  is  called, 
between  "  thinking"  and  "  being,"  and  it  will  be  our 
business  in  succeeding  chapters  to  follow,  in  outline, 
the  development  of  the  enquiry  from  its  beginning  in 
the  Greek  colony  in  Asia  Minor,  approximately  six 
hundred  years  before  Christ,  up  to  the  present  time, 
and  to  show  the  positive  results  achieved;  but  since 
thinking  cannot  be  understood  without  reference  to 
the  material  conditions  governing  the  lives  of  the 
thinkers  during  any  given  period,  it  will  be  useful, 
briefly,  to  review  the  material  conditions  that  preceded 
and  ultimately  made  possible  that  branch  of  thinking 
we  now  know  as  philosophy. 

In  the  illimitable  space  we  call  the  sky  there  are 
thousands  of  enormous  masses  of  matter  greater  than 
our  earth  flying  about  at  speeds  of  anything 
approaching  twenty  miles  a  second.  They  are  cold  and 
dark,  but  when  two  of  these  meet  they  smash  each 
other  into  atoms,  and  their  motion  is  converted  into  a 
frightful  heat.  They  become  a  vast  white-hot  cloud  or 
nebula  of  fine  particles,  millions  of  miles  in  extent. 
This  nebula  begins  to  contract,  and  part  of  the  heat  is 
given  off;  but  the  contraction,  by  the  friction  of  the 
particles,  causes  a  still  greater  heat  in  the  interior,  so 
that  as  the  body  becomes  more  condensed  it  assumes 
a  character  that  we  might  faintly  imagine  by  thinking 
of  a  mass  of  molten  iron,  though  immensely  more  so. 
Such  intense  heat  breaks  up  even  the  atoms  into  their 
basic  "  strain  centres  "  or  electrons.  With  the  uneven 
condensation  of  such  an  irregularly  shaped  body  it 
begins  to  turn  round,  and  as  it  increases  the  spinning 


THINKING  17 

motion,  it  throws  off  great  portions  of  itself.  It  is 
supposed  that  our  sun  was  at  one  time  a  body  of  this 
kind,  and  that  our  earth  is  one  of  the  portions  thrown 
pinning  into  space.  The  earth  then  was  originally 
a  ball  of  nery  matter,  and  its  Btory  from  that  time  is 
essentially  one  of  cooling,  and  the  consequences  fol- 
lowing from  that  cooling. 

As  the  heat  passed  away  through  space,  the  different 
systems  of  electrons  settled  into  their  peculiar  atoms, 
such  as  oxygen,  hydrogen,  carbon,  etc..  which  act  and 
re-act  on  one  another,  and  which  existed  a^  gases 
forming  an  atmosphere  round  the  central  molten 
mass.  In  time  the  melted  matter  cooled  so  much  that 
it  formed  a  skin  or  crust  on  the  outside.  With  further 
cooling  the  oxygen  and  hydrogen  combined  to  form 
water  which  as  it  rained  down  on  the  central  mass  was 
rapidly  driven  off  in  the  form  of  steam,  only  to  con- 
dense and  come  clown  again  to  repeat  the  proce- s,  1 
process  which,  of  course,  hastened  the  cooling  of  the 
general  body,  and  resulted  in  forming  an  ocean 
surrounding  the  greater  part  of  the  globe.  So  now 
there  were  three  layers  of  matter  surrounding  the 
molten  centre — a  crust  of  rock,  a  layer  of  water  and 
an  atmosphere  of  gases. 

But  the  centre  had  not  gone  to  sleep;  the  titanic 
inside  forces  were  in  opposition  to  the  contracting 
crust  of  rock,  and  as  the  crust  cracked,  large  masses  of 
it  were  thrust  upward  out  of  the  water.  This  naturally 
redistributed  the  pressure  on  the  centre,  and  since  the 
oxygen  and  hydrogen  that  formed  the  water  was  now 
taken  out  of  the  atmosphere,  the  atmosphere  lost  its 
former  enormous  pressure  (estimated  at  5,000  lbs.  to 
the  square  inch),  consequently  such  land  as  there  was 
above  water  tended  to  increase  until  it  formed  a  huge 
continent  surrounding  the  northern  hemisphere.  Tor- 
rents of  rain  wore  the  high  parts  of  the  land  away,  and 
.in  tons  of  sediment  settled  on  the  lower  levels  and  on 
the  floor  of  the  ocean  this  increased  pressure  made 
large  tracks  of  land  sink  while  it  forced  others  higher 
out  of  the  water,  and  in  some  cases  actually  bent  the 
surface  upward  in  huge  wrinkles,  thus  forming  chains 

B 


18  THINKING 

of  mountains.  In  this  way  that  part  of  the  northern 
land  that  is  now  the  bed  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean  was 
forced  under  water,  and  similarly  were  stretches  of 
land  from  Africa  to  Brazil  and  from  Africa  to 
Australia  also  lost,  while  Africa  and  South  America 
took  their  present  form.  The  re-distribution  of  land 
and  water,  the  purifying  of  the  atmosphere  through 
the  plants  consuming  the  carbon  dioxide,  the  forming 
of  great  lakes  and  the  forcing  of  great  tracts  of  land 
up  into  the  colder  atmosphere,  all  tended  to  bring  about 
important  climatic  changes  resulting  in  immense  sheets 
of  ice  which,  as  they  shifted,  scarred  and  tore  the 
surface  of  the  land,  and,  as  they  melted,  formed  rivers, 
channels  and  lakes.  All  these  changes  had  a  great 
deal  to  do  with  the  forms  of  living  things  that  for 
thousands  of  rears  had  dwelt  on  the  earth,  so  we  must 
now  go  back  to  follow  their  evolution. 

Just  as  it  is  normal  under  certain  conditions  for 
gunpowder  to  explode,  or  a  match  to  burn,  so  is  it 
normal  for  matter  in  certain  other  combinations  to 
exhibit  the  phenomena  we  call  life.  Accordingly  life 
is  not  a  thing,  but  a  function.  "  When  did  living 
things  first  appear?  Where  did  they  come  from? 
What  was  their  character?  Frankly,  we  do  not  know." 
The  many  different  combinations  of  matter  had  been 
evolving  from  the  time  of  the  firemist,  or  nebula,  so 
there  is  evidently  no  point  at  which  we  could  say  when 
a  certain  combination  was  living.  We  therefore 
arbitrarily  select  the  point  when  minute  specks  of 
the  combination  called  protoplasm  (the  known  physical 
basis  of  all  living  things)  were  formed,  and  lived 
individual  lives  millions  of  years  ago  in  the  original 
ocean.  These  specks  of  jelly,  about  one-thousandth 
of  an  inch  in  diameter,  were  the  parent  stock  from 
which  both  plants  and  animals  developed.  Among 
very  low  organisms  it  is  exceedingly  difficult  to  tell 
which  are  plants  and  which  are  animals,  the  points 
being  much  disputed,  but  it  is  usual  to  call  them  plants 
if  they  take  their  food  from  the  chemicals  of  the  air, 
water,  or  land,  and  convert  these  into  protoplasm, 
and  to  call  them  animals  if  they  take  ready-made  proto- 


THINKING  19 

plasm  as  their  food,  that  is,  if  they  live  on  plants  or 
other  animals. 

If  the  organism  feeds  on  air,  water,  etc.,  it  has  no 
need  to  move  or  to  develop  organs  of  sense,  except  to 
a  very  limited  extent,  so  it  becomes  rooted  and  stays 
where  it  is;  but  the  organism  that  lives  on  other 
organisms  must  go  and  find  them,  or  follow  them,  or 
at  least  develop  limbs  for  catching  them  as  they  come 
near,  and  so  it  develops  the  necessary  organs  of  sense 
which  enable  it  to  respond  to  its  environment ;  accord- 
ingly we  got  the  two  divisions  of  living  things,  plants 
and  animals.  Plants  passed  through  various  stages, 
from  the  green  matter  that  we  see  clinging  to  a 
rainspout,  through  sea-weeds,  ferns,  flowers  with  sex 
organs,  and  an  immense  variety  up  to  the  monster 
trees  of  the  Coal  Age  (estimated  at  from  twenty  to 
twenty-eight  million  years  ago).  In  the  sea,  animals 
existed  at  this  time  in  great  numbers  and  variety,  as 
the  result  of  an  evolution  from  the  lower  forms.  There 
were  amceboids,  or  single-celled  animals,  then  clusters 
of  cells  that  double  in  on  themselves,  forming 
stomachs.  Higher  in  the  scale  some  cells  specialise 
as  germ  or  sex  cells,  and  some  become  especially 
sensitive;  the  latter  are  gathered  together  in  the  head 
and  ultimately  become  brains  that  are  connected  with 
the  organs  of  sense;  the  digestive  cells  line  the 
stomach,  while  other  cells  develop  the  functions  of 
locomotion,  excretion,  etc.  Some  animals,  such  as 
sponges,  corals,  etc.,  attached  themselves  to  the  floor 
of  the  ocean  and  developed  suckers  or  arms  for 
catching  unwary  swimmers;  others  swam  about  in 
search  of  food,  preying  on  one  another,  and  it  is  the 
evolution  of  the  latter  branch  through  the  forms  of 
fishes,  reptiles,  birds  and  mammals  that  lead  up  to 
man. 

Long  before  the  Coal  Age,  animals  up  to  the  level 
of  the  fish  had  existed  in  the  sea,  but  there  were  no 
land  animals  such  as  we  know,  because  they  could  not 
have  existed  until  the  plants  had  freed  the  atmosphere 
from  carbon  dioxide — a  food  for  plants  but  a  poison 
for   air-breathing   animals.      As   the   struggle    for   life 


20  THINKING 

became  more  intense  with  every  increase  in  numbers, 
and  particularly  as  the  re-formation  of  the  land  had 
resulted  in  enclosed  lakes  from  which  there  was  no 
escape  to  the  open  sea,  the  hunted  ones  made  their 
escape  by  taking"  to  the  land,  the  swimming"  bags  of 
the  fishes  being  converted  into  lungs  and  their  fins  into 
feet.  These  amphibia  later  became  reptiles  of  enor- 
mous size,  though  with  exceedingly  small  brains. 
Ultimately  the  giants  perished  through  lack  of  food 
when  parts  of  the  earth  became  very  cold  and  ice- 
bound; again  it  was  a  question  of  escape  to  warmer 
climes,  and  it  was  the  swifter,  most  intelligent,  warm- 
blooded and  smaller  animals  (those  requiring  least 
food)  that  survived.  Once  again,  for  escape  as 
numbers  increased,  the  web-footed  leaping  lizards  took, 
as  it  were,  to  swimming  in  the  air,  and  so  developed 
into  birds,  while  another  type  of  reptile  developed 
mammary  glands  by  which  the  young  could  be  fed 
from  the  mother  after  birth.  This  latter  evolution  is 
supposed  to  have  taken  place  on  the  now  lost  continent 
between  Africa  and  Brazil.  These  part-reptile  part- 
mammal  creatures  had  a  coat  of  hair  to  keep  them 
warm,  and  four-chambered  hearts  to  supply  richer  and 
warmer  blood  to  their  bodies;  due  to  this,  and  the 
anxieties  of  existence,  they  developed  a  brain  capacity 
beyond  what  had  been  before.  There  were  many 
species  of  them,  all  belonging  to  the  lowest  class  of 
mammals,  and  they  gradually  overran  the  earth,  so 
that  from  one  or  other  all  the  present-day  varied  types 
of  animals  have  been  evolved.  One  of  the  latter 
types,  the  lemur,  about  the  size  of  a  cat,  and  assumed 
to  have  been  evolved  on  the  lost  Afro-Asian  continent, 
is  supposed  to  be  the  common  ancestor  of  monkeys, 
apes  and  men.  The  fore  feet  of  lemurs  developed  into 
hands  with  which  they  climbed  into  the  trees  where 
they  lived.  It  is  supposed  that  this  development  of 
hands  afforded  scope  for  the  development  of  brains, 
since  it  enabled  their  possessors  to  undertake  many 
activities  denied  to  other  animals;  and  it  is  further 
conjectured  that  tree  climbing  led  eventually  to  an 
upright  posture  as  found  in  man.     Man  has  therefore 


THINKING  21 

been  evolved   from  the   lemur,   through  an  ape   Stage, 
though   not    from   any  existing   ape:    the  apes   are   his 
■ins,  that  is  all. 

The  home  of  the  ape-men,  probably  a  million  years 
was  south  of  Asia;  from  that  time  onwards  the 
story  is  one  of  increasing  intelligence  or  capacity  <>i 
brain  functioning,  and  increasing  ability  in  the  making 
of  tools.  They  lived  in  caves  or  trees,  with  no  language 
or  religion,  no  knowledge  of  how  they  came  to  be 
horn,  nor  any  knowledge  of  what  we  mean  by  death. 
They  u^cd  sharp  flints  as  choppers;  they  discovered  the 
use  of  tire  probably  from  the  sparks  of  iron  ore  ;  they 
began  to  live  in  communities  for  purposo  of  defence, 
and  gradually  emerged  from  their  state  of  savagery 
into  the  barbarian  stage.  During  this  sta.^e,  religious 
practices  came  into  being,  also  the  spoken  langu 
written  language  began  with  drawings  on  the  borders 
of  caves  and  on  rocks.  Religious  practice 
through  ignorance  regarding  natural  forces,  such  as 
thunder,  lightning,  germinal  forces,  and  so  on:  abstract 
things,  such  as  Springtime,  came  to  be  personified  and 
reckoned  as  gods.  Understanding  death  as  merely  a 
longer  duration  of  sleep,  they  had  no  idea  of  anything 
but  life,  consequently  with  them  dead  men  had  simply 
urone  to  live  in  the  immortal  regions,  and  from  dream.s 
they  got  their  ideas  of  the  immortal  interior.  A 
combination  of  religious  belief  and  spoken  language 
produced  the  later  mythologies  and  legends  of  . 
devils,  immortal  life,  heaven,  virgin  births,  and  so  on. 
All  this  time  the  development  of  tools  was  having  its 
effect  in  so  far  as  with  newer  and  better  tools  it  was 
possible  to  accumulate  a  store  of  food,  which  rendered 
it  unnecessary  to  wander  about  in  search  of  it;  hut,  to 
pass  from  barbarism  to  civilisation,  with  an  ordered 
and  centralised  government,  needed  something  besides 
mere  hand  tools.  Peace,  in  which  to  develop  social 
organisation,  along  with  a  continuous  supply  of  food 
in  one  locality,  are  the  two  primary  essentials  for 
civilisation,  and  we  have  now  to  see  the  reasons  why 
the  first  civilisation  took  place  in   Egypt. 

Since  animals  live  on  plants  or  other  animals,  their 


22  THINKING 

basic  food  is  vegetable.  Vegetation  depends  upon  the 
presence  of  moisture,  ultimately  rain,  and  a  given 
rainfall  depends  upon  the  direction  of  moisture-carrying 
wind,  which  again  depends  on  many  geographical 
factors,  such  as  the  existence  of  mountains.  A  con- 
tinued supply  of  food  depended  accordingly  on  a 
certain  combination  of  material  conditions.  Where 
those  conditions  enabled  barbarians  to  get  the  neces- 
saries of  life  with  a  lesser  expenditure  of  energy  than 
formerly,  energy  was  saved  for  other  purposes:  in 
this  lies  the  essential  character  of  progress.  Now 
those  tribes  that  lived  in  places  accessible  to  other 
tribes,  and  which  were  therefore  open  to  attack,  had 
to  expend  a  great  deal  of  energy  in  defence;  accord- 
ingly, those  who  were  naturally  protected  by  the  sea, 
deserts,  mountain  ranges,  and  so  on,  stood  the  best 
chance  of  becoming  civilised,  and  nowhere  were  those 
conditions  so  complete  as  in  Egypt  along  the  valley  of 
the  Nile,  which  is  protected  on  the  east  and  west  by 
deserts,  partly  so  on  the  south,  and  by  the  sea  on  the 
north.  The  warm  winds  from  the  west  bring  their 
moisture  from  the  Atlantic  across  the  great  Sahara 
desert ;  they  are  turned  upward  by  the  high  lands  south 
of  Egypt,  whereupon  they  lose  their  grip  of  the 
moisture,  which  rains  down  on  the  gathering  grounds 
of  the  river  Nile,  in  central  Africa  and  Abyssinia. 
South  of  Assuam  there  is  a  great  tract  of  sandstone 
which,  being  comparatively  soft,  has  been  worn  by  the 
river  into  very  deep  gorges  from  which  the  water 
cannot  spread,  consequently  nothing  will  grow  for  any 
distance  on  either  side;  but  north  of  Assuam  the  base 
is  hard  limestone,  in  which  the  river  has  first  worn  a 
valley  approximately  ten  miles  wide,  and  has  covered 
this  with  soil  brought  down  with  the  floods  from  the 
Abyssinian  mountains.  These  floods  occur  periodic- 
ally, which  circumstance  constitutes  another  important 
factor  in  our  story  of  civilising  conditions,  for  in 
tropical  countries  one  day  is  very  like  another  the 
whole  year  round,  so  there  is  no  necessity  to  provide 
for  the  future,  but  outside  the  tropics  there  are  seasonal 
changes,    more    and    more    severe    with    approach    to 


TIIINKINC  23 

temperate  regions,  and  the>c  changes  necessitate 
provision  for  the  bad  periods,  but  such  provision  cannot 
be  satisfactorily  carried  oul  without  some  centre  of 
authority.     Here  accordingly  were  the  kind  of  soH,  the 

moisture,  the  peaceful  conditions,  and  the  necessity  of 
making    provision    for    the    future    which    implii 

centralised  directive  administration,  which  conditions, 
taken  altogether,  are  necessary  for  barbarians  to 
develop  into  civilised  men.  The  development  took  a 
very  long  time,  in  all  probability  some  thousands  of 
years  before  the  period  of  those  whom  we  call  the 
Ancient  Egyptians,  and  the  latter  date  from  about 
4500  B.< 

The  next  most  likely  set  of  conditions  existed  in 
Mesopotamia,  between  the  rivers  Euphrates  and  Tigris, 
with  Babylon  as  the  centre;  but  without  outlining  them 
here,  it  will  be  sufficient  for  our  purpose  to  point  out 
that  those  two  peoples  were  kept  apart  by  the  Syrian 
desert.  The  Babylonians  were  subject  to  invasions  of 
Semitic  tribes  which  from  time  to  time  surged  out  of 
Arabia,  a  high  land  with  a  singularly  pure  air,  whose 
inhabitants  bred  in  numbers  out  of  all  proportion  to 
the  means  of  feeding  them,  so  they  went  out  in  great 
hordes  to  the  lands  "  flowing  with  milk  and  honey," 
and  became  more  or  less  absorbed  and  civilised.  But 
while  the  two  principal  civilisations  were,  in  the 
beginning,  kept  apart  by  the  Syrian  desert,  a  few- 
thousand  years  of  tool  development  wrought  a  change; 
they  had  tamed  and  domesticated  animals  for  working 
and  for  transport,  invented  new  weapons  in  response 
to  the  wandering  Semitic  invaders,  they  could  produce 
more  wealth  of  certain  kinds  than  they  needed  for  their 
own  use,  and  could  afford  to  trade  with  it,  they  could 
produce  an  abundant  supply  of  food  that  could  be 
carried  on  pack  animals;  with  all  this,  travel,  trading 
and  war,  on  an  ever  increasing  scale,  became  possible. 
But  the  Syrian  desert  was  still  impassable  for  regular 
intercourse,  therefore  the  easiest  way  was  what 
became  the  urreat  north  road  from  Egypt  across  the 
Sinai  desert,  up  through  Syria,  round  the  top  of  the 
great  desert,   and  down  the  Euphrates  valley.     Over 


24  THINKING 

these  roads  many  wars  were  fought,  the  Jews  in 
Palestine  ultimately  getting  crushed  and  scattered. 

But  there  were  also  other  tribes  from  farther  north 
and  east,  Assyrians,  Medes  and  Persians,  who  fought 
and  traded  in  these  parts,  so  that  the  whole  region 
now  known  as  the  Near  East  became  the  centre  of 
conflicting  civilisations  whose  trade  was  constantly 
being  pushed  north-west  into  Asia  Minor  and  along 
its  southern  shore.  Meanwhile  the  Phoenicians  who 
lived  along  the  coast  of  Western  Syria,  with  ideas  of 
river  boats  originally  brought  from  the  Euphrates, 
had  tackled  the  problem  of  the  sea  and  had  traded 
along  the  north  of  Africa  to  Carthage  and  other  places ; 
they  came  in  conflict  with  Greeks,  who  were  also  a 
seafaring  people.  Persia  had  in  the  later  times  become 
the  dominant  power  of  the  then  civilised  world;  she 
had  already  colonised  a  great  part  of  Asia  Minor  and 
developed  trade  all  along  its  southern  shore,  as  well  as 
in  the  ^gean  Sea;  she  represented  the  East  pushing 
out  to  conquer  the  West.  But  the  Greeks  had  also 
done  some  colonising  in  Asia  Minor;  they  were  war- 
like on  sea  as  well  as  on  land,  and  had  ideas  of  the 
conquest  of  Persia;  they  represented  the  West  out  to 
conquer  the  East,  and  naturally  the  conflict  in  war 
followed  the  paths  of  the  conflict  in  trade  because  there 
lay  the  roads  for  men  to  travel ;  consequently  it  is 
along  those  paths  we  should  expect  to  find  the  greatest 
conflict  of  ideas  or  thinking.  Along  those  trading 
routes  were,  for  those  times,  great  cities,  one  of 
which,  called  Miletus,  was  situated  at  the  mouth  of  the 
river  Meander,  in  the  south-west  of  Asia  Minor,  and 
here  lived  Thales,  who  came  of  a  high  Phoenician 
family,  and  who  is  regarded  as  the  earliest  of  Greek 
philosophers ;  he  might  be  represented  as  the  western 
spear-head  of  the  scientific  thinking  of  his  day,  piercing 
the  thousands  of  years'  old  religious  traditions  of  the 
east. 

Abstract.  From  even  such  an  exceedingly  general 
outline  as  the  present,  a  thoughtful  reader  will 
be  able  to  gather  that  just  as  life  is  a  function  of 
certain  combinations  of  naturally  evolved  matter,  so  is 


THINKING  2.5 

thinking  a  function  of  naturally  evolved  special  parts 
of  that  matter— organs  of  sense  and  brains;  thereafter 
thinking  depends  upon  the  material  relations  between 
animals  and  the  resl  of  nature.  Accordingly,  since 
men,  the  animals  with  hands,  possess  the  capacity  for 
making  tools  by  which  they  modify  the  relations 
between  themselves  and  nature,  they  consequently 
by  those  means  modify  their  thinking,  for  in  pro- 
portion as  better  tools  led  to  increased  production  and 
consequent  trading,  so  did  trading  develop  a  wider 
type  of  society,  and  so  were  strangers  thrown  more 
and  more  into  contact  with  each  other.  With  regard  to 
religious  thought,  not  only  they  but  their  different  gods 
also  came  into  conflict;  this,  along  with  other  factors, 
led  eventually  towards  the  idea  of  onr  God.  We  have 
seen  that  animals,  apart  from  man.  evolve  along 
biological  lines,  but  the  factor  of  tool  development 
necessitates  changes  in  man's  soeial  relations  so  that 
man  evolves  sociologically.  The  changes  in  social 
relations  reflect  themselves  in  thinking  and  appear  as 
customs,  laws,  religions,  philosophies  and  sciences. 
Trading,  for  example,  required  standards  of  measure- 
ment in  exchanging  quantities  of  goods  (arithmetic  i, 
also  methods  of  measuring  land  and  roads  (geometry), 
the  navigation  of  the  sea,  and  dozens  of  other  things; 
but  just  as  changing  material  conditions  led  their 
thinking  in  a  scientific  direction,  so  did  this  thinking 
come  in  conflict  with  the  unscientific  superstitions  and 
religious  explanations  of  all  things  supposed  to  have 
been  got  direct  from  the  gods.  All  things  were 
recognised  to  be  constantly  changing,  but  since  they 
did  not  come  from  nothing,  or  pass  into  nothing,  it 
was  thought  that  some  one  substance  must  be  the  base 
of  all  things,  and  it  is  the  merit  of  the  ancient 
philosophers  to  have  begun  the  search  for  that  one 
thing  which  remained  permanent  through  all  its 
changing  forms,  or  in  other  words,  to  have  begun  the 
search  for  universal  rock-bottom  truth. 


CHAPTER   II 
Rise  of  Greek  Philosophy 

Newer  tools  brought  trading.  Trading  brought  war 
in  which  prisoners  were  made  into  slaves.  From  being 
the  common  property  of  a  tribe,  the  tools  became  the 
private  property  of  individuals,  and,  through  the 
private  ownership  of  the  products,  led  to  the  forming 
of  social  classes  with  different  inner  classes  and  castes, 
the  whole  divided  broadly  into  masters  and  slaves. 
This  had  happened  long  prior  to  the  rise  of  Greece, 
therefore  the  glories  of  Greek  architecture,  literature, 
statecraft,  philosophy,  etc.,  were  the  outcome  of  a 
mode  of  production  where  slaves  performed  the  work; 
nor  could  they  have  come  into  being  without  slavery. 
Of  course,  when  speaking  of  the  Ancient  Greeks  we 
never  mean  the  slaves,  without  whose  work  the  culture 
could  never  have  taken  place,  nevertheless  it  is  true 
that  philosophers  could  not  live  on  mere  learning,  they 
must  have  been  provided  for  by  somebody,  so  evidently 
chattel  slavery  was  the  economic  basis  of  a  great  social 
advance;  it  produced  its  particular  types  of  thinking, 
and  so  far  as  philosophy  is  concerned  we  must  now 
consider  the  chief  doctrines  of  the  exponents  of  that 
thinking. 

As  indicated  in  the  last  chapter,  the  beginning  of 
philosophical  enquiry  is  associated  with  the  name  of 
THALES  (born  about  636  B.C.,  of  Miletus)  who 
imagined  the  one  universal  substance  to  be  water — 
the  blood  of  animals  is  watery,  plants  cannot  exist 
without  water,  even  "  dry "  land  contains  a  per- 
centage of  water,  and  so  on.  He  was  a  philosopher 
because  he  sought  essential  truth;  this  is  his  merit,  his 

26 


THINKING 

actual    work    otherwise    was   of   no   use.     lie    was   a 

naturalist  because  he  turned  to  natural  substances  in  bis 
investigations. 

ANAXIMENES  (c.  560-480  B.C..  of  Miletus) 
thought  he  had  found  the  universal  essence  in  air 
our  souls  were  composed  of  air  or  spirit.  Therefore 
from  a  natural  and  sensuous  thing  be  derived  the 
infinite:  water  was  for  him  limited,  it  was  too  coarse, 
but  in  air,  which  we  feel  though  do  not  see.  we  have 
a   liner  thing  that  pervades  all   things   (ether). 

ANAXIMANDER  (born  about  610  B.C..  of  Miletus) 
declared  that  an  unlimited  and  infinite  substance  was 
the  essence  of  all  things,  but  did  not  say  what  it  was; 
he  did  not  define  it  as  any  one  thing,  such  as  air  or 
water,  but  merely  spoke  of  it  as  the  principle  of  all 
change,  of  all  becoming  and  passing  away;  it  was 
"  that  "  out  of  which  worlds  and  gods  arise  and  into 
wdiich  they  ultimately  return.  It  was  immortal,  had 
no  beginning  and  would  never  pass  away;  it  therefore 
contained  everything  within  it,  or  rather  Was  every- 
thing in  continuity. 

MKRACLITUS  (576-480  B.C.,  of  Ephcsus,  a  city  a 
little  north  of  Miletus)  thought  the  moving  spirit  of 
all  things  was  fire  (not  flame — more  properly  heat,  the 
principle  of  fire),  but  since  fire  or  heat  was  constantly 
changing  there  was  not  even  one  thing  in  the  universe 
that  did  not  change;  this  was,  of  course,  rather 
awkward  for  those  who  wanted  to  find  something 
permanent. 

PYTHAGORAS  (6th  century  B.C.,  of  Samos,  an 
island  off  the  coast  of  Asia  Minor,  not  far  from 
Miletus  and  Ephesus.  afterwards  settled  at  Crotona  in 
S.  Italy)  conceived  the  essential  nature  of  things  to  be 
number.  The  universe  is  "  one,"  but  so  is  every 
single  part  "  one."  Combinations  of  parts,  no  matter 
how  many,  become  "  one,"  for  example,  the  number 
of  pages  in  a  book,  or  the  number  of  vibrations  in  a 
musical  note  and  the  number  of  beats  in  its  duration; 
"  one  "  is  the  beginning  of  all  things,  the  starting 
point  in  all  calculations.  Had  he  used  this  idea 
symbolically,    as    arithmetic    is    used    to-day,    it    would 


28  THINKING 

have  been  intelligible,  but  according  to  G.  H.  Lewes, 
on  the  authority  of  Aristotle,  he  went  on  to  suppose 
that  number  was  the  essence  of  things. 

Pythagoras  was  the  founder  of  mathematics,  the 
discoverer  of  proportion  in  musical  harmony,  and  the 
founder  of  a  religious  sect  in  Crotona  where  he  taught 
the  immortality  and  transmigration  of  souls. 

ANAXAGORAS  (500-418  B.C.,  of  Clazomenae  in 
Lydia,  the  centre  of  S.W.  Asia  Minor;  afterwards  went 
to  Athens)  taught  that  everything  existed  from 
eternity,  but  that  things  were  separate  and  not  in 
continuity  as  with  Anaximander.  They  were  originally 
all  mixed  up,  but  have  been  and  are  continually  being 
sorted  out,  as  time  goes  on,  by  intelligence  which  sees 
in  them  their  distinct  and  useful  qualities;  wherefore 
since  useful  things  can  not  be  such  without,  apparently, 
an  intelligent  appreciation  of  them,  we  see  the  essential 
nature  of  all  things  to  be  due  to  Mind  or  Intelligence. 
In  this  way  he  reduced  the  many  kinds  of  things  (they 
had  all  existed  through  all  time)  serving  different 
purposes,  and  usually  referred  to  as  "  the  wonderful 
order  in  the  universe,"  to  the  one  primary  motion  or 
cause  (not  a  moral  guidance).  "  The  Infinite  Intelli- 
gence was  the  architect  of  the  Infinite  Matter."  Mind 
was  the  one  moving  spirit  that  fashioned  or  arranged 
the  many  material  phenomena,  but,  as  other  philo- 
sophers complained,  he  did  not  show  the  connection 
between  the  one  and  the  many,  or,  we  might  say,  did 
not  explain  the  nature  of  the  one  by  reference  to  the 
different  purposes  served  by  the  many,  a  doctrine 
known  as  "  teleology." 

PARMENIDES  (born  c.  536  B.C.,  of  Elea,  now 
called  Velia,  in  S.  Italy)  made  a  decided  distinction 
between  thoughts  obtained  through  reason  and  those 
obtained  through  the  senses.  Since  the  senses  showed 
him  a  world  wherein  all  was  change,  thoughts  got  in 
that  way  could  at  best  be  only  opinions,  because  we 
never  could  say  "  for  certain."  But  in  addition  to 
those  he  had  certain  convictions  that  he  felt  were  true ; 
the  latter  thoughts,  which  according  to  him  were 
produced   by    "  reason    alone,"    led    him    to    the   con- 


Til  IX  KING  29 

elusion  that  in  truth  nothing  changed,  for  all  the 
seeming  change  was  only  illusion 

ZENO  (c.  490-435  B.C.,  "I  1  lea,  and  afterwards 
Athens),  a  pupil  of  Parmenides,  in  defending  his 
masters  apparent  contradictions,  invented  the  method 
of  argument  known  as  "dialectics,"  which  consi-ts 
in  showing  the  error  in  a  .statement  by  reducing  it  to 
absurdity  through  questioning  and  cross-questioning, 
with  the  object  of  ultimately  arriving  at  truth.  lie 
propounded  several  puzzles,  of  which  the  following 
may  be  taken  as  a  type:  a  stone  when  thrown  a 
distance  conies  at  the  cud  to  a  state  of  rest,  hut  hefore 
it  reaches  the  end  it  has  to  pass  the  middle;  as  this 
middle  is  the  cud  of  a  shorter  distance,  the  stone  is  at 
rest  there  also,  and  similarly  since  every  point  is  an 
end.  whether  it  is  called  middle  or  not,  the  stone  is 
really  at  rest  all  the  time,  although  it  seemed  to  move. 
By  such  arguments  Xeno  attempted  to  prove  that 
motion  could  not  take  place,  so,  amongst  all  the 
change  going  on  in  the  universe,  both  he  and  his 
master  taught  that  nothing  changed,  for  motion  was 
impossible. 

At  this  time,  and  for  a  considerable  period  after- 
wards, Athens  was  the  "  hub  of  the  universe,"  and  the 
chief  city  in  Greece.  Greece  was  not  a  country 
governed  from  one  centre,  as  England  is  governed 
from  London,  hut  was  composed  of  separate  city 
States,  each  with  its  own  government  and  laws  to  suit 
itself.  As  .already  mentioned,  the  tireeks  had 
colonised  parts  of  S.W.  Asia  Minor,  whose  coastdand 
was  called  Ionia.  The  philosophers  belonging  to  this 
region  form  the  Ionian  school;  those  coming  from 
Miletus  being  sometimes  spoken  of  as  the  Milesian 
school.  The  reader  will  remember  that  these  philo- 
sophers had  sought  truth  in  natural  objects,  such  as 
water,  air,  etc:  they  were,  therefore,  naturalists  or 
physicists.  Southern  Italy  had  also  been  colonised,  and 
its  philosophers  of  course  form  the  Italian  school,  one 
portion  ol  which  is  referred  to  as  the  Bleatic,  because 
its  chief  representatives  were  natives  of  Idea.  Bui 
while  the   loiiians  were  physicists,  the   Italians  (Pytha- 


30  THINKING 

goras,  Parmenides,  Zeno,  etc.)  had  developed  along" 
abstract  lines,  and  had  sought  truth  by  mathematical 
and  dialectical  reasoning,  that  is,  by  leaving  nature 
alone  and  relying  entirely  on  their  minds.  The 
beginning  of  this  abstract  inquiry  might  be  traced  back 
to  the  "  Mind  "  of  Anaxagoras,  or  even  to  the 
"  Infinite  "  of  Anaximander.  There  were  therefore 
two  types  of  thinking  in  the  physicists  on  the  one  hand, 
and  the  mathematicians  or  dialecticians  on  the  other. 
Athens  was,  of  course,  the  great  centre  of  attraction 
for  all  Greeks,  and  when,  in  course  of  time,  Zeno 
arrived  there,  the  dialectical  line  of  enquiry  came  into 
conflict  with  the  physical.  This  conflict  resulted  in 
establishing  dialectics  as  the  correct  method  to  be  used 
in  philosophic  enquiry,  which  means  that  philosophers 
must  turn  away  from  nature  and  solve  their  problems 
by  argument,  that  is,  by  thought  alone;  it  also  led  to 
the  creation  of  the  Sophists  and  Sceptics. 

The  Sophists  were,  as  their  name  implies,  men  of 
knowledge,  or  at  least  they  were  regarded  as  such  by 
those  who  paid  to  learn  from  them.  They  travelled 
from  city  to  city  teaching  for  a  living,  but  they  were 
dialecticians  who  could  prove  anything  to  be  right  if 
it  suited  them,  just  as  a  barrister  might  with  superior 
argument  plead  successfully  for  the  life  of  a  murderer. 
Travelling  about,  they  found  in  different  cities  different 
laws  in  relation  to  different  conditions;  what  was  right 
in  one  place  was  wrong  in  another.  To  them  there 
was  no  absolute  truth,  so  it  was  no  use  attempting  to 
teach  definite  systems  of  knowledge;  they  taught 
accordingly  the  art  of  rhetoric  in  pleading  any  cause, 
but  particularly  in  politics  and  law,  because  there  being 
no  real  truth,  one  opinion  is  as  good  as  another,  and 
those  persons  are  likely  to  come  best  off  who  most 
cleverly  understand  and  use  the  art  of  persuasion. 
They  were  the  Relativists  of  their  time,  but  this 
relativity  must  not  be  identified  with  modern  relativity, 
it  was  only  "  the  protest  of  baffled  minds."  The 
Sophists  came  to  be  regarded  as  dishonest  reasoners 
who  knew  they  could  prove  nothing  but  were  all  along 
pretending    to    do    so.      The    Sceptics    were    at    least 


THINKING  31 

honest,  they  knew  they  could  prove  nothing  and  said 
so,  nevertheless  this  put  them  in  a  worse  position  than 

the  Sophists,  if.  indeed,  it  could  be  called  a  position,  for 
no  thinking  man  can  rest  content  with  nothing;  they 
were  the  Agnostics  of  their  time,  their  numbers 
developed  as  time  went  on,  so  that  eventually  they 
practically  killed  philosophy  in  Greece.  We  shall  refer 
to  them  later. 

It  is  said  that  Greek  philosophy,  properly  speaking, 
begins  with  SOCRATES  <4<";.-,o<)  BO,  of  Athene, 
inasmuch  as  he,  the  son  of  a  sculptor,  who  frequented 
any  place  where  men  gathered  together,  there  to  argue 
with  anybody  who  would,  so  developed  the  art  of 
dialectics  as  to  make  of  it  a  new  method  of  enquiry  in 
philosophy.  He  was  very  severe  on  the  Sophists  who 
had  no  basis  of  truth,  and  by  his  merciless  questioning 
brought  out  the  idea  that  if  one  thing  was  right  under 
some  conditions,  another  thing  under  Others,  and  so 
on,  this  could  only  be  on  the  assumption  that  there 
was  a  "  right  "  that  remained  permanently  right 
independently  of  how  men  thought,  and  consequently 
it  was  the  business  of  a  philosopher  to  employ 
dialectics  in  order  to  discover  the  essential  and 
permanent  natures  of  such  things  as  Tightness,  justice, 
honesty,  bravery,  love,  etc.,  and  to  define  those  natures 
in  such  a  way  that  they  might  be  generally  understood 
and  accepted  as  moral  standards  for  all  men;  first 
define  and  then  deduce,  in  this  we  can  see  the  beginning 
of  logical  system. 

This  concept,  of  the  permanence  of  a  certain  inner 
nature  which  could  not  be  grasped  by  the  senses  hut 
by  the  understanding  alone,  although  only  applied  to 
morality  by  Socrates,  was  afterwards  more  widely 
applied  by  Plato  and  became  the  keynote  of  his  whole 
teaching.  Meanwhile  it  was  the  first  step  towards 
elaborating  ethics  as  a  science,  so  we  see  one  branch 
of  philosophy  gradually  turning  away  from  the  problem 
of  the  nature  of  existence  to  that  of  conduct,  or  what 
should  men  do  in  order  to  do  right,  or  again,  what 
should  be  the  aim  in  life.  From  this  side  of  Socrates' 
teaching  flow  two  schools  of  thought     the  Cyrenaic, 


32  THINKING 

so  named  from  Cyrene,  the  native  place  of  Aristippus 
its  chief  exponent,  and  the  Cynic  with  Antisthenes  as 
its  leader. 

ARISTIPPUS  (430-360  B.C.,  of  Cyrene  in  Africa) 
was  influenced  by  the  Sophists  as  to  the  impossibility 
of  arriving  at  the  truth  of  anything,  because  since  each 
person  judges  according  to  his  impressions,  no  one 
can  be  trusted  to  judge  correctly;  but  he  was  also 
influenced  by  Socrates,  who  had  dwelt  much  on  the 
permanent  nature  of  The  Good.  Aristippus  thought 
the  greatest  good  was  to  be  found  in  pleasure,  but  for 
the  attainment  of  constant  pleasure  one  must  not 
overdo  the  thing,  therefore  a  moderate  pleasure  was 
the  best  aim  in  life. 

ANTISTHENES  (c.  445-370  B.C.,  of  Athens) 
studied  under  the  Sophists,  and  even  established  a 
school,  but  afterwards  took  both  himself  and  his 
students  to  learn  from  Socrates.  He  became  captivated 
by  the  idea  of  the  moral  perfection  of  man;  this 
impulse  he  got  from  Socrates,  but  never  took  to  the 
method  of  Socrates,  and  consequently  was  one-sided. 

In  his  pursuit  of  moral  perfection  he  adopted  the 
simple  life,  but  carried  it  to  extremes.  He  made  a  god 
of  poverty,  and  ostentatiously  paraded  it.  He  was  a 
man  of  gloomy  temper  and  snarling  ways,  and  it  is 
said  that  the  name  Cynic  (the  Greek  name  for  dog)  was 
given  to  him  and  his  followers  because  they  lived  the 
lives  of  dogs.  According  to  him  the  best  aim  in  life 
was  to  attain  the  virtues  of  moral  perfection  by  casting 
away  all  the  comforts  of  easy  living  that  might 
interfere  with  the  development  of  our  moral  natures, 
and  his  followers  went  to  such  an  extent  as  to  ignore 
not  only  life's  comforts,  but  even  its  ordinary  decencies. 
Diogenes,  who  lived  and  died  in  the  streets,  was 
probably  the  best  known  member  of  this  school. 

The  other  side  of  Socrates'  teaching  was  the  more 
truly  philosophic  in  that  it  clung  to  the  search  for  that 
permanent  something  which  abides  through  all  the 
changes  of  its  parts.  This  line  of  thought,  as  already 
indicated,  was  taken  up  and  developed  by  PLATO 
(427-346  B.C.,  of  Athens). 


THINKING  33 

Aiistocles,  surnamed  Plato  (the  broad-browcd  or 
broad-shouldered),  was  of  an  illustrious  line;    on  the 

maternal  side  he  was  connected  with  Solon  (c.  638- 
c.  558  B.C.),  the  great  Greek  statesman,  and.  as  with 

many  great  names,  he  was  the  subject  of  fable;  for 
instance,  he  was  said  to  be  the  child  of  Apollo  and  a 
virgin.  Well  educated,  and  skilled  in  gymnastics,  he 
competed  in  the  great  games.  He  learned  dialectics 
from  Socrates,  but  was  previously  acquainted  with 
Cratylus  who,  as  a  follower  of  Heraclitns,  taught  that 
all  things  changed  therefore  no  truth  could  be  stated. 
Plato  found  no  satisfaction  in  this,  although  it  was  true 
that  all  things  that  appeared  tu  his  senses  did  indeed 
change. 

In  the  teaching  of  Anaxagoras  he  found  the  idea  of 
a  universal  mind;  in  that  of  Parmenides  the  idea  of  a 
permanent  and  unchanging  universe;  from  the  fol- 
lowers of  Pythagoras  he  learned  of  the  immortality  of 
souls;  but  it  was  from  Socrates  he  got  the  chief  cine 
to  his  doctrine.  Socrates  had  taught  the  permanent 
moral  natures  of  Tightness,  justice,  honesty,  and  the 
like.  Plato  carried  this  farther  and  imagined  real 
permanent  natures  of  all  other  things,  both  abstract 
and  concrete,  such  as  straightness,  equality,  men, 
animals,  etc.  All  the  individuals  of  any  one  species 
were,  so  to  speak,  more  or  less  perfect,  though  perish- 
able, copies  or  imitations  of  their  genus  or  essential 
natures.  For  the  purpose  of  explaining,  we  might 
imagine  the  permanent  nature  of  man  to  be  a  pattern 
from  which  individual  men  were  made,  or,  that 
individual  men  partook  more  or  less  of  the  perfection 
of  the  pattern  which  existed  in  reality  on  its  own 
account.  With  Plato  this  general  nature  or  pattern 
was  not  a  mere  thought,  it  existed  whether  we  wen- 
aware  of  it  or  not,  it  could  not  be  seen  with  the  eyes, 
nor  indeed  grasped  by  any  of  the  senses,  it  could  only 
be  understood.  Each  separate  species  had  its  own 
general  nature,  which  Plato  called  its  Form  or  Idea; 
in  those  days  the  word  "  idea  "  did  not  mean  a  thought 
in  the  mind  as  it  does  with  us.  With  a  further 
extension  he  conceived  all  the  different   Forms  to  be 


o 


THINKING  35 

parts  of  one  universal  Form,  the  Supreme  Mind  or 
Intelligence — the  Soul  of  the  World.  Fig.  i  may  serve 
to  make  this  clear.  This  Soul  of  the  World,  or 
Universal  Intelligence  pervading  the  world,  was  thai 
permanent  truth  which  was  the  goal  of  philosophy,  it 
was  the  one  in  relation  to  the  many. 

Since  only  what  satisfies  the  intelligence  can  be 
regarded  as  real,  and  since  only  philosophers  who 
possess  a  high  degree  of  intelligence  can  apprehend 
reality,  so,  in  Plato's  opinion,  ought  the  rulers  of 
communities  to  be  philosophers,  and  so  was  he  led  to 
write  the  "  Republic,"  a  Utopia  in  which  he  outlined 
the  training  necessary  to  provide  the  State  with  such 
rulers. 

"He  had  a  small  house  and  garden  a  mile  or  so  from 
Athens,  and  near  the  Academy,  or  garden  adjoining 
the  sacred  precincts  of  Hecademus.  Here  there  were 
shady  walks,  and  a  gymnasium,  where  he  founded  his 
school  of  philosophy,  which  for  centuries  was  known 
as  the  Academy,"  and  it  was  here  that  Aristotle,  one 
of  the  greatest  thinkers  of  Cjreece,  studied  as  a  young 
man. 

ARISTOTLE  (384-322  B.C.,  of  Stagira,  on  the  west 
coast  of  what  is  now  the  Gulf  of  Contezza,  in  northern 
( ireece)  was  the  son  of  a  physician  who  died  leaving 
him  at  the  age  of  seventeen  his  own  master,  young, 
ardent,  ambitious  and  rich,  lie  was  slender  in  person, 
had  delicate  health,  hut  was  an  astonishing  brain 
worker,  lie  went  to  Athens,  where  he  remained  about 
twenty  years,  studying,  and  writing  on  a  vast  number  of 
subjects — Ethics,  Rhetoric,  Logic,  Poetic>,  Zoology, 
Comparative  Anatomy,  Psychology,  Physics,  Astro 
nomy,  etc.,  so  there  can  be  no  attempl  made  to  do 
justice  to  his  work  in  such  a  brief  outline  as  the  present, 
lie  was  disliked  by  certain  political  leaders,  who  accused 
him  of  blasphemy,  inasmuch  as  he  had  paid  homage  to 
mortals  by  raising  statues  in  memory  of  his  friend 
Hermias  and  to  his  wile  Pythias.  He  escaped  from 
Athens  and  retired  to  Chalcis,  but  after  Plato  died, 
returned  to  find  Xenocrates  teaching  in  the  Academy,  so 
obtained  permission  to  teach  morning  and  evening  in 


36  THINKING 

the  Peripatos  or  shady  walks  of  the  Lyceum,  the  finest 
of  Athens'  gymnasia. 

He  studied  philosophy  under  Plato,  but  complained 
that  his  master  did  not  give  a  satisfactory  account  of  the 
connection  between  the  imperishable  Forms  and  their 
perishable  representations,  or,  as  it  is  put,  between  "  the 
one  and  the  many."  Believing  with  Plato  that  eternal 
Forms  existed,  he  differed,  in  thinking  that  those  Forms 
did  not  exist  apart  from  their  copies,  but  rather  that 
they  actually  dwelt  in  the  perishable  bodies  of  the  things 
to  which  they  gave  that  Form,  and  that  the  conception 
of  their  separate  existence  was  nothing  but  a  mental 
abstraction;  to  give  an  instance,  manliness  was  not  a 
something  existing  apart  from  men,  but  was  the 
common  nature  or  Soul  that  dwelt  in  all  men  taken 
together;  men  therefore  were  mixtures  of  soul  and 
body  or  mind  and  matter.  But  so  also  had  all  other 
species  their  common  nature,  Soul  or  Form,  that  dwelt 
in  the  perishable  material  bodies  of  the  individuals  of 
each  species.  The  Supreme  Mind  or  God  was  pure 
Form  without  matter,  it  was  complete  perfection, 
separate  from  the  world,  and  taking  no  notice  of 
worldly  imperfection;  but  on  the  other  hand,  the  more 
or  less  imperfect  Forms  of  the  worldly  species  were 
striving  to  attain  the  perfection  of  God,  and  the  desire 
for  that  perfection  was  the  source  of  all  motion.  A 
knowledge  of  this,  it  was  supposed,  would  enable  us  to 
understand  what  man  should  do  to  attain  this  final  end. 
For  that  purpose  Aristotle  tried  to  establish  a  science 
of  ethics  and  with  regard  to  society,  a  science  of  politics. 
Since  the  more  knowledge  men  possessed,  the  greater 
the  advantage  they  would  have  in  striving  towards 
perfection,  they  should  not  ignore  worldly  things 
altogether,  but  strive  to  understand  those  also;  in 
conformity  with  the  latter  teaching  he  did  much  work 
in  mapping  out  the  limits  of  the  various  sciences,  and 
gave  a  newer  form  and  content  to  the  general  science 
of  logic,  the  science  that  underlies  all  sciences;  but  he 
did  not,  as  is  popularly  supposed,  either  invent  logic, 
or  even  give  it  its  name,  nevertheless,  much  of  what  he 
did  in  the  domain  of  logic  appears  in  our  text-books 


THINKING  37 

to-day,  though  it  required  a  different  economic  ground 
work  to  show  its  faults;  in  those  days  it  must  have 
;eemed  perfect. 
We  now  go  back  fifty  or  sixty  years  to  the  definite 

materialist  doctrine  of  l>KM<  CRITUS  ( 400—  370  !'..<  '.. 

of  Abdera  in  Thrace,  on  the  £gean  Sea),  who  said 
there  is  nothing  that  is  true,  or,  what  is  true  does  not 
appear  to  us,  for  the  reason  that  while  sensations  are 
hue  as  far  as  they  go,  yet  they  are  only  sensations,  and 
consequently  cannot  constitute  the  true  nature  of  the 
objects  that  cause  the  sensations.  The  universe,  he 
thought,  consisted  of  an  immense  number  of  material 
atoms,  combined  in  different  ways  to  produce  the 
different  things  which  lie  called  Forms  (of  course  very 
different  from  Plato's),  such  as  sweetness,  heat,  colour 
and  so  on.  Each  Form  gave  rise  to  our  sensations  by 
throwing  off,  as  it  wire,  a  layer  of  atoms  arranged 
according  to  its  own  peculiar  combination,  a  material 
image  of  itself,  which  image  was  projected  on  our 
organs  of  sense.  This  was  an  early  attempt  at 
psychology.  The  atoms  he  thought  were  too  small  ever 
to  become  known  by  the  senses,  and  could  he  under- 
stood only  by  the  faculty  of  Reflection;  they  needed  no 
Creator,  for  they  had  always  existed,  and  by  their  own 
inherent  movements  had  collided  and  combined  to 
produce  the  many  different  bodies  of  which  our  senses 
are  aware.  Democritus  therefore  had  no  divine 
principle  in  his  philosophy  as  had  Plato  and  Aristotle. 

It  may  be  convenient  at  this  point  to  give  the  gist  of 
the  Sceptics'  argument.  The  most  notable  among  them 
was  PYRRHO  (date  unknown  of  Elis),  who  main- 
tained that  the  only  knowledge  we  had  was  that  of 
sensation,  but,  we  could  not  get  at  truth  through  our 
senses,  because  we  could  not  say  for  certain  that  t hex- 
represented  objects  outside  US,  and  since  Reason  of 
necessity  had  only  sensations  to  reason  about,  then 
Reason  was  just  as  powerless;  so  no  positive  statement 
could  be  made  about  anything,  for  nothing  could 
be  proved  or  disproved. 

It  remains  for  us  to  notice  two  schools,  the  Epicurean 
and  the  Stoic,  each  a  mixture  of  certain  lines  of  thought 


38  THINKING 

already  noticed.  The  Epicurean  takes  its  name  from 
EPICURUS  (342 — 272  B.C.,  of  Samos),  whose  teaching 
was  a  further  development  of  that  of  the  Cyrenaic 
school  of  pleasure,  though  it  was  not  so  extreme  as  has 
been  believed.  Their  psychology  and  physics  they 
derived  from  Democritus,  which  means  they  believed  in 
a  permanent  material  world  wherein  sensation  was  due 
to  the  flow  of  material  atoms.  With  this,  it  follows 
they  did  not  recognise  any  divine  principle,  and 
accordingly  quarrelled  severely  with  the  Stoics,  from 
whom  much  of  their  misrepresentation  as  being 
sensualist  has  come.  Since  they  rejected  the  divine 
principle  in  Platonic  and  Aristotelian  systems  their 
ethics  rest  upon  their  own  Reason,  combined  with  Free 
Will.  So,  the  atomic  or  purely  material  basis  of 
Democritus  was  the  ground  work  of  their  sensations, 
and  agreeable  and  disagreeable  sensations  were  the 
bases  of  moralities,  therefore  whatever  was  pleasant 
became  the  rightful  object  of  existence. 

ZENO  (360 — 270  B.C.,  of  Citium,  a  small  city  in 
Cyprus),  the  representative  stoic,  began  his  philoso- 
phical career  by  joining  the  Cynics,  but  their  manners 
were  too  gross  and  indecent.  He  studied  in,  and 
learned  from,  other  schools,  particularly  the  Platonic, 
and  finally  opened  a  school  of  his  own  in  the  Stoa,  or 
Porch,  from  which  it  got  the  name  of  the  Stoic.  At 
Zeno's  time  Greece,  honeycombed  with  sophistry, 
scepticism,  indifference,  sensuality  and  Epicurean 
softness,  was  fast  going  to  pieces.  Zeno  tried  to  save 
his  people  by  an  appeal  to  their  manliness,  and  by  an 
attempt  to  re-establish  morality  on  a  basis  that  would 
be  sound  because  independent  of  human  frailty. 

The  Sceptics  said  that  truth  could  not  be  attained 
because  sensation,  which  could  not  be  trusted,  was  all 
there  was  to  work  with.  The  Stoics  replied  that  some 
sensations  must  be  true  if  some  are  false,  for  it  is 
impossible  to  have  error  without  truth,  and  that  Reason 
distinguishes  between  them  by  sifting  the  clear  evidence 
from  the  unclear,  or  that  which  in  reality  is  not 
evidence;  this  amounted  to  the  statement  that  "  evidence 
needs  no  proof."     In  nature  they  saw  two  elements,  the 


I  1 1  INK  IXC.  39 

matter,  and  God  or  the  Reason  which  governs  nutter. 
They  did  not  believe  in  free  will,  hut  in  a  destiny 
arranged  by  God,  who  was  the  only  Reason  in  the 
world.  Their  morality  was  a  rigid  suppression  of 
sensuous  enjoyment,  a  doctrine  fundamentally  the  saun- 
as the  Cynics',  hut  purified  of  much  of  the  grossi 
This  hardening  of  the  mind  and  cultivation  of  fortitude 
under  severe  strain,  even  unto  death,  were  the 
characteristics  which  made  their  teaching  acceptable  to 
the  conquering  Romans,  hecause  it  had  much  in 
common  with  the  latter's  own  harder  nature.  Since  the 
Sceptics  had  reduced  knowledge  to  the  limits  of 
sensation,  and  since  the  Stoics  could  not  believe  this  hut 
could  find  no  satisfactory  answer,  they  fell  back  on  faith 
in  that  Reason  which  to  them  was  Cod  directing  the 
world;  so  we  see  philosophy  as  philosophy  at  the  end 
of  its  tether  for  the  time  Being;  it  sank  hack  into  faith, 
lost  its  pride  and  became  an  aid  to  religion. 

Abstract. — The  early  philosophers  turned  away 
from  supernatural  myths  to  the  study  of  nature  in  the 
search  for  essential  truth  or  underlying  unity  of  all 
things,  but  not  finding  this  in  material  objects,  turned 
to  the  study  of  Mind  and  Thinking.  They  discovered 
or  invented  logic,  a  method  of  thinking  which  enabled 
them  to  arrange  their  thoughts  and  to  make  distinctions 
between  universals  and  particulars,  the  one  and  the 
many.  But  this  only  increased  their  difficulties  because 
it  divided  the  universe  into  Mind  and  Matter  without  in 
any  way  explaining  the  obvious  connection  between  the 
two,  while  it  destroyed  their  confidence  in  finding  truth 
by  the  aid  of  sense  perception. 

The  result  manifested  itself  in  two  main  lines  of 
thought,  on  the  one  hand  Scepticism,  wherein  nothing 
could  he  known,  and  on  the  other  Morality,  the  Stoic 
branch  of  which  relied  for  its  essential  truth  on  faith  in 
the  supernatural:  the  relatively  unthinking  people 
simply  took  life  as  it  came  and  in  the  ordinary  common- 
sense  manner  wandered  on  from  day  to  day.  There- 
fore philosophy  started  by  throwing  faith  overb 
only  after  two  and  a  half  centuries  to  return  to  it.  The 
positive    result    achieved    was    the    evolution    of    their 


40  THINKING 

method  of  enquiry,  the  logic  referred  to  above;  but  this 
did  not  attain  scientific  value  until  it  had  been  consider- 
ably modified  in  much  later  times,  nor  was  there  any 
real  science  of  thinking  until  our  own  times.  Mean- 
while we  must  witness  the  rise  of  Christianity,  and  the 
combination  of  philosophy  and  religion. 


CHAPTER    III 

Decadence   of  Greek  Philosophy 

We  have  said  that  philosophy  returned  to  faith, 
though  if  we  look  closely  we  shall  see  that,  apart  from 
the  Ionian  school,  some  germs  of  faith  had  been 
running  through  it  all  the  time;  nor  could  it  very  well 
have  been  otherwise,  for  whenever  people  take  up  a  new 
study  they  cannot  help  being  influenced  by  their 
previous  thinking,  therefore  they  of  necessity  approach 
it  with  a  certain  degree  of  bias.  Of  course  philosophers 
are  just  the  people  who  are  supposed  to  have  no  bias, 
a  mistaken  view  which  was  shown  very  plainly  in  the 
Italian  school,  in  the  interest  they  took  in  individual 
souls  and  their  transmigration.  But  taken  on  the 
whole,  Greek  philosophy  was  fairly  free  from  religious 
trammels,  for  there  was  no  powerful  priesthood,  or 
sacred  book,  nor  did  the  philosophers  interest  them- 
selves overmuch  in  their  popular  pagan  gods.  It  is  true 
Anaxagoras  had  been  banished  for  blaspheming  the  sun 
and  moon  by  saying  they  were  made  of  the  same  sort  of 
matter  as  the  earth  ;  Socrates  had  been  executed  because 
of  his  rationalist  tendencies,  and  Aristotle  had  been 
indicted  for  impiety;  but  in  all  these  cases  there  were 
powerful  political  motives,  the  religious  one  being  only 
a  cloak.  Such  conflict  as  there  was  between  philosophy 
and  religion,  particularly  in  their  later  developments, 
arose  from  the  fact  that  they  were  both  concerned  with 
the  same  problems,  namely,  those  concerning  the  nature 
of  that  ultimate  reality  which  both  have  called  God. 
Consequently,  given  a  certain  degree  of  social  develop 
Blent,  neither  could  exist  without  the  other,  and  in  this 
chapter    we    shall    be    occupied    in    tracing    the    main 

41 


42  THINKING 

converging  lines  of  religious  and  philosophic  thought. 

Barbarian  ignorance  of  natural  phenomena  such  as 
thunder,  storms,  floods,  germination,  birth  (concep- 
tion), death,  etc.,  was  the  basis  on  which  arose  religious 
practices  and  as  society  developed  according  to 
changing  economic  conditions,  there  came  into  being 
social  classes  of  different  grades,  one  of  which  was  the 
priestly  caste  beginning  with  such  rude  forms  as,  for 
example,  the  medicine  men  of  the  uncivilised  American 
Indians.  These  men  became  the  doctors  and  historians 
of  the  tribe,  and  necessarily  such  learning  as  there  was, 
apart  from  technicalities  of  fishing,  hunting,  etc., 
became  their  particular  stock-in-trade.  In  time  they 
became  the  especial  guardians  of  all  sacred  traditions 
and  ritual,  and  in  such  a  superstitious  age  were  regarded 
as  sacred  and  holy  men,  fit  to  teach  and  direct  the 
people,  for  they  only  were  in  touch  with  the  gods. 
Each  tribe  had  its  own  god,  consequently,  as  their  small 
worlds  opened  out  through  trade  and  conquest,  the 
conflict  of  different  gods  ended  in  the  triumph  of  the 
idea  of  there  being  only  one  God.  But  in  proportion  as 
this  idea  gained  ground,  so  did  the  local  character  of 
the  tribal  god  disappear,  his  place  being  taken  by  a  God 
who  no  longer  dwelt  in  one's  own  village  but  away 
somewhere,  always  away;  he  was  an  unapproachable 
God  except  through  the  medium  of  the  priests  and 
prophets. 

In  India,  out  of  a  personified  nature  worship  arose 
Vedism,  the  early  faith  of  Hindu-Aryans,  and  from  this 
came  Brahmanism.  Brahma  was  the  Creator,  and 
was  a  unitarian  God.  Brahmanism  was  taught  by  a 
priestly  caste,  but  later  developed  into  Hinduism,  with  a 
trinity  and  a  splitting  up  of  worship.  In  Persia, 
Zoroaster,  about  800  B.C.,  taught  one  God  with 
a  personal  divinity;  while  in  Syria  the  wandering 
Semitic  tribes  from  the  South  and  East,  who  became 
the  Jewish  nation,  and  who  had  the  tribal  religions  of 
Moses  and  other  prophets,  eventually  developed  the 
idea  of  the  one  God  of  Israel. 

Throughout  the  growth  of  the  idea  of  one  God,  and 
as  the  village  or  tribal  god  vanished  into  the  misty 


THINKING  43 

n  •  of  the  »ky,  the  question  of  the  relation  of  God 
to  man.   and  the  character  of  the  link  or  mediator, 

between  them  necessarily  became  of  more  importance. 
Here  we  see  our  old  philosophical  friend,  the  question 
of  the  one  and  the  many,  mind  and  matter,  •  rod  and  the 
world.  Since  the  Jews  lived  right  across  the  great 
north  road  from  Egypt  to  Assyria,  with  Palestine  as 
their  centre,  they  were  open  to  attack  from  all  sides,  and 
as  their  tribal  gods  had  vanished  and  could  no  longer 
help  them,  their  prophets  foretold  that  the  Great  <  rod 
Jehovah  would  send  a  Messiah,  who  would  deliver  them 
"from  their  troubles;  then,  as  we  all  know,  Christ  was 
born,  and  after  a  short  life  claimed  to  he  that  very 
Messiah,  the  link  between  heaven  and  earth.  The 
Christian  religion  gradually  spread  along  the  northern 
shores  of  Africa  and  across  the  Mediterranean  to  Italy, 
ultimately  to  become,  in  the  form  of  the  Catholic 
Church,  the  dominant  religion  of  the  Holy  Roman 
Empire. 

We  must  now  go  back  about  three  centuries  and  call 
to  mind  that  after  the  death  of  Aristotle,  Greece  began 
to  fall  to  pieces.  The  only  philosophy  that  held  the 
field,  apart  from  Aristotelian  Science  was  Stoicism.  As 
Greece  was  gradually  subdued  by  the  Romans,  Greek 
culture  naturally  suffered  considerably,  and  many  of  the 
philosophers  fled  across  the  Mediterranean  to  Egypt. 
Their  Stoic  doctrine  was  largely  Platonic,  but  later 
underwent  a  change,  dividing  broadly  into  two  main 
streams,  one  becoming  Christian,  the  other  anti- 
( Christian.  The  anti-Christian  embodied  characteristics 
that  differed  from  those  of  Plato's  time;  we  therefore 
distinguish  between  the  old  Platonic  school  and  the  New 
Platonists,  or  Neoplatonists,  who  took  their  rise  about 
the  time  of  Christ,  and  who  opposed  Christianity-  Just 
as  the  meeting  of  Ionian  and  Italian  philosophers  in 
Athens  produced  dialectics,  and  ultimately  the  science 
of  logic,  so  did  the  meeting  of  Stoic  philosophers,  or 
their  disciples,  with  the  early  Christians,  lead  to 
Christian  Theology;  though  we  have  here  to  do  not  so 
much  with  Greeks,  as  with  men  of  other  nationalities 
who  had  been  influenced  by  Greek  culture. 


44  THINKING 

Since  our  work  in  the  main  is  to  follow  philosophy, 
evidently  it  is  not  our  business  to  discuss  theology 
except  in  so  far  as  its  development  takes  into  account 
questions  of  a  philosphical  character,  such  as  the 
freedom  of  the  will,  the  relation  between  men  and  God, 
or  between  the  many  and  the  one.  In  doing  this  we 
must  bear  in  mind  that  philosophy  had  developed  two 
broad  lines;  first,  Scepticism,  which  of  course  had 
nothing  to  do  with  religion,  because  it  did  not  accept 
anything  as  being  known  to  be  true;  and  second, 
Morality,  which  was  represented  by  Epicureans  on  the 
one  hand  and  Stoics  on  the  other.  Epicureans,  as  we 
have  seen,  did  not  believe  in  any  divine  principle, 
while  the  Stoics  did,  as  of  course  did  Christians. 
Epicureanism  entailed  the  belief  in  a  free  will,  which 
was  in  accord  with  Christianity,  though  its  belief  in 
atomism  with  no  divine  principle  was  the  very  reverse. 
It  was  therefore  the  Stoics  who  were  the  most 
philosophically  inclined  to  accept  Christian  principles. 
But  the  Stoics  pinned  their  faith  to  "  destiny,"  and 
accordingly  did  not  believe  in  the  freedom  of  the  will, 
and  unless  this  principle  is  accepted  the  Christian 
doctrine  of  atonement  is  useless,  for  if  responsibility  for 
one's  acts  is  not  recognised  and  accepted,  atonement 
for  sin  has  no  meaning.  Therefore  those  of  the  Stoics 
and  others  who  refused  to  come  to  terms  with 
Christianity,  developed  a  religious  belief  of  a  mystical 
character;  these  were  the  Neoplatonists;  we  will  return 
to  them  later. 

The  question  of  free  will,  which,  by  the  way, 
"  philosophers  "  have  not  yet  settled,  led  to  a  discussion 
which  ended  in  the  general  acceptance  of  the  Christian 
position  (though  even  in  the  Church  there  was  much 
disagreement,  as,  for  example,  between  Augustine  and 
Pelagius  in  the  beginning  of  the  fifth  century),  which  is 
that  God  is  the  source  of  all  that  is  good,  that  man  has 
a  free  will  to  chose  either  good  or  evil,  but  when  he 
choses  to  do  what  he  knows  to  be  right,  at  that  moment 
God  gives  him  the  Grace  to  carry  out  his  intention.  It 
was  therefore  not  in  his  own  strength  that  a  Christian 
fulfilled  the  moral  law,  but  by  the  Grace  of  God.     To 


THINKING  45 

win  this  Grace  one  must  have  faith  in  God  and  be  a 
member  of  God's  Holy  (wholly  or  unci  Church.  The 
Christian  counted  himself  a  child  of  God  by  right  oi 

initiation  through  baptism,  which  could  apply  to  all  men 

willing  to  become  members  of  the  oik-  Holy  Church, 
whereas  the   lew  was  a  child  of  God  only  by  right  ol 

nationality,  and  the  Stoic  by  individual  right.  There- 
fore the  possibility  of  applying  the  Christian  principle  of 

initiation  to  all  mankind,  along  with  the  feeling  we  all 
have  of  acting  freely,  and  the  feeling  that  we  must  take 
the  consequences  of  our  acts,  won  recognition  in 
Roman  times,  the  more  so  because  it  was  allied  with 
the  hardness  of  the  Stoic  temper,  though  not  in  such  an 
extreme  form  as  early  Stoicism. 

From  the  philosophic  .standpoint,  however,  it  was 
more  particularly  the  principle  of  having  a  mediator 
between  the  one  and  the  many  that  formed  the  link 
between  Platonic  philosophy  and  Christian  faith,  and 
this  mediator  was  Jesus  Christ,  who  was  at  one  and  the 
same  time  both  Cod  and  man,  and  was,  moreover,  the 
only  mediator. 

There  were  other  partially  christianised  systems  of 
religion  that,  largely  influenced  by  their  many  former 
and  not  entirely  disregarded  pagan  gods,  indulged  their 
fancy  with  long  chains  of  mediators  or  divine  beings 
of  different  grades,  and  this  tendency  reacted  on 
Christianity  in  the  institution  of  saints  and  angels; 
though  these  have  never  by  the  authorities  of  the 
Church  been  identified  with  the  Divine  nature,  for 
Christ  alone  was  both  Cod  and  man. 

We  have  seen  that  Christians  believed  first,  that  God 
was  One;  second,  that  His  character  was  exemplified  in 
the  life  of  Christ;  and  third,  that  personal  intercourse 
with  Cod  or  Jesus  was  to  be  attained  by  loving  service 
to  other  men,  for  "  Inasmuch  as  ye  have  done  it  unto 
one  of  the  least  of  these  my  brethren,  ye  have  done  it 
unto  me"  (Matt,  xxv.,  40).  This  kind  of  religious 
belief  gave  rise  to  the  philosophical  question,  what  is 
there  in  the  nature  of  God  and  of  man  and  of  the 
mediator  between  them  which  allows  of  such  inter- 
course, or,  what  is  the  unity  amidsl  all  this  multiplicity, 


46  THINKING 

or,  to  put  it  another  way,  how  can  God  the  Father,  God 
the  Son,  and  the  universal  Spirit  that  dwells  in  the 
faithful,  or  God  the  Holy  Ghost,  be  three  (a  Trinity) 
and  at  the  same  time  one  (a  Unity)  ?  The  view  taken 
by  Christian  theologians  is  that  these  three  distinct 
elements,  each  of  which  is  God,  find  their  unity  in  Love, 
wherein  all  believers,  even  the  most  lowly,  may  be 
united  with  God  the  Father  through  Jesus  Christ,  who 
establishes  the  connection  of  the  Supreme  Godhead  with 
the  material  world.  So  we  see  that  one  branch  of  Stoic 
philosophy  became  absorbed  by,  and  subordinated  to, 
Christian  Theology,  and  as  far  as  Europe  was  concerned 
remained  in  that  humble  position  throughout  the  Middle 
Ages. 

Let  us  now  go  back  to  the  other  branch  of  the  Stoics 
and  those  who  still  thought  after  the  manner  of  the 
older  schools,  who  became  anti-Christian — the  Neopla- 
tonists.  Here  again  we  see  a  conflux  of  two  streams, 
but  this  time  it  is  between  Platonic  philosophy  and 
eastern  religious  thought  of  the  theosophical  brand 
which  came  from  farther  East  than  the  seat  of 
Christianity.  The  Neoplatonists,  in  working  out  the 
idea  of  mediation,  sought  rather  to  keep  the  Godhead 
separate  from  the  material  world,  while  Christians  had 
sought  to  definitely  connect  them  in  the  person  of  Jesus 
Christ.  Christians  brought  God  down  into  the  world, 
Neoplatonists  made  the  world  strive  towards  God. 

Philosophy,  we  remember,  had  been  exiled  from 
Greece.  In  its  old  home  Scepticism  had  killed  it.  "  It 
had  started  with  the  doubt  of  the  child,  had  asked  its 
questions,  attempted  answers,  and  had  finished  with  the 
doubt  of  old  age;  "  all  it  had  left  behind  of  permanent 
value  was  a  partly  developed  method  of  thinking — 
Aristotelian  logic.  But  if  it  found  no  worshippers  in 
Greece,  it  was  welcomed  in  Egypt,  where  the  doctrines 
were  new  and  therefore  interesting.  In  Alexandria 
several  schools  were  formed,  and  here  took  place  the 
early  struggles  between  Neoplatonist  and  Christian. 
This  city,  lying  in  the  track  of  a  later  sea  trading  route 
between  East  and  West,  was  naturally  a  great  centre  of 
commerce,  and  in  science  came  to  rival  Athens.     All 


THINKING  47 

those  people  who  Sought  a  refuge  from  Scepticism, 

together  might  he  called  the  Alexandrian  school,  while 
the  Neoplatonists  constituted  the  most  illustrious 
section  of  that  movement;  in  following  them  we  shall 
see  the  final  act  in  the  drama  of  Greek  Philosophy. 

Greek  ideas  of  course  had  taken  root  in  Alexandria 
long  before  Christ,  but  Neoplatonism  proper  began 
with  a  Jew  named  PHILO  (born  c.  20  B.C.,  of 
Alexandria),  who  represented  a  mixture  of  Greek- 
dialectics  and  Eastern  mysticism.  He  had  learned 
dialectics  from  the  works  of  Plato  and  others,  but  the 
New  Academicians  (almost  complete  sceptics,  who 
taught  long  after  Plato  in  Plato's  old  school,  the 
Academy),  Arcesilaus  and  Carneades,  had  taught  him  to 
apply  the  method  sceptically.  In  the  spirit  of  these  men 
he  distrusted  all  knowledge  gained  by  the  senses,  and 
since  Reason,  reasoned  on  the  basis  of  such  knowledge, 
then  Reason  itself  could  not  get  at  truth.  But  besides 
Greek  dialectics  of  that  kind  he  possessed  a  large 
measure  of  Oriental  mysticism,  which  led  him  to  say 
that  though  the  Senses  and  Reason  were  powerless,  and 
thus  far  he  was  a  philosopher,  there  was  still  the  faculty 
of  Faith,  and  this,  the  gift  of  God,  was  real  Science  or 
Knowledge;  his  philosophy  then  became  theology. 
With  Philo,  God  was  the  one  Unity;  his  nature  could 
never  be  known,  but  we  knew  of  his  existence  in  the 
"  The  Word."  This  "  Word  "  had  a  twofold  character, 
it  was  first,  God's  thought  (mind),  and  second,  God's 
thought  carried  out  or  expressed  in  the  existing  world 
as  we  know  it  (matter).  We  have  already  seen  the 
subordination  of  one  branch  of  philosophy  to 
Christianity;  we  now  see  the  other  trying  to  establish  a 
rival  theology  and  to  found  a  Church.  As  regards 
Epicureanism,  this  had  long  ago  become  indifferent,  a 
sort  of  common-sense  scepticism. 

Following  Philo  came  PLOTINUS  (c.  203—262  A.D., 
an  Egyptian),  the  greatest  of  the  Neoplatonists,  who 
thought  with  Plato  that  nothing  but  universals  (  Forms) 
could  be  true  (see  Fig.  1).  We  knew  phenomena  through 
our  senses,  and  the  universals  we  knew  through  our 
intelligence  acting  in  relation  to  sense  perceptions,  but. 


48  THINKING 

since  that  ended  the  reasoning  process,  how  were  we  to 
know  God  ?  Plotinus  answered,  that  since  Reason 
could  go  no  farther,  we  could  only  know  God  when  in 
a  state  of  ecstacy,  wherein  Reason  plays  no  part,  for 
Reason,  if  it  could  know  the  infinite  would  have  to  be 
the  Infinite;  therefore  we  could  only  know  God  by 
being  God,  and  in  a  state  of  ecstacy  or  rapture  we  became 
part  of,  or  rather  absorbed  in  God,  and  only  in  this  way 
could  we  come  to  know  God.  God  stood  revealed  to 
us  only  because  we  had  become  One  with  Him.  This 
state  of  rapture,  he  thought,  might  be  gained  in  some 
natures  by  Music  (including  poetry,  beauty,  rythm  and 
such  like);  other  natures,  such  as  those  of  philosophers, 
were  ravished  through  the  contemplation  of  Unity  and 
Proportion  (the  wonderful  order  in  the  universe) ;  others 
again,  by  the  pursuit  of  moral  perfection  executed  in 
the  sphere  of  love  and  prayer.  Ecstacy  was  not  the 
connection  between  the  one  and  the  many,  the  passage 
from  one  state  to  the  other  was  made  without  such  a 
mundane  and  even  vulgar  nuisance  as  a  connection,  for 
such  would  have  defiled  the  pure  essence  of  God. 

The  Alexandrian  Trinity  (some  say  the  Christian  idea 
of  the  Trinity  was  an  imitation  of  the  Alexandrian, 
others  say  the  reverse)  consisted  of  three  persons;  the 
third,  or  most  inferior  grade,  was  the  soul  or  cause  of 
all  the  activity  and  life  in  worldly  things ;  the  second  was 
the  Intelligence  or  universal  Being  (universals);  the  first 
was  not  Being  of  any  kind,  but  simply  Unity.  Since 
Unity  was  not  Being,  it  was  something  that  could  never 
be  conceived  in  thought;  it  was  not  nothing,  but  "  that 
zvhich  thought,  that  zvhich  existed. "  In  like  manner  the 
circus  clown  says  the  world  rests  on  a  rock,  and  that  on 
another  rock,  and  that  on  the  bottom;  but  this  bottom 
is  unexplainable,  mysterious;  and  the  Alexandrian 
Unity  had  the  same  mysterious  character.  So  we  see 
that  what  remained  of  Platonic  philosophy  lost  itself  in 
mysticism — the  mysticism  of  the  supernatural.  (Let  the 
reader  reserve  his  laugh  until  he  has  "  done  his  bit  "  to 
free  the  modern  world  from  the  same  sort  of  thing;  for 
there  are  plenty  of  mystics  living  to-day  whose  breasts 
swell  with  ecstatic  fervour  while  thev  listen  to  sermons, 


THINKING  49 

march   to   "glory,"   or,    drunk   with   breath-arresting 
asthetics,  pay  court  in  a  hundred  other  ways  to  "  the 

beautiful.") 

With  regard  to  the  creation  of  the  world.  Christiana 
said  that  God  created  it  out  of  nothing,  for,  being  all 
powerful,  one  thing  was  as  easy  as  another.  The 
Alexandrian  dialecticians  maintained  that  out  of  nothing 
nothing  could  come;  they  therefore  accounted  for  the 
world  of  many  things  by  saying  the  many  were  simply 
emanations  of  Clod's  will,  that  is,  the  many  consisted  of 
I  iod's  acts,  not  his  substance. 

From  Alexandria,  Plotinus  went  to  Rome,  and  was 
there  associated  with  Porphyry  and  Iamblicus.  In 
Rome  the  Alexandrian  school  became  a  sort  of  Church, 
and  disputed  with  Christianity  for  world  empire. 
Christianity  ascended  the  throne  in  the  person  of 
Constantine.  Afterwards  Neoplatonism  was  repre- 
sented there  by  Julian;  but  Christianity  did  not  depend 
upon  support  from  Emperors,  and  continued  to  flourish 
after  it  lost  Constantine,  whereas  when  the  Neopla- 
tonists  lost  Julian  thev  lost  power  and  influence.  Their 
last  fight  for  philosophic  life  took  place  with  PROCLUS 
(412 — 485  A.D.,  of  Xanthus,  Asia  Minor,  afterwards 
Alexandria  and  Athens)  as  leader.  He  took  Plato  as  an 
idol.  The  inscription,  "  Know  thyself,"  on  the  temple 
at  Delphi,  Socrates  had  taken  as  an  exhortation  to 
ethical  study.  Plato  had  taken  it  to  mean  that  in 
knowing  one's  self,  that  is,  in  knowing  one's  mind,  one 
would  become  acquainted  with  the  eternal  Forms.  But 
Proclus  thought  that  in  knowing  ourselves  we  really 
know  the  divine  One,  of  whom  oneself  is  but  a  ray  of 
that  Unity.  With  Proclus  metaphysics  is  the  only 
possible  science;  it  descends  to  us  from  above,  and  is 
more  perfect  than  that  which  is  the  result  of  investiga- 
tion. "  Invention  is  the  energy  of  the  soul.  "  "  Omnes 
Scientia  vera  est  a  Deo  "  (All  true  knowledge  comes 
from  God). 

Proclus,  the  last  genius  of  Xeoplatonism.  had  tried  to 
give  it  new  life,  but  had  failed,  and  under  Justinian  the 
Alexandrian  school  became  extinct.  With  this  we  may 
say  that  Greek  philosophy  came  to  an  end  in  its  original 

D 


50  THINKING 

home,  for  with  the  sack  of  Rome  in  the  fifth  century,  by 
barbarians  from  the  North,  and  the  general  subjugation 
of  the  Pagan  civilisations  of  southern  Europe,  learning 
in  these  regions  suffered  shipwreck;  libraries  were 
destroyed,  and  the  main  portion  of  Aristotelian 
philosophy  and  science  migrated  mainly  to  Syria,  Arabia 
and  Persia.  Meanwhile  in  Europe,  as  already  stated, 
a  modified  Platonic  philosophy  became  the  handmaid  of 
Roman  Catholicism,  and  continued  in  that  character 
through  the  Dark  Ages. 

Abstract. — With  the  Stoics,  philosophy  returned 
to  faith.  One  portion  of  it  became  a  sort  of  works 
manager  to  Christian  Faith,  while  the  other  trickled  out 
in  mysticism.  The  only  positive  result  was  the 
evolution  of  a  partial  method  of  logical  thinking  that 
required  further  perfecting;  in  this  lay  the  progress. 
Apart  somewhat  from  the  above  we  have  seen  the  bases 
of  two  great  lines  of  what  became  traditional  thought — 
the  Pagan  and  the  Christian.  The  Pagan  thinking, 
symbolised  under  the  name  of  Aristotelianism,  included 
the  physical  science  of  the  times,  while  Christian 
thought  appeared  as  the  teaching  of  the  Roman  Catholic 
Church. 


CHAPTER    IV 

Philosophy  in  the  Middle  Ages 

As  the  destruction  of  the  Roman  Empire  had  made 
learning  and  the  pursuit  of  knowledge  on  the  former 

scale  impossible,  through  libraries  being  scattered, 
endowments  of  centres  of  learning  being  confiscated, 
and  so  on;  teachers  and  scholars  not  under  the  auspices 
of  the  Church  had  to  seek  a  living  elsewhere.  They 
went  to  Asia,  whilst  Christian  theologians  and  teachers 
remained  in  Europe.  We  shall  now  follow  those  two 
branches  of  thought  to  show  bow  they  ultimately  unite 
in  the  twelfth  and  thirteenth  centuries,  and  also  the 
consequent  conflict  of  their  separate  influences  during 
the  Renaissance. 

The  philosophy  of  Christianity  was  mainly  Platonic, 
but  tbe  Church  possessed  a  little  Aristotelian  influence, 
principally  in  the  domain  of  science,  more  particularly  in 
the  science  of  logic.  When  the  shipwreck  of  learning 
took  place,  by  far  the  greater  portion  of  Aristotle's 
works  were  lost,  or  rather  lost  to  Europe;  but  one  of 
the  barbarian  chieftains,  Theodoric,  himself  not  a 
scholar,  appointed  as  his  ministers  Cassiodorus  and 
Boetbius,  two  of  the  most  learned  men  at  bis  disp 
who  were  to  save  what  they  could  from  tbe  wreck. 
Cassiodorus  (born  about  480)  founded  monasteries, 
wherein  monks  were  to  preserve  such  books  as  they  bad. 
and  were  to  study  them.  Tin's  bad  a  greal  influence  in 
determining  the  available  order  ami  extent  of  study 
throughout  the  Middle  Ages,  because  it  brought  about 
the  fact  that  during  that  period  learning  was  under  tbe 
control  of  the  faithful,  which  meant  under  the  control 

51 


52  THINKING 

of  the  Catholic  Church.  Boethius  (c.  470 — 524) 
occupied  himself  very  largely  in  translating"  from  Greek 
to  Latin  works  of  Plato,  Aristotle,  Euclid,  Archimedes 
and  Porphyry.  Porphyry,  we  remember,  was  the 
friend  of  Plotinus,  a  Neoplatonist  and  opponent  of 
Christianity,  but  he  had  written  an  introduction  to 
Aristotle's  logic.  This  book,  being  only  an  introduc- 
tion, was  necessarily  very  elementary,  but  of  logic  they 
had  very  little  else  from  the  ninth  to  the  twelfth  century. 
Logic  is  concerned  with  making  distinctions  between 
different  things,  or  between  different  parts  of  a  thing, 
that  they  may  be  better  understood  through  the 
different  things  or  parts  being  arranged  or  classified. 
Porphyry's  book  dealt  with  minor  and  relatively 
unimportant  distinctions  between  Genera,  Species, 
Differences,  Properties  and  Accidents;  these  were 
known  as  the  five  predicables,  and  were  supposed  to 
represent  the  different  classes  or  grades  of  qualities 
possessed  by  things;  for  example,  taking  the  word 
"animal"  as  the  Genus,  this  Genus  includes  many 
Species  of  animals,  such  as  fish,  the  horse  or  man.  But 
man  possesses  many  qualities  called  Differences,  by 
which  he  differs  from  all  other  species,  such  as  the 
power  of  articulate  speech.  He  also  possesses  other 
qualities  called  Properties,  not  so  sharply  defined  as 
differences,  but  yet  possessed  by  the  whole  species,  for 
instance,  a  relative  capacity  for  argument.  And  finally, 
by  accident  as  it  were,  men  may  or  may  not  be  tall,  ugly, 
fair  or  thickskinned,  etc. ;  such  qualities,  which  do  not 
apply  to  the  whole  class  are  termed  Accidents. 
Porphyry's  elementary  logic,  although  it  called  atten- 
tion to  the  relation  between  Genera  and  Species,  yet  did 
not  attempt  the  solution,  for  that  question  was  too  big 
for  such  a  small  work,  being  in  fact  the  root  question  in 
philosophy — the  one  and  the  many,  mind  and  matter, 
God  and  the  world,  the  Trinity,  etc. ;  nor  did  it  receive 
any  particular  attention  throughout  the  Dark  Ages,  a 
period  consisting  of  from  four  to  five  centuries,  during 
which  no  great  thinkers  came  to  light ;  but  it  became  the 
central  point  of  discussion  during  the  Scholastic  period, 
which  occupied  from  about  the  ninth  to  the  fifteenth 


THINKING  53 

century,  for  in  the  ninth  century  an  intellectual 
fermenl  began,  which  developed  in  itensity  as  time 
u  enl  on. 

The  scholars  of  those  times,  or  the  Schoolmen  as  they 
are  called,  had  received  their  training  in  the  form  <>i 
Christian  tradition,  and  to  question  the  roots  of  that 
teaching  was  no  light  task,  the  more  so  since  they  them- 
selves were  men  of  faith.  Nevertheless,  they  began  to 
ask  awkward  questions  concerning  Genera  and  Species, 
and  even  .attempted  answers.  This  gave  rise  to  a 
discussion  between  what  were  called  the  Nominalists 
and  the  Realists.  AXSKI.M  (1033 — [109,  Archbishop 
of  Canterbury  from  1003  till  his  death),  whose  doctrine 
came  ultimately  from  Plato,  was  a  realist  who  believed 
that  universals  (see  Fig.  1)  had  a  real  existence; 
ROSCELLINUS,  his  contemporary,  took  (partly  from 
Aristotle)  the  opposite  view,  that  only  individuals  (the 
Med  copies  of  the  universals)  really  existed,  and 
that  universals  were  no  more  than  names,  that  is,  that 
they  existed  only  nominally.  The  latter  view,  of 
course,  denies  the  Oneness  of  the  three  Gods— the 
doctrine  of  the  Trinity.  The  discussion  lasted  for 
centuries;  meanwhile  the  scholastics  practised  the  art  of 
argument  and  sharpened  their  wits  by  means  of 
elementary  logic  to  such  an  extent  that  many  of  them, 
such  as  Roscellinus  and  PETER  ABEL  ART)  (1079 — 
1142,  of  Palais,  near  Nantes,  later  a  theologian  of 
Notre  Dame,  Paris)  were  becoming  heretics.  They 
were  substituting  reason  for  faith,  and  that  could 
not  be  tolerated  by  the  Fathers  of  the  Church  at  any 
cost.  The  whole  period  was  one  of  confused  thinking 
and  hair  splitting  arguments,  so  much  so  that  the 
Schoolmen,  with  their  characteristic  doubt,  resembled 
the  Sophists  of  Socrates'  time.  There  was  accordingly 
a  philosophical  disruption  taking  place,  which  might  (so 
it  appears  on  the  surface)  possibly  have  been  kept  under 
by  the  rulers  of  the  Church,  had  it  not  been  that  in  the 
twelfth  century  many  of  the  lost  works  of  Aristotle  at 
last  made  their  way  into  Europe.  This  recovery  led  to 
important  philosophical  developments,  and  as  a  prelude 
to  a  discussion  of  these  we  now  go  back  to  the  dispersal 


54  THINKING 

of  those  works  to  briefly  follow  their  course  from 
Greece  to  Asia  and  back  to  Europe. 

The  last  of  the  Greek  philosophers  had  been  driven 
by  Justinian  (483 — 565,  Emperor  of  Constantinople  and 
Rome)  to  find  refuge  in  Asia,  and  were  welcomed  in 
Persia,  but  particularly  in  Bagdad.  They  took  with 
them  the  works  of  Aristotle,  and  the  philosophy 
contained  in  them  became  the  basis  of  that  which  is 
called  Arabian.  It  is  not  Arabian,  however,  but  Greek, 
Jewish  and  Persian.  Arabian  philosophy  represented  a 
small  section  of  a  great  Mohammedan  movement,  and 
at  bottom  constituted  a  reaction  against  Islam. 
Islamism  is  a  wide-spread  religion  founded  by  Mahomet 
(or  Mohammed,  571—632),  who  imagined  himself  the 
apostle  of  God;  its  centre  was  Mecca,  in  Arabia.  After 
the  death  of  Mahomet  it  spread  north-east  to  Samarkand 
and  Bokhara  (North  of  Afghanistan),  north  to  Armenia 
and  Turkey,  and  north-west  along  the  northern  shores 
of  Africa  to  Morocco,  and  to  Cordova  in  Andalusia 
(southern  Spain).  The  reaction  to  which  we  have 
referred  arose  in  those  distant  parts  of  the  Arabian 
Empire. 

The  Arabs  were  illiterate,  but  as  they  spread,  they 
endeavoured  to  glorify  their  dynasty  with  Letters,  and 
found  many  Greeks,  Jews  and  Christians  willing  to  give 
them  Arabian  and  Syriac  translations  of  Athenian  and 
Alexandrian  writers.  Thus  it  came  about  that  Aristotle 
was  presented  under  the  guise  of  Arabian  philosophy, 
and  was  also  mixed  up  with  Alexandrian  science. 
Europe  then  is  indebted  to  the  Arabs  for  the 
preservation  of  those  Greek  writings  that  had  such  an 
influence  during  the  period  immediately  preceding  the 
Renaissance. 

While  learning  in  Christian  Europe  in  the  tenth 
century  was  decadent,  Andalusia  under  Mohammedan 
rule  was  the  centre  of  light,  and  from  Cordova,  the 
above  mentioned  city,  came  Averroes  (c.  1126 — 1198). 
who  was  born  there.  He  translated,  and  commented 
on,  Aristotle's  teaching,  and  his  writings  constituted 
one  of  the  principal  media  by  which  Arab  culture  spread 
slowly  through  Europe.      We  have  already  seen  that 


THINKING 

disputes  were  going  on  in  Parisian  theological  quai 

and  that  the  Church  of  Koine  had  found  it  difficult  to 
keep  heresy  in  check;  but  when  the  later  worl 
Aristotle  were  introduced,  which  seemed  to  offer  an 
explanation  of  almost  everything,  the  disputes  were 
furious  and  deep.  Aristotle  had  taught  that  the  world 
was  eternal,  had  not  been  created,  and  would  not  end; 
he  had  also  taught  that  individual  souls  (though  not  the 
soul  of  the  species)  were  mortal,  thus  denying  the 
Christian  doctrine  of  immortality;  in  fact  this  question 
of  what  constituted  an  individual  as  distinct  from  a 
universal  was  always  obtruding.  These  doctrines  were, 
moreover,  supported  by  a  more  advanced  logic  than  had 
been  at  the  disposal  of  the  men  of  Abelard's  time.  They 
were,  of  course,  directly  opposed  to  Christian  teaching, 
so,  to  get  such  questions  settled  became  a  very  urgent 
matter."  THOMAS  AQUINAS  (1226— 1274,  of  Aquino, 
Italy),  a  Dominican,  took  the  affair  in  hand  and  tried  to 
reconcile  Aristotle  and  the  Church.  By  his  working  out 
he  arrived  at  the  idea  that  certain  truths  might  be 
discovered  by  man's  reason,  but  there  were  other  truths 
that  could  only  be  known  through  supernatural 
revelation,  "  though  he  loved  Aristotle,  he  loved  the 
Church  more."  This  ending  to  the  attempt  to  reconcile 
the  two  great  lines  of  traditional  thought — the  Pagan 
and  the  Christian,  or  logic  (reason)  and  faith,  only  meant 
that  what  could  not  be  logically  explained  by  reason  in 
such  a  manner  that  it  would  satisfy  faith,  must  be  left  to 
faith.  However,  there  were  other  thinkers  who  were 
not  satisfied,  because  both  traditions  were  dogmatic, 
both  had  been  regarded  as  infallible,  and  both  were 
concerned  with  the  question  of  essential  truth,  yet 
embodied  different  and  apparently  irreconcilable  con- 
clusions, so  what  could  be  made  of  it  all?  DUNS 
SCOTUS  (c.  1274 — 1308,  British),  a  Franciscan,  tried  to 
reconcile  Nominalism  and  Realism,  even  as  Aquinas  had 
tried,  though  he  quarrelled  with  the  latter  on  some 
points,  being  more  inclined  to  give  prominence  to  the 
reality  of  the  individual,  in  so  far  as  he  thought  that  the 
individual  nature  was  a  higher  perfection  of  the 
universal    nature;    in    other   words,    he    had    a    strong 


56  THINKING 

leaning  towards  Nominalism.  WILLIAM  of  OCCAM 
(died  1350,  of  Ockham,  in  Surrey),  another  Franciscan, 
went  much  farther  towards  Nominalism,  the  growth  of 
which,  since  it  cut  out  the  reality  of  universals, 
represented  a  desire  to  escape  from  both  Christian  and 
Classical  tradition.  On  the  other  hand,  WILLIAM  of 
CHAMPEAUX  was  an  out  and  out  realist.  There  were 
indeed  some  who  thought  of  a  double  standard  of  truth 
— that  a  thing  might  be  true  in  philosophy  but  not  in 
theology,  and  vice  versa,  however,  this  need  not  be 
discussed,  as  it  was  evidently  quite  unsatisfactory  and 
left  no  particular  historic  mark.  It  should  go  without 
saying  that  Faith  neither  had  or  has  any  need  to  reason 
or  to  argue,  and  we  can  see  clearly  how  in  doing  so  it 
began  its  own  undoing,  for  the  fight  between  Reason 
and  Faith  led  to  greater  freedom  in  thinking,  and,  taken 
on  the  whole,  it  became  impossible  any  longer  to 
reconcile  philosophy  and  theology;  but  to  under- 
stand the  utter  confusion  of  thought  prevailing 
with  gradually  increasing  intensity  throughout  the 
Scholastic  period,  and  which  culminated  in  the 
breakdown  of  both  Classical  and  Christian  tradition, 
we  shall  have  to  look  at  the  material  development 
underlying  it. 

In  pre-Christian  and  early  Christian  times  Greece  and 
Rome  were  founded  on  wealth  produced  by  chattel 
slaves.  In  its  early  days  Christianity  had  a  hard  fight, 
but  had  become  well  established  by  the  fifth  century,  at 
which  period  pagan  Rome  became  subject  to  northern 
invaders.  The  object  of  conquest  was,  of  course,  that 
the  conquered  might  pay  tribute,  but  tribute  involved 
the  labour  of  the  slaves,  therefore  extermination  would 
not  have  served  the  purpose  of  the  conquerors;  instead, 
many  of  the  new  rulers  or  kings  became  converted  to 
Christianity,  and  so  ruled  their  subjects  through 
concessions  to  the  Pope,  who  held  Spiritual  Power  over 
the  mass  of  the  people;  many  even  received  their 
coronation  at  his  hands  in  spiritual  righteousness.  But 
the  kings  did  not  forget  to  fight  among  themselves  for 
the  purpose  of  extending  their  domains  and  acquiring 
wealth  and  power.     For  this  purpose,  as  time  went  on, 


Till  Ml  57 

required  ever  greater  and  greatei  numbei 
fighting  men  and  trusted  leaders.  The  leaders  re<  ■ 
in  payment  grants  of  land,  subject  to  a  promise  to  fi^ht 
for  the  kings  when  necessary.  Bui  land  without  laboui 
was  no  use,  and  as  the  land  was  granted  on  condition- 
of  armed  service  on  the  kings'  behalf,  so  also  was  the 
labour  that  worked  the  land.  And  so  it  came  about 
that  where  former  masters  actually  owned  slaves  in  the 
way  they  owned  cattle,  afterwards  the  slaves  were  nol 
owned  in  person,  but  were  attached  to  the  land,  and 
should  a  lord  be  deposed  in  favour  of  another,  the 
slaves  or  serfs  stayed  where  they  were  under  the  new 
master.  Since  the  system  of  landholding  was  founded 
on  military  service,  or  fighting,  it  is  spoken  of  as 
Feudalism.  There  existed,  then,  a  Spiritual  Power  and 
a  Military  Power,  both  of  which  required  monetary 
support.  The  Church  claimed  tithes  (the  tenth  part  of 
a  man's  income)  for  its  clergy,  who  had  to  remit  a 
portion  to  Rome.  Evidently  what  found  its  way  to 
Rome  could  not  go  into  the  pockets  of  the  kings,  and 
naturally  Church  and  kings  quarrelled  about  "  their 
rights,"  the  Church  enforcing  its  views  by  thre.r. 
excommunication;  and  excommunication  was  never  a 
small  affair  to  a  good  Catholic,  for  "  what  doth  it  profit 
a  man  if  he  gain  the  whole  world  and  suffer  the  loss  of 
his  own  soul  ?  " 

Occasionally  Rome  claimed  extraordinary  tributes, 
and  for  both  ordinary  and  extraordinary,  employe' 
Italian  merchants  to  collect  the  dues  in  the  form  of 
merchandise,  mainly  wool,  to  have  it  dyed  and  woven, 
to  sell  it  and  forward  the  proceeds,  less  a  commission,  to 
Rome.  These  merchants  became  the  Florentine 
bankers.  At  the  same  time,  there  were  many  wandering 
Jewish  merchants  and  trader-  also  amassing  mi  i 
with  which  they  could  accommodate  needy  kings  and 
nobles.  Incidentally,  we  might  point  to  the  cultural 
influence  of  these  traders,  who  knew  the  different 
languages  of  the  people  with  whom  they  did  busil 
and  who  were  therefore  a  great  factor  in  the  spread  of 
learning  in  art,  in  literature,  in  science,  in  law.  in 
comparative  religion,  in  the  keeping  of  accounts,  and. 


58  THINKING 

therefore,  in  stewardship  and  the  management  of 
estates,  etc.  As  a  blow  against  the  rising  power  of 
money,  the  Church  condemned  usury,  so  in  virtue  of 
that  condemnation,  the  nobles  could  satisfy  at  one  and 
the  same  time  both  their  spiritual  conscience  and  their 
material  well  being,  by  refusing  to  pay  interest  on 
borrowed  money.  Therefore,  while  the  nobility 
quarrelled  with  the  Church,  both  were  interested  in 
opposing  the  monetary  power  as  power  in  the  hands  of 
the  trading  or  merchant  class,  while  requiring  it  as 
power  for  themselves. 

Students  of  economic  history  are  well  aware  that  the 
rise  of  the  merchant  class  was  the  result  of  continued 
improvement  in  tools  a,nd  general  modes  of  producing 
zvealth,  which  caused  a  greater  and  greater  output, 
requiring  extensive  travel  to  secure  markets  and 
materials;  all  tending  to  the  formation  of  different 
groups,  with  different  interests,  which  reflected  them- 
selves in  correspondingly  different  modes  of  thought 
expressed  in  the  form  of  different  political  interests. 
Politically,  England,  France,  Holland,  and  Spain 
became  nations  with  national  interests  opposed  to  each 
other,  and  to  the  restraints  of  the  international  Church, 
while  within  those  nations  were  groups  with  particular 
interests  opposed  to  the  Church  on  the  one  hand  and 
the  kings  and  nobles  on  the  other.  These  groups  were 
the  merchants,  who  required  workers  freed  from  the 
feudal  nobility,  that  is,  freed  from  the  land  so  that  they 
might  be  freely  exploited  through  working  for  wages; 
they  wanted  also  to  be  free  from  the  necessity  of  paying 
tribute  to  Rome,  and  from  many  of  the  ordinances 
emanating  from  there.  They  rebelled  against  the  laws 
of  kings  and  the  laws  of  the  Church,  and  at  the  end  of 
the  fifteenth  century  they  had  reached  the  stage  at  which 
they  were  willing  to  pay  the  price  of  excommunication 
from  the  Catholic  Church,  because  by  that  time  their 
philosophical  representatives  had  discovered  a  new  way 
to  heaven  via  the  Reformation. 

It  may  help  us  to  understand  the  confusion  that 
prevailed  in  philosophy  during  the  scholastic  period  if 
we  remember  that  for  some  centuries  certain  nobles 


THINKING  SO 

could  at  fain  more  power  and  influence  by  supporting  the 
king,  others  by  supporting  the  ( Ihurch,  mainly  indii <  ctl) 
through  supporting  some  other  king,  while  the  trading 
class  had  been  gradually  rising;  and  that  the  sona  ol 

these  people,  or  poor  students  for  whom  they  found 
money,  had  gone  to  the  schools  and  carried  with  them 
the  mental  reflection  of  the  material  interests  of  which 
ever  class  or  group  they  represented.  The  new 
theological  and  anti-theological  mentality  of  the 
opponents  of  the  Church,  apparently  unconnected  with 
material  interests,  was  simply  the  indirect  rationalisa 
tion  of  those  interests,  and  was  accordingly  governed  by 
the  general  material  conditions  of  the  period.  Viewed 
in  this  light,  the  philosophic  confusion  appears  to  be 
merely  the  abstract  general  reflex  of  the  material  or 
economic  confusion  between  the  older  and  the  newer 
tools  or  modes  of  wealth  production,  which  produced 
the  merchants,  the  breakdown  of  manorial  economy, 
and  the  rise  of  the  monetary  system,  and  which  brought 
in  its  train  new  social  relations  requiring-  corres- 
pondingly new  ideas  of  justice  and  right.  We  may  also 
add  to  these  the  individual  or  personal  desires  of  the 
disputants,  an  example  of  which  may  be  found  in  Martin 
Luther  (1483— 1546),  wdiosc  famous  doctrine,  "  man  is 
justified  by  faith  alone,"  typified  the  desire  to  please 
oneself  about  ordinances,  penances,  celibacy,  etc.  All 
those  things  together  formed  the  groundwork  of  the 
Reformation,  for  in  order  to  do  what  they  felt  they 
must,  if  their  interests  were  to  be  served,  and  which, 
therefore,  seemed  to  them  to  be  right,  it  was  necessary 
to  attack  what,  to  them,  was  an  intolerable  religious 
authority;  but,  being  godly  men,  they  were  not  prepared 
to  overthrow  religion  altogether,  so  what  else  could 
they  do  but  find  fault  with  the  existing  religious  doctrine 
and  reform  it?  The  Reformation  was  merely  the  out- 
ward result  of  their  spiritual  justification  for  doing  what 
economic  forces  had  driven  them  to  do.  It  marked  tin- 
downfall  of  Papal  supremacy  in  many  European 
countries.  Christian  tradition  had  received  a  blow 
from  which  it  never  recovered,  and  in  consequence 
Philosophy  had  much  more  freedom,  not  because  the 


60  THINKING 

new  churches  were  more  tolerant,  but  because  the 
weight  of  ancient  authority  was  gone.  From  that  time 
to  the  present  Christianity  has  split  itself  into  an  ever- 
increasing  mass  of  contending  ruins — the  debris  of  a 
faded  mentality.  The  Catholic  Church  does,  indeed, 
maintain  consistency  amid  its  absurdity,  but  the  rest  are 
absurd  without  even  being  consistent. 

Now  how  was  it  with  the  other  tradition — that  of 
Aristotle  ?  In  1453,  a  century  before  the  death  of 
Luther,  the  Turks  captured  Constantinople;  this  made 
an  end  of  the  Holy  Roman  Empire,  but  it  also  caused 
Greek  scholars  to  flee  into  Italy,  and  thus  brought  the 
Greek  versions  of  Aristotle  within  reach  of  French  and 
German  students.  They  had  now  no  need  to  rely  on 
Arabian  and  Latin  translations,  the  works  of  Plato  and 
Aristotle  could  be  read  in  the  original,  and  so  was 
classical  antiquity  seen  more  clearly.  Aristotle  had 
taught  that  the  sun  moved  round  the  earth,  and  that  it 
was  made  of  a  material  different  from  that  of  the  earth; 
that  the  earth  was  still  and  flat;  also  several  other 
doctrines  which,  to  the  men  of  the  late  fifteenth  and  the 
early  sixteenth  centuries,  seemed  equally  absurd.  But 
why  had  these  doctrines  become  absurd  ?  To  see 
this  we  must  glance  at  the  scientific  attainments 
of  the  age. 

In  the  Middle  Ages  the  investigation  of  natural 
phenomena  had  been  neglected.  There  had,  indeed, 
been  a  few  alchemists  who  aimed  at  making  base  metals 
into  gold,  but  in  the  thirteenth  century  the  beginnings 
of  positive  science  may  be  seen  in  the  ideas  of  Albertus 
Magnus  (1193 — 1280),  a  Dominican,  and  ROGER 
BACON  (1214— 1294),  a  Franciscan.  Roger  Bacon,  a 
monk  of  Oxford,  thought  that  Aristotle's  logic,  which 
took  some  statement  as  being  true  and  then  made  deduc- 
tions from  it,  was  insufficient  unless  the  statement  or 
premise  from  which  the  deductions  were  made  had  first 
been  established  by  the  inductive  method  of  observation 
and  experiment.  This  amounts  to  saying  that  deduction 
is  all  right  in  its  place,  but  its  place  is  after  its  premises 
have  been  established  by  reason  first  examining  natural 
phenomena,    observing    what    takes    place,    and    then 


THINKING  t.i 

experimenting  to  verify  the  result,  that  is,  to  sec  if  the 
same  result  will  always  follow  from  the  same  material 
combinations.  This  method  of  searching  for  truth  is 
not  based  on  reason  only,  but  rather  Is  reason  itself 

based  upon  actual  experiment  with  natural  phenomena; 
m  attacked  religion  because  it  put  experiment  before 
authority,  and  it  attacked  philosophy  because  it  put 
experiment  before  logic,  so  where  previously  there  had 
been  a  split  between  Theology  (faith)  and  Philosophy 
(reason  or  logic),  there  now  came  a  split  between 
Philosophy  and  Science  (experiment  and  verification) 
concerning  the  proper  method  to  use  in  searching  for 
truth.  Roger  Bacon  and  "  the  Blessed  Albert," 
through  their  knowledge  of  nature,  were  regarded  as 
conjurors  in  the  popular  mind,  but  as  dangerous 
thinkers  by  their  theological  superiors.  The  inductive 
method  was  employed  with  wider  scope  three  centuries 
after  R.  Bacon  by  FRANCIS  BACON  (1561—162I 
London,  for  a  time  Lord  Chancellor),  who  is  known  as 
the  father  of  English  materialism,  though  it  must  he 
remembered  that  these  early  materialists  were  not  so 
complete  as  they  have  been  represented,  their  idea  was 
that  by  employing  the  inductive  method  of  research  they 
might  gain  a  better  and  more  complete  knowledge  ol 
Cod's  purposes  through  understanding  Cod's  works  in 
nature.  Bacon's  method  of  starting  from  experienced 
facts,  both  positive  and  negative,  was  not  followed 
entirely  by  succeeding  students,  nevertheless,  it  has  had 
a  powerful  influence;  nor  did  he  succeed  in  giving  to 
the  world  a  complete  philosophy  of  the  whole  range  ol 
natural  phenomena,  attempted  in  later  days  by  C<  >MTK 
(1798 — 1857,  of  Montpellier,  later  Paris),  and  still  later 
by  HERBERT  SPENCER  |  [820—1903,  of  Derby);  we 
shall  see  the  reason  in  Part  II.  So  much  for  the  method 
of  science,  now — a  few  facts.  At  the  end  of  the  fifteenth 
century  Copernicus,  a  Polish  mathematician,  hail 
taught,  with  great  success,  the  older  idea  that  not  the 
earth  but  the  sun  was  the  centre  of  our  planetary 
system,  and  that  the  earth  was  round  and  continually 
moving,  thus  giving  the  lie  to  Aristotle.  Columbus 
had  taken  the  rotundity  as  a   fact   in  an  endeavour  to 


62  THINKING 

avoid  Arab  plunderers  on  the  route  to  India,  and  had 
discovered  America  in  1492.  Vesalius,  at  no  great 
distance  in  the  sixteenth  century,  had  laid  the  basis  of 
modern  anatomy,  which  again  gave  the  lie  to 
Aristotelian  speculations.  William  Gilbert,  a  little  later, 
founded  the  science  of  terrestrial  magnetism,  which 
explained  much  that  had  hitherto  been  mysterious. 
Hans  Lippershey,  in  1608,  invented  the  telescope,  which 
was  perfected  by  Galileo,  who  succeeded,  by  means  of 
it,  in  spoiling  quite  a  number  of  ancient  astronomical 
ideas;  he  also  discovered  the  isochronism  of  the 
pendulum,  and  the  laws  of  falling  bodies,  proving  the 
previous  reasoning  on  those  points  to  be  definitely 
wrong.  Kepler,  about  the  end  of  the  sixteenth  century, 
formulated  the  laws  of  motion.  Under  the  weight  of 
all  this,  what  could  happen  to  Aristotelian  tradition  but 
that  it  should  fall  into  the  dust  of  a  memory  ?  If  we  ask 
why  it  was  that  Aristotle  should  have  made  such 
serious  mistakes,  we  may  answer  in  a  sentence, 
that  in  Aristotle's  time  the  tools  had  not  been  in 
existence,  which  alone  could  bring  about  the  newer 
understanding. 

We  are  now  in  a  position  to  see  how  material  develop- 
ment undermined  both  Christian  and  Pagan  traditions. 
Philosophy  had  split  into  science  on  the  one  hand,  and 
a  philosophy  that  was  independent  of  theology  on  the 
other;  it  left  the  supreme  mind  of  God  to  theology,  and 
proceeded  to  an  examination  of  the  human  mind. 
Theology  began  to  crack  up  in  the  interests  of  a 
multiplication  of  religious  forms,  but  its  exponents  did 
not  give  up  without  a  fight,  they  developed  very  vicious 
tendencies  before  settling  down  to  emulate  the  Lamb  of 
God.  This  latter  may  be  seen  in  the  incident  of 
Giordano  Bruno,  who,  on  the  strength  of  the 
Copernican  theory  of  the  sun  being  the  centre  of  our 
planetary  system,  had  become  a  heresiarch  by  saying 
that  certain  statements  in  the  Bible  were  wrong.  For 
this  the  Inquisition,  in  1600,  had  him  tied  to  a  stake  in 
Rome  and  publicly  burnt  alive.  And  we  may  also, 
perhaps,  be  in  a  better  position  for  understanding  that 
much  quoted,  but  little  understood,  passage  by  Karl 


THINKING 

Marx — "  In  every  historical  epoch,  the  prevailing  mode 
of  economic  production  and  exchange,  and  the  social 
organisation  necessary  following  from  it,  form  the  basis 
upon  which  is  built  up,  and  from  which  alone  can  be 
explained,  the  political  and  intellectual  history  of  that 
epoch." 

Abstract  from  the  Beginning. — In  the  first  chapter 
we  saw  that  animal  evolution  resulted  in  the  develop 
ment  or  organs  of  sense,  nerves  and  brains,  and  that 
social  evolution  gave  rise  to  an  interpretation  of  the 
mysterious,  expressed  in  religious  practices  and 
mythology  founded  on  faith.  In  the  second,  that  Greek 
philosophers  threw  over  tale-telling,  studied  nature, 
developed  philosophy,  dialectics,  logic  and  material 
science;  that  logic  led  to  scepticism,  the  decadence  of 
philosophy  and  a  return  to  faith.  In  the  third,  that  one 
line  of  philosophy  became  extinct  in  ecstatic  mysticism, 
while  the  other  became  the  servant  of  Christianity,  the 
remainder  of  Pagan  culture  coming  through  mainly  in 
the  form  of  Aristotelian  science.  And  in  the  present 
chapter  we  get  the  two  long  lines  of  Pagan  and  Christian 
tradition  where,  in  the  twelfth  century  conflict  of  the 
two,  Pagan  logic  does  much  to  smash  Christian 
tradition,  science  helps  to  perform  the  same  operation 
on  Pagan  tradition,  while  underneath  all  are  the 
material  developments  that  prepare  the  ground  and 
ultimately  give  rise  to  the  modern  scientific  method  of 
enquiry  which  produces  verifiable  results,  thereby 
knocking  both  traditions  to  pieces.  The  Church  and 
the  Bible  had  been  infallible,  but  were  found  to  be  not 
so.  Aristotle  had  been  infallible,  but  the  new  scientific 
method  of  enquiry,  plus  the  new  tools  and  instruments, 
had  shown  that  not  only  was  the  intellectual  world 
moving,  but  also  the  very  ground  under  their  feet,  while 
the  sun  that  moved  daily  across  the  sky  was  all  the  time 
standing  still.  Old  methods  of  wealth  production,  with 
their  attendant  old  philosophical  speculations  and  old 
religions,  all  had  gone  to  pieces,  their  places  being  taken 
by  new  methods  and  tools,  reflected  in  new  conceptions 
oi  literature,  art,  science,  religion,  law  and  philosophy; 
it  was  the  period  of  re-birth — the  Renaissance. 


64  THINKING 

Was  it  any  wonder  that  the  Frenchman,  Rene 
Descartes,  should  decide  never  to  believe  anything 
again  until  he  had  first  tested  it  by  the  utmost  doubt  at 
his  command  ? 


CHAPTER    V 

Philosophy  from  Descartes  to  Kant 

In  passing  to  modern  philosophy,  which  began  in  the 
seventeenth  century,  it  is  important  to  remember  that 
its  exponents  were  not  only  mathematicians,  but  were 

also  much  influenced  by  the  results  of  positive  science, 
though  they  did  not,  nor  do  their  followers  to-day, 
apply  the  scientific  method  in  their  philosophical  specula- 
tions. So  once  more  do  we  see  that  the  tools  and 
instruments  by  which  the  scientific  results  are  attained 
have  an  indirect  expression  in  philosophical  thinking. 

Seventeenth  century  philosophy  may  be  said  to  have 
begun  on  the  materialist  side  with  Francis  Bacon,  and 
on  the  idealist  side  with  DESCARTES  (1596 — 1650,  of 
La  Haye,  in  Touraine,  later  Paris;  in  Latin  called 
Cartesius),  who  cast  all  notions  of  ancient  philosophy 
on  the  scrap  heap  in  order  to  make  a  new  start;  though 
neither  Bacon  or  Descartes  were  purely  materialist  or 
purely  idealist.  Descartes  began  his  enquiry  by 
systematically  doubting  everything,  with,  however,  one 
exception,  for  he  found  he  could  not  doubt  that  he  was 
thinking.  In  the  very  act  of  thinking  of  himself  as  a 
thinking  being,  he  connected  thinking,  with  himself  as 
the  thinker,  and  realised  that  as  a  thinker  he  was  far 
from  being  perfect ;  but  since  he  could  not  imagine  his 
imperfect  self  except  by  comparing  it  with  something 
perfect  (for  the  imperfect  could  only  be  conceived  a^ 
being  a  lower  degree  of,  or  a  declination  from  the  idea 
of  complete  perfection),  he  concluded  that  complete 
perfection  must  exist  somewhere.  In  the  same  way  he 
found  from  the  fact  that  he  himself  was  finite,  that  there 
must  be  infinity ;  and  again,  .since  a  perfect  being  that  did 

e  05 


66  THINKING 

not  exist,  except  in  thought,  would  be  a  contradiction, 
for  the  reason  that  if  it  lacked  reality  it  would  be 
imperfect,  that  being  must  be  real;  from  all  of  which 
he  deduced  the  existence  of  a  real  and  infinitely  perfect 
being  or  God  (though  not  in  the  Christian  sense). 
This  is  known  as  the  "  ontological  argument  "  for  the 
existence  of  God,  and  had  been  presented  about  five  and 
a  half  centuries  before  by  Anselm,  without,  however, 
attracting  attention,  because  the  Schoolmen  had  never 
doubted  the  existence  of  something.  This  real  and 
infinitely  perfect  being,  Descartes  thought,  if  perfect 
must  be  truthful,  and  since  perfection  in  the  highest 
degree  must  be  the  source  of  all  the  lower  degrees  it 
followed  that  man's  ideas  about  the  world,  if  true,  were 
derived  from  God. 

At  this  point  we  might  mention  that  Plato  had  used 
the  word  "  Idea  "  to  indicate  a  thing  that  really  existed 
as  an  eternal  and  permanent  nature,  whether  we 
thought  of  it  or  not,  and  that  later,  Augustine  had 
taught  that  such  eternal  natures  might  be  regarded  as 
thoughts  in  the  mind  of  God ;  but  by  the  sixteenth 
century  the  latter  notion  had  been  extended  to  mean 
thoughts  in  the  human  mind  also ;  accordingly  we  now 
use  the  word  "  idea"  to  mean  a  thought  in  the  human 
mind. 

Now  how  did  Descartes  distinguish  between  true  and 
false  ideas?  Here  again  his  Ontology  served  him. 
because,  he  argued,  if  God  is  perfect  and  truthful,  and 
if  man's  knowledge  of  the  world  is  got  from  his 
knowledge  of  God,  then  his  knowledge  of  the  world 
must  also  be  true,  and  the  world  must  be  a  real  world 
provided  such  knowledge  is  clear  and  distinct,  that  is, 
not  mixed  up  with  doubtful  speculations,  for  God, 
being  truth,  could  not  deceive  him  in  any  way.  Clear 
and  distinct  notions  were  accordingly  true  but,  which 
were  they?  With  Descartes  they  were  those  of 
mathematics  and  mechanics,  or  extension  and  motion. 
For  example,  we  cannot  conceive  of  a  body  without 
some  kind  of  shape  that  occupies  space,  or  is  extended 
in  space.  And  since  all  bodies  occupying  space  are 
capable    of   being    separated    into    parts,    modified    or 


THINKING 

re-joined  in  various  ways,  all  taking  place  tlr. 
motion,  and  as  mathematical  and  mechanical  notions  arc 
the  same  wherever  we  meet  them,  they  arc  the  only 
clear  and  distinct  notions,  for  all  other  ideas,  such  as 
colour,  warmth,  etc.,  are  perceived  differently  b) 
different  people.  In  this  way  the  decks  were  cleared  for 
a  mechanical  conception  of  the  physical  uni . 
TH(  '.MAS  HOBBES(i588  [679,  of  Malmesbury,  Wilt- 
shire; later  Oxford  and  Paris),  who  was  in  touch  with 
Descartes,  even  thought  that  consciousness  was  a  kind 
of  motion,  but  Descartes  held  the  idea  that  conscious- 
ness had  no  shape,  did  not  occupy  space  and  could  not 
be  conceived  of  as  being"  mathematical;  therefore,  not 
being  a  body,  it  could  not  have  motion  or  have  anything 
to  do  with  motion  in  the  physical  sense.  Accordingly 
he  spoke  of  bodies  or  matter,  and  consciousness  or 
mind,  as  being  substances  exactly  opposite  to 
other,  for  we  could  only  conceive  of  them  as  each  being 
different  and  independent  of  the  other.  Mind  and 
matter,  between  which  lies  the  greatest  distinction  in 
all  philosophy,  were  therefore  by  him  considered  to  be 
separate,  and  this,  of  course,  raised  once  more  the 
eternal  question  of  the  connection  between  the  two. 
ilow,  for  example,  could  the  mind  by  thinking  of  a 
certain  action  make  the  material  body  perform  that 
action  as,  when  asking  a  friend  at  table  to  pass  the  salt, 
he  does  so?  In  dealing  with  the  latter  problem 
Descartes,  following  mechanical  principles,  supposed 
that  the  heart  distilled  from  the  finest  particles  of  the 
blood,  a  very  fine  fluid  which  was  driven  to  the  pineal 
gland  in  the  brain  and  there  converted  by  that  gland  into 
nervous  energy,  which  passed  along  the  nerves  to  the 
muscles,  thereby  giving  rise  to  motion;  and  as  regards 
the  connection  between  mind  and  matter,  he  sup] 
that  the  soul  or  mind  of  man  directed  that  motion. 
though  it  did  not  produce  it.  This,  it  will  be  seen,  did 
not  explain  how  the  direction  took  place,  therefore  his 
explanation  was  no  explanation  at  all,  and  the  problem 
remained  unsolved. 

I  lie    theory    of    Occasionalism    taught     by     some 
Cartesians  (followers  of  Descartes)  was  that  no  . 


68  THINKING 

action  ever  took  place,  but  both  mind  and  matter  were 
actuated  separately  by  God,  and  that  on  the  occasion  of 
a  man  thinking  to  move  his  arm  God  caused  the  arm 
to  move.  In  short,  that  God  caused  parallel  actions  of 
mind  and  matter. 

NICOLE  MALEBRANCHE  (1638— 1715,  of  Paris) 
held  the  idea  that  there  were  not  three  terms — God, 
mind  and  matter,  but  only  two — God  (the  only  mind) 
and  matter  (the  world);  and  that  when  human  beings 
formed  clear  and  distinct  mental  pictures  of  the  world 
around  them,  those  thoughts  were  really  parts  of  God's 
thinking. 

SPINOZA  (1632 — 1677,  of  Amsterdam),  a  Jew,  began 
as  a  Cartesian,  with  accepting  the  separation  of  mind 
and  matter,  but,  through  working  at  the  problem  of 
their  interdependence,  afterwards  developed  the  Pan- 
theistic view.  With  him  there  was  but  one  substance 
in  the  universe,  and  that  was  God.  What  we  called 
"  matter  "  was  one  part  of  God,  and  what  we  called 
"  mind  "  was  the  other  part,  or,  in  other  words,  mind 
and  matter  were  but  two  attributes  of  God.  This 
concept  was  a  philosophical  reflex  of  the  times  in  which 
mathematicians  and  physicists  were  establishing  the 
universal  laws  of  motion  and  gravity  as  being  common 
to  all  things,  regardless  of  species  or  particular 
individuals,  whether  animals,  men  or  machines.  Now 
the  root  question  in  philosophy  is  that  of  the  unity 
among  individuals — how  can  many  individuals  be  at  the 
same  time  one:''  Spinoza  certainly  made  an  attempt  at 
unity  by  making  all  three  (God,  matter  and  mind)  into 
one,  but  he  only  did  so  at  the  expense  of  the  other  end 
of  the  question,  that  is,  by  destroying  the  idea  of 
individuality.  It  also  destroyed  the  freedom  of  the  will 
and  all  Christian  and  Jewish  notions  of  God;  for  the 
latter  he  was  excommunicated  from  the  Jewish 
fraternity. 

However,  LEIBNITZ  (1646 — 1716,  of  Leipzig) 
returned  to  the  problem  of  individuality,  and 
asked,  once  more,  what  is  an  individual?  He  held 
that  an  individual  must  be  a  unit  in  itself,  that  is, 
not    capable    of    being    divided    into    parts;    but    as 


THINKING 

every    particle    of    matter    could     be      10     divided     to 

infinity,   real   "  unities "   or   "  monads,"  as   be   called 

them,  could  never  he  found  in  material  bodies, 
but  only  in  souls,  which  have  no  parts,  lie  further 
imagined  that  parts  of  the  universe,  other  than  man, 
might  have  souls,  though  of  a  lower  order  than  that  of 
man.  and  only  to  that  extent  could  material  things  have 
reality.  Such  unities,  or  monads,  were  the  only  things 
that  really  existed,  all  else  was  illusion;  they  existed  as 
individuals  apart  from  each  other;  the  apparent  inter- 
communication between  them  was  not  really  such,  it 
resembled  Occasionalism,  and  consisted  of  a  "pre- 
established  harmony  "  arranged  by  God,  who  is  the 
"  final  cause  "  of  all. 

So  it  would  appear  that  from  Descartes'  time,  mind 
and  matter  gradually  got  more  clearly  separated,  and 
the  problem  of  truth  gradually  became  the  problem  of 
how  do  human  beings  perform  their  thinking  ? 
Towards  the  solution  of  the  latter  question,  JOHN 
LOCKE  (1632 — 1704,  of  Wrington,  Somersetshire,  later 
Oxford  and  London),  in  1690,  contributed  an  "  Essay 
concerning  Human  Understanding."  lie  agreed  with 
Descartes  that  matter  and  mind  owe  their  being  to  God, 
for  the  simple  reason  that  something  cannot  come  from 
nothing,  and,  therefore,  something  there  must  always 
have  been  that  possessed  "  power  "  and  "  knowledge." 
But  he  differed  from  Descartes  in  that  he  was  not  so 
sure  that  mind  and  matter  were  completely  separated, 
because  God  might  have  given  matter  the  power  to 
think  (Duns  Scotus  had  the  same  thought  about  four 
centuries  earlier).  That  thought  may  excite  motion  he 
considered  as  undeniable,  though  incomprehensible. 
He  agreed  that  minds  were  affected  by  external  stimuli, 
but,  and  this  was  his  chief  contribution,  he  believed  th.it 
there  were  no  "  innate  "  ideas— (ideas  born  in  the  mind 
or  created  by  the  mind  without  aid  from  outside):  he 
thought  that  every  idea  must  be  the  result  of  some 
experience,  and  that  experience  was  of  two  kinds- 
sensation  and  reflection.  The  experience  iluc  to  sensa- 
tion was  that  got  from  outside  the  mind  through  the 
organs  of  sense,  while  that  due  to  reflection  was  the 


70  THINKING 

result  of  the  mind  reflecting  "  on  its  own  operations 
within  itself,"  that  is,  experiencing  its  own  thoughts,  _ 

Leibnitz,  in  criticising  Locke,  pointed  out  that  with 
regard  to  reflection,  what  was  reflected  upon  must  be 
in  the  mind  before  it  could  be  experienced,  and  such  a 
thing  could  not  be  if  there  were  no  innate  ideas,  for  as 
far  as  the  saying  goes,  "that  there  is  nothing  in  the 
understanding  that  was  not  first  in  the  senses,"  one 
exception  must  be  made — the  understanding  itself. 
With  regard  to  sensation,  he  asked  how  could  Locke 
prove  that  the  objects  which  caused  us  to  have 
sensations  did  actually  exist  outside  us  ?  And  how  did 
we  get  the  idea  of  "  cause,"  since  nobody  could  ever 
experience  a  cause  by  itself,  apart  from  the  other  factors 
involved;  or  how  did  we  get  the  idea  of  bodies  existing 
on  their  own  apart  from  anybody  thinking  about  them, 
seeing  that  experience  of  them  was  lacking? 

Although  Locke  could  not  prove  the  existence  of  a 
real  material  world  outside  the  mind,  yet  he  agreed  with 
the  thinkers  of  his  day  in  taking  a  real  mathematical  and 
mechanical  world  for  granted ;  he  further  thought  that 
the  bodies  composing  that  world  had  primary  qualities, 
such  as  solidity,  extension,  shape,  motion,  rest,  number, 
etc.  (all  such  as  are  mathematical  or  mechanical),  and 
that  these  gave  rise  to  secondary  qualities,  such  as 
colour,  sound,  taste,  etc.,  but  that  the  latter  were  not 
real  on  their  own  account ;  and  he  had  to  explain  in 
some  way  or  other  how  ideas  of  such  unreal  things  could 
arise  from  sensation,  since  that  which  affects  the  senses 
must  at  least  be  real.  He  imagined  that  the  ideas  of 
secondary  qualities  were  due  to  the  senses  being  affected 
by  minute  and  insensible  parts  of  bodies  (primary), 
which  parts  themselves  bore  no  resemblance  to  the 
secondary  qualities,  but  nevertheless  produced  the 
effects  of  colour,  warmth,  and  so  on. 

We  may  see  how  he  came  by  the  latter  notion  if  we 
bear  in  mind  that  Bacon  had  revived  the  idea  of  atoms, 
after  the  manner  of  Democritus,  and  had  been  followed 
in  that  by  many  other  students  in  the  field  of  natural 
science.  The  theories  based  on  atoms  offered  a  better 
groundwork  for  an  explanation  of  natural  processes, 


THINKING  71 

though  at  the  same  time  they  tended  to  do  away  with 

the  apparent  solid  reality  of  matter.  So  just  as  material 
science  had,  during  tin-  Renaissance]  tended  to  do 

with  theological  explanations  and  the  Supreme  Mind,  so 
did  atomistic  chemistry  tend  to  undermine  the  real* 

matter  itself,  inasmuch  as  one  could  think  of  matter 
being  split  up  to  infinity  so  that  it  could  not  he  sense 
perceived  in  any  way. 

Locke,  as  stated,  had  availed  himself  of  the  atomists1 
way  of  looking  at  things,  in  order  to  account  for  ideas 
of  secondary  qualities  on  the  basis  of  sensation.  If  we 
remember  that,  and  also  that  the  age  was  becoming 
materialistic,  we  shall  be  in  a  better  position  to  under- 
stand why  George  Berkeley,  a  bishop,  interested  in 
upholding  the  idea  of  spirituality,  supported  Locke's 
teaching  that  knowledge  is  due  to  sensation,  but 
attacked  his  distinction  between  primary  and  secondary 
qualities.  The  reason  was  because  he  thought  Locke's 
materialist  and  mechanistic  arguments  would,  if  carried 
to  their  logical  conclusion,  result  in  smashing  the  very 
materialism  they  were  intended  to  support. 

BERKELEY  (1685— 1753,  of  Dysert,  Kilkenny- 
Bishop  of  Cloyne,  in  Ireland)  allowed  that  knowledge 
was  derived  from  ideas  of  sensation,  which  idea  . 
course,  were  in  the  mind,  but  did  not  see  the  necessity  for 
anything  outside  the  mind;  in  fact,  did  not  see  how  we 
could  form  a  conception  of  any  such  thing,  because  what 
was  perceived  was  an  idea  in  the  mind,  and  an  idea  was 
something  different  from  the  supposed  object  outside. 
Nor  could  such  an  object,  assuming  there  to  be  one, 
think  like  our  own  minds,  for  it  was  precisely  on  that 
basis  that  we  distinguished  between  mind  and  matter. 
Whatever  could  the  object  be?  Locke  had  said  that  it 
was  something  solid,  heavy,  etc,  but  not  coloured  or 
heated;  these  secondary  qualities  being  no  more  than 
effects  produced  on  the  senses.  But  how,  Berkeley 
asked,  could  Locke  know  this?  How  could  he  tell  that 
ideas  of  primary  qualities  resembled  objects  while  those 
of  secondary  qualities  did  not,  when  the  only  contact 
with  the  outside  source  of  ideas  was  by  means  of  the 
ideas  themselves?     Again,  if  the  nature  of  any  outside 


J2  THINKING 

object  was  different  from  the  nature  of  an  idea  (matter 
different  from  mind),  and  ideas  alone  could  be  per- 
ceived, how  could  an  idea  resemble  it?  And  if  it  did, 
how  could  we  imagine  it  apart  from  the  secondary 
qualities  of  warmth,  colour,  etc.,  which  Locke  had  said 
it  did  not  really  possess  ? 

Berkeley  concluded  that  outside  objects  did  not  exist. 
In  reply  to  Dr.  Johnson's  kicking  a  stone  by  way  of 
refuting  that  conclusion,  he  admitted  everything  to 
which  the  senses  bore  witness,  but  denied  that  anything 
existed  apart  from  the  actual  sense  perceptions;  for  the 
very  being  or  existence  of  all  things  that  were  perceived 
lay  in  them  being  perceived.  He  therefore  denied  the 
existence  of  matter.  Asked  what  became  of  matter 
when  it  was  not  being  perceived,  he  replied,  it  did  not 
exist;  because  the  idea  of  existence  always  meant 
existence  as  an  object  of  perception.  To  think  of  an 
object  unperceived  was  really  thinking  of  it  being 
perceived,  without  the  notion  of  a  person  perceiving  it. 

Now,  such  ideas  as  the  last,  which  are  framed  at  will, 
namely,  all  kinds  of  suppositions,  he  called  "  ideas  of 
imagination."  But  ideas  that  did  not  depend  upon  our 
willing,  for  example,  those  of  gravity  causing  bodies  to 
fall  or  fire  causing  a  burn,  and  so  on,  he  called  "  ideas 
of  sense";  and  as  we  could  not  produce  such  ideas  at 
will,  and  as  matter  did  not  exist,  and  therefore  could  not 
produce  them  for  us,  ideas  of  sense,  he  thought,  could 
only  be  produced  by  a  Spirit  of  a  higher  order  than 
ourselves  (in  so  far  as  we  produced  ideas  of  imagination 
we  were  spirits  of  a  low  order),  who  arranged  what  we 
call  the  laws  of  nature  (cause  and  effect,  etc.),  and 
although  it  was  impossible  to  discover  any  necessary 
connection  between  those  laws,  nevertheless  without 
that  supposition  we  should  be  in  utter  confusion;  so  he 
considered  it  reasonable  to  think  that  the  Great  Spirit 
arranged  the  connection  which,  as  we  came  to  under- 
stand it  through  experience,  might  be  regarded  as  the 
language  by  which  the  Spirit  communicated  with  us. 
This  was  pure  idealism. 

Following  Berkeley  came  DAVID  HUME  (171 1— 
1776, of  Edinburgh),  who,  while  in  France  in  1739,  wrote 


THINK INC 

a  "Treatise  of  Human  Nature."  Hume  said,  ju 
Berkeley  treated  matter  as  being  nothing  but  percep- 
tions, so  ought  we  to  treat  Berkeley's  Spirit  also  as 
non-existent  except  in  our  perceptions,  for  we  knew  no 
more  of  it  apart  from  perceptions  than  we  knew  m 
matter  apart  from  perceptions.  To  say,  as  Berkeley 
did,  that  proof  of  the  existence  of  a  superior  Spirit  was 
to  be  found  in  the  connection  between  perceptions  of 
cause  and  effect  (the  beautiful  order  in  the  universe) 
only  begged  the  question,  for  that  so-called  connection 
was  merely  a  habit  of  mind,  the  result  of  noticing  that 
certain  kinds  of  perceptions  always  followed  certain 
other  kinds;  for  even  if  certain  ones  did  always  follow 
certain  others,  Hume  thought  this  might  just  happen 
so,  the  happening  in  no  way  proving  the  connection. 
Since  Hume's  time  the  question  of  whether  one  thing 
causes  another,  or  whether  the  two  just  happen  so 
without  being  connected,  has  been  known  as  the 
problem  of  causality.  So  Hume  was  a  complete  sceptic 
— no  innate  ideas,  no  mind  or  Spirit,  no  soul,  no 
external  world  or  matter,  nothing  but  perceptions  which 
nobody  understood.  Hume's  fellow  Scotsmen  could 
not  stand  that,  so  took  to  expounding  the  "  principles 
of  common  sense";  but  their  work  merits  very  little 
notice  in  an  outline,  where  much  detail  must  of  necessity 
be  missed. 

With  the  ship  of  philosophy  in  such  a  parlous  state, 
Immanuel  Kant  took  the  helm  and  sought  to  pilot  it  into 
safe  harbour.  In  effect,  he  said,  away  with  the  lot  of 
you,  what  we  ought  to  do  is  to  give  up  arriving  at 
dogmatic  positions,  everyone  of  which  seems  to  be 
knocked  over  by  the  next  philosopher  that  happen^  t'> 
come  along;  we  ought  to  pay  no  attention  to  the  truth 
of  the  universe,  the  object  of  our  study,  until  we  first 
understand  the  tool  we  are  using— our  reason;  he  there 
fore  turned  away  from  the  study  of  the  universe  itself, 
in  order  to  study  those  faculties  of  reason  which  are 
employed  in  studying  that  universe. 

Abstract. — After  ancient  ideas  had  failed  to  give 
satisfaction,  Descartes  said,  away  with  all  dogma.  He 
began  with  doubt  but  ended  with  dogma.     He  saw  that 


74  THINKING 

thought  existed,  and  from  that  deduced  the  reality  of 
God,  of  the  human  mind  and  of  matter.  Spinoza  did 
away  with  the  separate  mind  and  matter,  retained  God, 
the  unity,  but  sacrificed  individuality.  Leibnitz  restored 
individuality  of  mind,  but  not  of  matter.  Locke  restored 
individuality  of  both.  Berkeley  destroyed  not  only  the 
individuality  of  parts  of  matter,  but  the  whole  of  matter, 
and  retained  Spirit.  Hume  destroyed  both  Spirit  and 
matter,  leaving  only  "  perceptions,"  but  knew  nothing 
definite  about  them;  while  the  Scotch  philosophers,  out 
of  breath,  returned  to  the  "principles  of  common 
sense."  Through  all  this  may  be  seen  the  gradual 
forming,  in  a  broad  sense,  of  the  two  modern  schools — 
the  idealists  and  the  materialists,  while  the  problem  to 
be  solved  became  definitely  that  of  how  we  do  our 
thinking,  the  solution  of  which  was  attempted  by  Kant. 


CHAPTER    VI 
The  Philosophy  of  Immanuel  Kant 

[MMANUEL  KANT  (1724—1804,  of  Konisberg) 
was  the  first  of  those  ( ierman  philosophers  who  have 
been  called  great.  Though  born  in  1724.  he  did  not 
publish  his  first  philosophical  work  till  1781 ;  his 
philosophy  is  accordingly  late  eighteenth  century.  In 
this  chapter  we  outline  his  three  chief  works — the  three 
Critiques. 

When  Hume  had  reduced  the  dogmas  of  previous 
philosophers  to  scepticism,  and  had  denied  the  cornier 
tion  between  cause  and  effect  bv  saving  that  causes  did 
not  exist  except  in  our  minds,  Kant  thought  it  high  time 
to  cease  dogmatising.  He  therefore  attempted  a 
critical  enquiry  into  the  nature  of  our  reasoning  faculty, 
for  the  purpose  of  finding  out  how  far  our  reason  was 
capable  of  forming  correct  ideas. 

It  was  Hume's  problem  of  causality  that  led  Kant  to 
his  basic  conception,  which  is  that  just  as  the  movement 
of  the  sun  in  the  heavens  is  only  an  apparent  motion 
due  to  our  way  of  looking  at  it,  so  are  the  positions  and 
shapes  of  bodies  in  space,  and  the  succession  of  events 
as  they  follow  in  time,  only  appearances  due  to  the 
peculiar  nature  of  ouf  perceiving  faculties. 

Hume  had  followed  Locke  in  supposing  there  were  no 
innate  ideas,  that  is,  that  the  mind  could  produce  no 
ideas  at  all  without  the  aid  of  experience,  but  Kant 
thought  the  mind  could  produce  such  ideas,  for 
example,  those  of  the  mathematical  kind,  which  cannot 
be  experienced  for  the  simple  reason  that  no  such 
exactness  can  be  found  in  nature:  therefore,  according 
to  him,  mathematical  truths  must  be  produced  a  priori, 

75 


76  THINKING 

which  means  without  experience,  or  prior  to  experience. 
But  since  all  knowledge,  of  whatever  kind,  must  be 
knowledge  of  something  that  is  extended  in  space  (that 
has  some  sort  of  shape,  and  is  therefore  geometrical), 
or  knowledge  of  some  event  in  time  (which  involves  the 
use  of  numbers  in  calculation),  all  knowledge  must,  to 
that  extent,  be  mathematical;  so  it  follows  that  all 
knowledge  of  the  universe,  or  of  its  separate  parts,  must 
be  made  up  of  two  portions,  the  a  priori  ideas  or 
mathematical  parts  contributed  by  the  mind  itself 
without  the  aid  of  experience,  in  addition  to  a  posteriori 
ideas,  namely,  those  contributed  through  the  experience 
of  our  organs  of  sense. 

Such  knowledge  is  wholly  in  the  mind,  but  not  in 
Berkeley's  sense,  because  Kant  held  the  view  that  ideas 
in  the  mind  were  merely  the  mental  pictures  of  how 
things  appeared  to  us,  that  is,  they  were  only 
appearances  or  phenomena,  and  since  there  could  be  no 
appearance  without  something  to  appear,  there  must, 
he  thought,  be  a  world  of  things  outside  our  minds  with 
which  we  could  never  come  face  to  face,  nor  could  we 
ever  come  face  to  face  with  our  minds  themselves,  we 
only  knew  the  a  priori  ideas  contained  in  them  or 
produced  by  them.  Therefore  the  world  of  things 
including  our  minds,  though  only  in  so  far  as  our 
experience  could  take  us,  was  something  real  "  in 
itself,"  this  he  called  a  noumenon;  but  we  could  never 
know  that  "thing  in  itself,"  for  we  could  never  get  in 
touch  with  anything  beyond  inside  sense  perceptions  of 
the  things  that  were  outside  us  (things  in  themselves), 
in  addition  to  the  purely  mental  concepts  of  space  and 
time  relating  to  those  perceptions  (and  therefore  limited 
by  them),  namely,  the  mathematical  parts  of  knowledge 
which  were  produced  by  the  mind  itself.  Accordingly 
all  understanding  consists  of  the  union  of  two  kinds  of 
experienced  phenomena,  one  supplied  by  sense  percep- 
tion, the  other  by  the  mind  prior  to  its  being 
experienced. 

Those  parts  of  understanding  supplied  by  the  mind 
Kant  called  "constitutive"  notions,  or  categories, 
because    they    arranged    the    sense    perceptions    into 


THINKING  77 

different    categories    or    classes    of    knowledge,     for 
without  such  arrangement  the  sense  perceptions  would 
not  constitute  knowledge.    Were  there  no  facult 
understanding,  perception  could  make  nothing  of  what 

was  perceived,  while,  on  the  other  hand,  understanding, 
without  sense  perceptions,  would  have  nothin 
understand.  The  sense  perceptions  wen-  the  variable 
elements,  while  the  constitutives  or  categories  were  the 
constant  elements  (akin  to  Plato's  Forms),  and  were 
classed  under  four  heads — Quality,  Quantity,  Relation 
and  Modality;  these  were  the  pure  forms  or  "notions 
of  the  understanding."  For  example,  take  the  notion 
of  cause,  which  comes  under  the  head  of  Relation,  and 
imagine  that  the  senses  supply  the  mind  with  the 
perception  of  a  blow  being  struck  with  a  hammer,  and 
another  perception  of  the  sound  which  follows;  there  is 
no  separate  perception  of  the  blow  causing  the  sound, 
the  mind  supplies  the  latter  part  of  the  idea,  and  thereby 
establishes  a  relation  between  the  two  perceptions, 
enabling  them  to  be  understood.  The  notion  of 
Relation  may,  of  course,  be  applied  to  thousands  of 
different  and  variable  combinations  of  perceptions, 
itself  remaining  the  constant  or  invariable  element 
enabling  us  to  understand  those  different  combinations. 
In  this  way  Kant  unified  under  one  head  or  category 
numerous  dissimilar  elements. 

Understanding  might  be  called  reason  in  an  'unpurc 
state,  that  is,  mixed  up  with  sense  perceptions.  To  the 
extent  of  this  combination  the  external  world,  or 
noumenon,  including  our  minds,  is  real,  even  though  we 
never  can  get  at  it  "  in  itself " ;  but  if  our  minds  attempt 
to  transcend  these  limits,  where,  for  the  lack  of 
experienced  sense  perceptions  no  proper  knowledj 
possible,  they  go  into  the  realm  oi  mere  ideas  without 
any  substantial  backing,  ideas  which  do  not  represent 
reality;  so,  there  being  no  sense  perceptions  to  classify, 
the  notions  are  not  constitutive,  and  not  being  any 
longer  connected  with  the  physical  are  accordingly 
metaphysical.  Though  in  so  far  as  such  notions  lead 
us  to  acquire  more  experience,  and  consequent  real 
knowledge,  so  do  they  direct  or  regulate  us;  but  since 


5  5 


THINKING 

these  "regulative"  notions  are  wholly  detached  from 
experienced  sense  perceptions]  they  constitute 
apart  from  understanding;  in  other  words,  th< 

tute  "  pure  reason." 

••  Can  [que    o]     Pure    Ri  vs<  »n  "    (1781 ). 
as    regulative    ideas    do    not    go    beyond    the    1 
of  a  possible  experience!  they  may  lead  ns  to  know 

ledge     whenever     the     experience     should  take  place, 
but  reason  without  that  experience  can  never  produce 
real  knowledge.     It  is  on  this  account  that  nietapi  . 
can  never  he  a  science;  nevertheless  pure  reason  cannot 
help  speculating  metaphysically.    That  being  so,  since 

constitutive  notions  of  the  Understanding  have  ahead;. 
unified  sense  perceptions  into  different  oi  unity 

(the  different  categories),  pure  reason  now  goes  on  to 
imagine,  first,  a  complete  unity  of  all  material  things, 
that  is,  a  material  universe,  though  the  understanding, 
for  lack  of  complete  experience,  an  never  grasp  it ; 
second,  a  unity  of  all  thoughts,  sensations  1  .  etc., 

in  short,  all  mental  things,  or  a  soul,  though  again  the 
understanding-   can   never   grasp   it;   and    third,    a    still 
higher  unity  of  the  first  and  the  second,  the 
unity  of  all.  which  is  God. 

Owing  to  its  nature,  our  reason  cannot  help  raising 
these  prohlems,  hut  also  owing  to  its  nature  it  cannot 
solve  them.  They  are  Kant's  three  "regulative" 
Ideas,  though  this  time  not  like  Plato's,  because  they 
lack  that  definite  reality.  They  must  not  be  confused 
with  Ontology,  because  even  though  pure  reason  cannot 
think  otherwise  than  that  such  unities  exist,  this  1-,  no 
proof  that  they  do  so  exist  apart  from  our  thinkil 
only  proves  that  we  think  that  way.  As  already  said. 
these  ideas  are  not  in  the  realm  of  knowl-  they 

can  only  be  in  that  of  faith,  wherein  Knnt  said  we  have 
sufficient  grounds  for  acting  as  though  isted 

and  that  we  have  immortal  souls  and  free  wills; 
sufficient  grounds  for  treating  those  ideas  as  n 
certainties,  though  not  demonstrated  certainties.  But 
since  these  moral  certitudes  are  expressed  in  action. 
reason  ceases  to  be  merely  theoretical  and  becomes 
piactical,  so  for  Kant's  explanation  of  why  such 


80  THINKING 

should  be  treated  as  representing  something  morally 
certain  we  must  turn  to  his  account  of  reason  as  applied 
in  practice. 

"  Critique  of  Practical  Reason  "  (1788).  Reason 
as  applied  to  practical  affairs  means  that  those  affairs 
are  considered  and  judged,  in  virtue  of  which  our 
conduct  is  directed.  Practical  reason  is,  therefore,  only 
another  name  for  the  human  will  in  action.  Every 
considered  action  is  taken  in  reference  to  some  scheme 
of  conduct,  in  answer  to  the  questions,  what  shall  I  do 
in  this  case,  or  in  that?  With  regard  to  the  different 
individual  cases,  each  has  its  own  reason ;  but  when  it 
comes  to  doing  one's  duty,  this  applies  to  all  men,  even 
though  it  be  executed  individually;  and  in  Kant's 
opinion  this  moral  obligation  to  do  one's  duty  is  found 
in  the  knowledge  each  one  has  of  what  is  right,  and 
which  requires  obedience  to  what  Kant  called  the 
"  categorical  imperative."  The  latter  may  be  described 
as  the  imperious  or  commanding  voice  of  conscience 
which  commands  us  to  do  what  we  know  to  be  right, 
irrespective  of  whether  we  like  to  or  not. 

Now  why  did  philosophers  pay  so  much  attention  to 
morality  ?  When  we  remember  that  economic  con- 
ditions prior  to  the  sixteenth  century  had  produced  the 
Reformation  and  the  consequent  dethronement  of  the 
Catholic  Church  as  the  source  of  direction  in  moral 
conduct,  and  when  we  also  remember  that  for  another 
two  centuries  the  economic  forces  had  brought  into 
prominence  the  new  manufacturing  class,  with  its  own 
ideas  of  what  was  right,  as  opposed  to  those  of  the 
Nobility,  a  development  that  culminated  in  the  French 
Revolution  of  1789,  we  can  easily  understand  the  type 
of  moral  reflex  which  showed  itself  during  this  period. 
Not  knowing  the  roots  of  moral  reflexes,  they  imagined 
morality  to  be  wholly  a  product  of  the  mind,  and,  having 
thrown  the  more  extreme  theologians  with  their 
supreme  mind  overboard,  had  necessarily  to  attack  the 
problem  themselves,  for  it  would  never  do  to  leave  the 
world  without  moral  guidance.  It  has  even  been 
supposed  that  the  newer  type  of  thinking  produced  the 
French  Revolution.      However  that  may  be,   and  we 


THINKING  8r 

shall  see  later,  during  the  seventeenth  and  eight 
centuries  there  had  been  a  .^reat  number  of  boob 

moral  philosophy,  wherein  each  writer  tried  to  show  the 
basis  of  right  action.  Mobbes  had  made  morality  to  a 
threat  extent  synonymous  with  obedience  to  the  1  . 
the  State.  Cudworth  (1617 —  (688)  and  Clark  (l( 
1729)  said  that  true  morality,  like  mathematics, 
independent  of  the  will  of  either  God  or  man,  it  was 
something  true  in  itself.  The  third  Marl  of  ShaftesbttT) 
(1671 — 1713)  and  Francis  Hutcheson  (1694 — 1747.  1 
Scottish  professor)  thought  that  morality  turned  upon 
our  possession  of  a  natural  capacity,  a  sentiment  or 
inward  taste  that  enabled  us  to  discriminate  be: 
good  and  bad.  Hume  (171 1—1776)  agreed  with  the  two 
latter  that  morality  depended  upon  sentiment  rather 
than  reason,  but  added  the  idea  of  utility,  so  that 
additional  satisfaction  was  derived  from  having  done 
something  useful.  Adam  Smith  (1723 — 1790)  thought 
we  ought  to  do  what  we  would  think  other  people  ought 
to  do  under  similar  circumstances  in  case  we  were 
impartial  spectators.  Joseph  Butler  (1692 — 175-'. 
Bishop  of  Durham)  held  to  the  "  manifest  authority  "  oi 
conscience,  tempered  by  a  "reasonable  self  love,' 
thought  that  duty  to  oneself  ought  to  be  considered  as 
well  as  duty  to  one's  neighbour.  Butler,  along  with 
Richard  Price  (1723— 1791,  a  dissenting  minister),  were 
more  like  Kant  than  the  others,  in  that  they  made 
reason  rather  than  sentiment  the  basis  of  morality,  hut 
Kant  differed  more  or  less  from  each  of  the  foregoing 
by  insisting  on  the  unconditional  aspect  ot  his 
"  categorical  imperative." 

As  already  explained,  his  "  regulative  notions  "  are 
unconditioned  by  experience,  because  we  never  have 
such  experience,  they  are  imaginary  goals  of  knowledge 
at  which  we  aim;  but  he  insists  that  there  is  a  [ 
difference    between    the    theoretical    aspect    of    those 
notions  and  the  "  categorical  imperative  "  (the  voi 
conscience),  which  is  also  unconditioned,  because  the 
latter  brings  us  into  relation  with  other  human  be 
it  is  so  strong  and  manifest  throughout  society  that  we 
cannot  get  away  from  it;  therefore  it  has  a  practical 

F 


82  THINKING 

value  over  and  above  the  merely  theoretical  aspect  of 
regulative  notions,  so  that  to  do  one's  duty  irrespective 
of  anything  else  is  the  highest  of  all  human  aims. 
Aristotle  had  said  knowledge  was  the  highest  goal. 
Neoplatonists  and  Scholastics  had  thought  it  should  be 
the  "beatific  vision"  (the  ultimate  union,  or  at  least 
communion  with  God).  To  Spinoza  it  was  an 
intellectual  love  of  God.  But  though  the  tendency  in 
Germany  in  Kant's  time  was  to  look  to  knowledge  as 
the  superior  aim,  Kant  turned  away  from  this  because 
it  was  only  possible  for  the  few,  whereas  the  per- 
formance of  duty  was  within  the  reach  of  all  (even  the 
ignorant  peasant,  whose  "  duty  "  was  rapidly  taking  the 
form  of  working  for  the  rising  capitalist  class,  because 
with  Kant,  "  what  was  right  "  meant  what  was  right 
for  this  class).  He  stuck  to  Reason  as  the  basis  of 
morality  to  such  an  extent  as  to  imply  that  one  could  be 
sure  that  duty  was  the  motive,  only  when  that  duty  was 
performed  in  defiance  of  personal  interest  and  inclina- 
tion; he  also  implied  that  a  duty  that  was  at  the  same 
time  a  pleasure  could  not  be  performed  from  a  purely 
right  motive.  In  nothing  was  he  more  insistent  than 
that  in  our  moral  judgments  it  was  not  feeling  or 
emotion,  but  solely  the  principle  of  reason,  that  was 
active.  Moreover,  it  was  an  individual  affair,  for  if  a 
man  did  not  obey  his  own  conscience  his  acts  were  not 
truly  moral,  and,  since  it  was  as  a  reasoning  being  that 
he  made  his  decision,  so  did  it  become  necessary  to  treat 
other  people  as  being  also  capable  of  that  reason  which 
implies  the  necessary  freedom  for  its  exercise,  because 
in  being  aware  of  the  moral  law,  so  is  every  individual 
aware  also  that  his  will  seems  to  be  free;  for  when  he 
knows  he  ought  to  do  certain  things,  he  has  no  doubt 
that  he  can  both  "  will "  them  and  do  them.  From  this 
follows,  first,  the  idea  of  individual  freedom;  second, 
that  we  recognise  the  equal  freedom  of  other  reasoning 
beings;  and  third,  the  idea  of  a  community  of  such 
beings  bound  together  by  the  consciousness  of  their 
obligation  to  keep  the  same  law. 

We  have  now  reached  the  philosophical  expression, 
or  reflex,  of  those  material  developments  (obtaining  in 


THINKING 

other  countries  besides  France)  thai  brought  about  the 
French   Revolution,   and    it   should   be   interesting  to 

notice  also  the  close  parallel  between  the  philosophic 
and  the  political  forms  of  thinking  arising  from  the  same 

conditions. 

PHILOSOPHIC.  J'<  iLl  i  tCA]  . 

i.   Free  will  for  the  individual,  I.   Liberty.       |  ;,., 

2.  E  ree  will  for  others  also,  2.    Equality.        u]  tkr  t  ■ 

3.  Community  among  such  free  wills.     3.    Fraternity. J      "■**"• 

So,  Kant  would  argue,  the  freedom  of  the  will  is 

implied  by  morality,  and  morality  appeals  to  be  in 
ohedience  to  the  imperious  command  oi  reason.  Bui 
since  the  will  precedes  action,  it  cannot  be  experienced 
by  the  senses,  only  the  results  can  be  so  experienced; 
and  since  there  can  be  no  knowledge  apart  from 
experience,  it  follows  that  we  can  never  be  positive  that 
we  have  free  wills  while  all  the  time  we  are  compelled  to 
act  as  though  we  have.  He  deal)  similarly  with 
Immortality  and  God,  for  we  are  compelled  to  go  on  in 
a  seemingly  continual  advance  towards  an  ideal  which 
we  can  never  imagine  ourselves  as  attaining  (the  ideal 
perfection  of  the  Soul),  and  also  we  are  compelled  to 
imagine  a  ruler  of  the  world,  in  whose  government  <n 
it  morality  is  the  chief  consideration.  But  though  there 
is  no  proof  of  either  God,  Freedom  or  Immortality, 
neither  is  there  disproof;  they  remain  objects  of  faith. 
The  sufficient  grounds  for  belief  Kant  found  in  the 
thought  that  without  such  faith  our  whole  moral  life 
would  have  no  meaning.  Therefore,  the  "categorical 
imperative  "  in  the  every-day  life  of  all  men,  as 
compared  with  the  pursuit  of  knowledge  by  the  lew, 
distinguishes  the  moral  or  "  practical  "  side  of  a 
"  regulative  "  idea,  which  compels  as  i<>  obey,  from  the 
speculative  or  "  theoretical  "  side,  which  merely  directs 
our  endeavour  to  acquire  knowledge. 

"Critique    ok   the    Faculty    of   Judgmi  __  In 

addition  to  the  phenomena  already  considered,  kant 
dealt  with  two  other  kinds— beauty  and  adaptation, 
concerning  which  his  thought  ran  along  the  following 


84  THINKING 

lines.  When  thinking-  of  the  beauty  of  an  object 
in  nature,  we  cannot  avoid  considering  it  as  the 
work  of  an  intelligence,  though  greater  than  that  of  any 
human  being,  much  in  the  same  way  that  when  admiring 
a  beautiful  statue  we  think  of  the  intelligence  of  the 
artist  who  produced  it.  Or,  with  regard  to  adaptation, 
v/e  may  think  of  the  intelligence  of  the  draughtsman 
who  designs  a  machine,  the  parts  of  which  are  adapted 
to  each  other,  in  virtue  of  which  they  all  function  as  one 
whole;  but  in  considering  the  human  body  with  its 
wonderful  adaptation  of  parts,  such  that  no  human 
mechanic  could  ever  devise  or  even  explain  satisfactorily 
on  mechanical  lines,  we  again  cannot  avoid  thinking  of 
such  an  organism  as  being  the  work  of  an  intelligence 
greater  than  our  own.  At  first  sight  this  looks  like 
Anaxagoras'  or  Aristotle's  "teleology,"  but  it  is  not, 
for  though  we  cannot  explain  such  things  without  the 
supposition  of  a  superhuman  "will,"  we  are  not 
justified  in  going  the  length  of  saying  they  could  not 
have  come  into  existence  without  that  "  will  "  or 
"design";  because  even  though  the  supposition  is 
necessary,  we  must  not  forget  that  they  are  only 
appearances,  and  consequently  we  cannot  know  the 
cause  "in  itself,"  for  we  never  get  in  touch  with  it, 
and  so  can  never  claim  definite  knowledge  of  it. 

Abstract.— Descartes  had  separated  the  Supreme 
Mind  from  matter  and  had  then  built  an  ontological 
bridge  across  the  gulf.  Kant  destroyed  that  dogmatic 
bridge,  but  left  a  bridge  of  faith  in  things  that  could 
neither  be  proved  or  disproved.  For  Kant,  there  is  a 
real  mind,  which  knows  only  its  own  appearances,  along 
with  the  appearances  of  a  world,  which  also  is  real,  but 
it  can  never  know  either  itself  or  that  real  world  as  they 
are  "  in  themselves."  This  real  mind  operates  with 
sense  perceptions  of  phenomena  on  the  one  hand,  and 
its  own  a  priori  notions  which  are  applicable  to  those 
sense  perceptions  on  the  other;  to  this  extent  it  under- 
stands. Outside  this  limited  experience  the  mind 
operates  with  its  own  pure  reason,  which,  for  the  lack 
of  sense-perceived  phenomena,  can  never  reach  positive 
knowledge  or  what  he  calls  understanding.     Reason,  in 


THINKING  85 

its  pure  state,  consists  of  theoretical  or  metaphj 

speculation.     Reason,  when  applied  in  practit 

the   form  of  morality  on  the  one  hand,  and  certain 

•  5  of  jud  "ii  the  ether ;  11  for  both 

(free  will  and  an  intelligent  designer  of  the  univ< 
being  taken  on  faith,  while  the  basis  for  faith  itself  is 
found  in  the  necessity  for  men  to  live  a  moral  life. 
Kant  did  not  arrive  at   unity  like  his  pred  ;  he- 

was  a  dualist,  because  he  believed  in  a  world  ol 
appearances  or  phenomena,  and  also  in  a  world  or 
noumenon  that  lay  for  ever  at  the  hack  of  phenomena, 
and  which  constituted  the  "  thing  in  it-elf."  Descartes 
and  his  followers  gradually  brought  about  the  modern 
distinction  between  mind  and  matter.  Kant  n 
both,  but  left  the  problem  of  their  ultimate  nature 
(nonmena)  alone.  He  turned  his  attention  to  the 
faculty  of  reason  (phenomena),  which  at  this  point 
includes  understanding,  and  so  opened  the  way  to  the 
problem  of  thinking  or  understanding  considered  apart 
from  the  things  that  had  to  be  thought  about  or  under 
stood.  He  did  not  solve  the  problem  of  understanding, 
but  made  a  remarkable  contribution  towards  formula- 
ting it  correctly.  The  problem  is  not  how  do  we 
understand  other  things,  but  how  to  understand  the 
understanding  itself.  The  latter  question  settled,  the 
former  disappears. 


CHAPTER    VII 
Idealism  from  Kant  to  Bergson 

Prior  to  Kant's  time  there  had  been  growing  up  the 
doctrine  that  human  reason  should  be  the  guide  in  all 
matters;  that  if  man  would  cease  to  trust  in  theological 
dogma  and  rely  on  himself  he  wrould  not  go  astray,  for 
if  things  are  logical  to  the  mind  they  must  be  real  in 
nature,  and  therefore  reason  must  be  the  faculty  by 
which  man  discovers  truth.  This  is  Rationalism.  But 
Kant  gave  the  deathblow  to  rationalism  by  showing 
that  reason  by  itself  could  never  produce  knowledge, 
because  it  lacked  experience ;  and  surely  this  was  amply 
shown  in  the  philosophical  strife  we  have  already  seen. 
Kant  thereby  showed  that  metaphysics  was  impossible 
as  a  science.  On  the  other  hand,  particularly  in  France, 
there  had  also  been  growing  up  a  narrow  mechanical 
materialism,  which  attempted  to  explain  all  mental 
processes  from  the  interaction  of  ponderable  matter,  a 
doctrine  that,  of  course,  left  no  opening  for  faith  in  the 
supernatural.  But  Kant  refuted  this  as  well,  by 
teaching  that  reason  alone  could  produce  "  regulative  " 
notions  amounting  to  moral  certainties,  namely,  those 
of  God,  Immortality  and  Freedom.  So  faith,  with  its 
cardinal  principle  of  freedom,  was  reinstated.  This 
shows  Kant  to  be  the  philosopher  of  the  rising 
manufacturing  or  middle  class,  the  Liberals  or  the 
bourgeoisie,  as  they  are  called,  who  required  freedom 
from  the  power  of  the  landlord  class. 

Kant's  influence  was  so  great  that  the  philosophy 
which  preceded  him  fell  into  the  background,  at  least  in 
Germany,  and  his  doctrine  that  understanding  can  never 
know  the  "  thing  in  itself,"  while  all  the  time  it  is 

86 


THINKING 

limited  by  it,  underlay  the  work  of  many  who  succeeded 

him,  for  example,  Comte,  who  limited  human  science 
to  exttmal  phenomena,  and  this  only  within  the 

system,  thus  excluding  the  science  of  mind — 
psychology,  and  the  science  of  the  stars-  sidereal 
astronomy.  It  also  underlay  the  theory  of  the  "  rela- 
tivity of  knowledge  "  taught  by  Sir  \V.  Hamilton  | 

[856,  of  Glasgow,  later  Edinburgh  University)  and 
H.  L.  Mansel  (1820 — 1871,  of  Cosgrove,  Northampton- 
shire, Dean  of  St.  Paul's);  and  in  a  different  way  by 
Herbert  Spencer,  who  insisted  on  the  limitations  of 
knowledge  in  order  to  leave  no  room  for  faith  in  super 
natural  revelation.  These  relativists  did  not  relv  so 
much  upon  the  nature  of  our  thinking  faculties,  as  upon 
the  fact  that  all  knowledge  must  consist  in  n  relation 
between  a  mind  which  knows  and  some  object  which  is 
known;  in  other  words,  a  "  subject  "  and  an  "  object." 
Of  course,  the  existence  or  recognition  of  this  relation 
does  not  do  away  with  the  question  of  whether  a  thing 
as  it  appears  to  us  differs  from  the  "thing  in  itself" 
apart  from  our  sense  perceptions,  and  Kant  was  not 
without  opponents  concerning  his  dualism  of  noumenon 
and  phenomena.  One  line  of  thinker*,  who  developed 
the  more  modern  forms  of  idealism,  sprang  from  that 
side  of  Kant  which  dealt  with  phenomena,  and  for  the 
present  we  are  concerned  with  explaining  the  chief 
points  in  that  development. 

JOHANX  GOTLIEB  FICHTE  (1762—1814,  of 
Rammenau,  Jena,  and  Berlin)  thought  there  was  no 
need  to  trouble  about  a  "thing  in  itself.'*  In  his 
opinion  there  was  only  one  thing,  rind  that  was 
mind,  which,  so  to  speak,  divided  itself  into  two  in 
order  that  the  subject,  the  part  that  knows,  might 
have  an  object  to  think  about;  hut  this  was  not 
an  individual  mind,  it  was  the  mind  of  the  world, 
or  mind  in  general.  Berkelev  thought  that  so  called 
external  objects  were  only  ideas  of  individual  spirits, 
but  Fichte  conceived  the  notion  that  nit  th:t  existed 
consisted  of  one  total  mind,  which  included  all  the 
things  we  know,  as  well  as  that  which  knows  them.  It 
was' an    "absolute    self."      But    he,    like    others,    iras 


88  THINKING 

troubled  with  the  question  of  morality,  and  concluded 
that  this  total  mind  split  itself  in  two,  in  order  that  one 
part,  that  which  knows,  judges  and  decides,  might  use 
the  other  part,  usually  called  nature,  as  an  obstacle  to  be 
overcome  so  that  the  first  part  could  demonstrate  its 
moral  character  by  performing  the  duty  of  overcoming 
nature.  He  also  thought  that  the  second  part,  or 
nature,  acted  as  a  means  of  communication  between 
individuals,  for  the  total  mind  included  many  individual 
selves,  so  that  each  could  practice  morality  in  executing 
duties  to  others.  With  Fichte  this  complete  moral 
order  constituted  an  "absolute  self,"  which  might  be 
called  God,  and  to  him  there  was  no  other  God.  His 
"  absolute  "  was  the  complete  unity  of  so-called  matter 
and  so-called  mind,  and  was  limited  to  what  was  "  in 
relation,"  that  is,  as  between  knower  and  known,  or 
subject  and  object;  but  it  was  all  mind,  there  was  no 
matter  in  itself,  the  part  called  matter  was  regarded  as 
subordinate,  and  only  existed  for  the  other  part  called 
mind  to  plav  upon. 

FRIEDR'ICH  WILHELM  JOSEPH  von  SCHEL- 
LING  (1775 — 1854,  of  Leonberg,  in  Wiirtemburg, 
and  Universities  of  Jena,  Munich,  Berlin,  etc.) 
differed  from  Fichte  in  that  he  thought  of  an  ultimate 
reality  which  underlay  both  mind  and  so-called  matter, 
though  without  any  definite  character  of  its  own; 
Ave  never  got  face  to  face  with  it,  but  knew  of  it 
by  a  kind  of  intuition.  He  further  thought  that 
nature  was  not  subordinate  to  mind,  that  is,  utilised 
by  the  mind  for  itself  to  practice  morality,  because 
the  beauty  and  design  to  be  found  in  nature  indicated 
that  it  was  something  more  than  a  mere  object 
on  which  to  practice.  He  therefore  conceived  the 
existence  of  an  "absolute  something,"  which,  though 
underlying  the  relation  between  that  which  knows  and 
that  which  is  known,  was  really  outside  the  relation; 
that  it  had  an  independent  reality  of  its  own.  Where 
Fichte's  "absolute"  consisted  of  the  moral  order 
involved  in  the  relation  between  knower  and  known, 
Schilling's  was  something  wider,  a  weird  kind  of  God 
lying  outside  mind  and  matter,  though  permeating  both. 


THINKING 

Since  mind  and  matter  were  both  mental,  Schedule's 
WOrk  was  really  an  attempt  to  COnstrtld  a  trinity  with 
the  human  mind  a>  the  basis,  and  arose  from  the 
struggle  invoked  in  explaining  matter  in  terms  of  mind. 

Schelling  was  followed  by  GEORG  WILHELM 
FRIEDRlCH  HEGEL  (1770  1831,  of  Stutl 
Jena  and  Berlin),  who  thought  that  Schelhng's 
"absolute"  was  altogether  too  vague.  It  took  no 
notice  of  the  connection  between  mind  and  m 
which  comes  into  play  when  we  are  reflecting  about 
so-called  material  things,  which  reflection  is  the 
common  experience  of  everybody.  He  thought  that 
in  ordinary  daily  reflection  and  discussion,  men  were 
actually  engaged  in  tracing  out  the  structure  of 
what  he  called  the  Absolute  Tdca.  With  Hegel  the 
Absolute  is  not  something  in  the  background,  except 
that  part  of  it  that  has  not  yet  been  discovered;  on  the 
contrary,  its  very  being  is  in  the  manifestations  of  the 
life  and  movement  of  mind  and  so-called  matter.  This 
complete  and  permanent  Idea  had  existed  from  all 
eternity  and  as  men  struggled  with  their  problems. 
found  themselves  in  contradictions,  discovered  new 
knowledge  which!  explained  or  solved  the  contradic- 
tions, and  in  this  way  kept  advancing,  so  were  they  ever 
more  and  more  coming  to  a  knowledge  of  the  complete 
Idea,  the  Absolute. 

Hegel  agreed  that  the  mind  in  its  advancing  required 
a  so-called  material  world  with  which  it  could  strive, 
but  that  material  world  was  with  him  only  another  part 
of  the  Idea,  in  other  words,  it  was  mental;  all  the 
advancing,  then,  consisted  of  the  Idea  gradually 
unfolding  itself,  and  was,  in  fact,  simply  the  evolution 
of  the  Idea.  This  evolution,  which  appeared  in  our 
minds  as  a  kind  of  argument  in  which  conflicting  state- 
ments were  ultimately  reconciled  in  a  conclusion,  was  a 
revival  of  dialectics.  In  it  our  whole  life  appears  to  be 
constantly  changing,  so  that  every  conclusion  in  the 
argument  is  but  a  new  starting  point  in  another 
argument  that  is  to  end  in  a  still  higher  conclusion,  and 
so  are  we  ever  attaining  greater  and  greater  unity, 
more  and  more  truth. 


90  THINKING 

But  how  are  we  to  recognise  truth  or  reality  at  any 
given  time  amid  all  this  change  ?  Kant  had  said  that 
the  mathematical  parts  of  knowledge  existed  in  the 
mind,  but  not  in  the  things.  Hegel  asked  how  could 
that  be  ?  If  truth  were  not  in  the  things,  then  all  our 
science  is  illusion;  for  example,  gravity  and  the  laws  of 
motion.  Rather  is  it  that  the  thing  which  appears  is 
the  reality  itself  appearing  and  not  something  else;  and 
further,  if  this  appearance  seems  to  be  reasonable  or 
rational,  consistent  or  logical,  it  must  be  real,  and  being 
real  must  be  rational,  for  how  could  we  understand  what 
is  not  real?  How  shall  we  know  the  real  and  true, 
except  by  the  fact  that  it  is  intelligible,  understandable, 
rational,  reasonable,  logical,  consistent?  Hegel's  test 
of  truth,  therefore,  is  that  which  is  reasonable  and 
logical  to  the  mind;  for  example,  to  test  whether  or  not 
our  writing  desks  are  real  we  must  touch  them,  because 
it  is  reasonable  to  test  such  things  by  the  senses,  but  to 
test  whether  the  Idea  (God)  is  real  or  not,  it  is  reason- 
able to  rely  on  the  "  ontological  argument,"  but 
unreasonable  to  submit  such  an  idea  of  intelligibility  to 
the  senses;  therefore,  the  truth  of  all  things  may  be 
brought  to  light  by  putting  reasonable  questions  to 
oneself  or  to  other  people,  and  as  different  conclusions 
are  arrived  at  by  this  reasoning  process,  so  are  we 
tracing  out  bit  by  bit  the  structure  of  reality,  which  is 
God  or  the  Absolute,  and  there  is  no  other  Absolute. 

This  method  of  enquiry,  as  stated,  is  dialectic, 
because  it  takes  the  form  of  an  argument,  whereby  we 
may  find  truth  at  any  given  time  amid  a  constant  -flow 
of  historical  development.  In  applying  it  Hegel  had  at 
his  command  a  much  wider  knowledge  of  history  than 
had  Plato,  consequently  the  dialectic  in  his  hands  came 
to  be  of  great  significance  as  a  method  of  interpreting 
history;  it  constituted  his  great  contribution  to  modern 
progress  in  scientific  thinking,  for  by  means  of  it  he 
propounded  the  nature  of  the  problem  to  be  solved, 
namely,  the  discovery  of  the  law  underlying  the  changes 
which  have  taken  place  in  history,  or,  in  short,  the  law 
of  human  progress,  and  also  the  method  of  solving  it. 
He  fell  short,  however,  in  the  actual  solution. 


THINKING  91 

Since  the  dialectic  method  deals  with  a  constant  How 
from  one  thing  to  another,  or,  rather,  the  evolution  of 
one  thing  out  of  that  which  preceded  it,  it  must,  of 
course,  consider  the  relation  hetwecn  opposite  tonus  of 
a  contradiction.  In  the  realm  of  morality  it  takes  into 
account  not  only  Kant's  "  categorical  imperative."  or 
what  ought  to  he,  hut  also  what  U  when  it  might  seem 
to  contradict  what  ought  to  he.  For  example,  starting 
from  the  thought  that  man  has  a  free  will,  how  can  we 
justify  the  idea  of  law,  which  is  the  negation  or 
contradiction  of  freedom?  First  take  the  idea  that  a 
man  is  free  to  do  what  he  likes  with  his  property.  When 
this  man  enters  into  relations  with  other  similarly  free 
men,  each  has  to  recognise  the  rights  of  the  others, 
consequently  personal  freedom,  which  was  real  and 
true  originally,  gets  curtailed  by  the  rise  of  a  reasonable 
moral  law,  which,  because  reasonable,  nozv  becomes 
real,  while  absolute  personal  freedom  becomes  unreal 
or  untrue.  This  greater  unity  we  may  assume,  in  the 
first  place,  to  take  the  form  of  the  family,  then,  with 
further  development,  a  wider  form  in  social  groups  of 
many  families,  and  a  still  wider  form  in  the  State,  until, 
in  the  end,  the  mind  finds  itself  in  its  highest  stage, 
which  is  realised,  not  only  in  the  idea  of  the  State,  hut 
also  that  of  the  Monarchy;  so  that  as  society  develops, 
personal  freedom,  which  at  one  time  was  reasonable, 
and  therefore  real  or  true,  becomes  at  a  later  sta^e 
unreasonable  or  unreal,  and  no  longer  true.  In  this 
way,  through  reconciling  the  contradictions  by  com- 
bining all  the  historical  factors,  Hegel  proves  that, 
taken  altogether,  what  is,  at  any  given  time,  is  what 
ought  to  he,  and  if  it  ought  to  be,  then  it  is  reasonable 
and  accordingly  real. 

To  Hegel  the  continual  change  which  has  taken  place 
throughout  history,  and  is  still  taking  place,  is  not  hint; 
less  than  the  dialectic  being  acted.  It  is  the  Idea 
unfolding  itself  in  its  march  towards  its  complete 
unfolding — the  Absolute  Idea,  and  only  in  such  a  way 
could  the  unfolding  take  place.  (This  talking  of  an 
absolute  end  alongside  perpetual  ehangc  is  a  contradic- 
tion that  is  unreconcilable.)      It  appears  as  a  conflict 


92  THINKING 

between  the  wills  of  different  men  or  groups  of  men 
who  argue  or  contend  for  their  particular  parts  of 
reality.  They  each  get  their  corners  rubbed  off,  and  out 
of  the  contradictory  parts  comes  a  reconciliation  which 
is  seen  by  most  people  to  be  reasonable,  it  is  therefore 
real  because  it  is  intelligible,  logical  or  consistent. 
However,  later,  new  contradictions  arise,  followed  by 
different  reconciliations,  and  of  course  a  different 
reality;  so  the  older  reality  is  no  longer  reasonable  and 
becomes  unreal,  its  place  being  occupied  by  the  newly 
and  more  widely  reasonable.  It  must  be  remembered 
that  all  this  takes  place  in  the  mind,  the  so-called 
material  world  is  only  a  sort  of  image  in  the  mind  of 
that  part  of  the  Absolute  Idea  which  appears  as  nature 
in  order  that  the  complete  mind  shall  carry  out  its 
destiny.  Therefore,  reality  or  truth  is  constantly  chang- 
ing, what  is  true  at  one  time  is  untrue  at  another, 
because  mind  has  advanced  in  the  meantime  and  dis- 
covered an  additional  part  of  absolute  truth  which 
modifies  the  previous  reality  and  therefore  negates  it; 
a  still  further  advance  would  in  like  manner  negate  the 
previous  negation,  and  so  on  and  on  continually  until  the 
complete  Idea  has  been  unfolded,  but  meanwhile  what 
is  at  any  given  moment  is  what  ought  to  be.  Is  it 
any  wonder  the  tyrannical  Prussian  Government  of 
Hegel's  day  welcomed  such  a  comforting  philosophy? 

Just  as  Kant's  doctrine  of  freedom  was  the  philosophy 
of  the  middle  class  since  it  voiced  their  need  for  "  liberty, 
equality  and  fraternity,"  so,  thirty  years  later,  Hegel's 
doctrine  that  "  what  is,  is  what  ought  to  be  "  was 
simply  a  philosophical  expression  of  the  same  material 
conditions  when  the  middle  class  had  got  what  they 
wanted  and  were  crying  halt;  but  to  get  the  full  force 
of  this  it  is  necessary  to  remember  that  prior  to  the 
French  Revolution  of  1789,  the  Liberals,  or  manufactur- 
ing element,  needed  freedom  from  the  restrictions 
imposed  on  them  by  the  landed  nobility,  though  they 
were  not  powerful  enough  to  get  it  without  the  aid  of 
the  lower  class  of  working  people.  At  the  time  of  the 
Revolution  the  two  classes  (middle  class  and  working 
class)  had  carried  all  before  them,  the  working  class 


Tin  X  K  I  93 

thought  they  had  conquered  liberty,  and  so  they  had, 

hut  not  for  themselves,  for  as  soon  as  the  nobility  were 

overthrown  and  their  power  broken,  the  middle 

had  got  all  the  freedom  they  required  and  had  no  wish 

to  share  it  with  the  working  class.  They,  the  middle 
class,  were  to  be  the  new  master  class,  it  was  therefore 
dangerous  to  allow  liberty  to  the  working  class  whom 
they  were  to  exploit.  The  march  towards  liberty  had 
gone  far  enough  for  them,  so  they  called  a  halt  and 
eventually  restored  the  Monarchy,  though  in  a  limited 
form.  Hegel's  doctrine,  then,  was  a  mental  refle 
the  period  of  restoration,  while  that  of  Kant  represented 
the  period  of  attack.  Kant's  was  a  war  cry  for  freedom, 
Hegel's  was  a  hymn  of  thanksgiving  that  things  had 
reached  a  settled  state.  But  here  came  the  contradiction 
that  ruined  Hegel's  philosophy,  for  his  method  was 
dialectic  (changing),  his  system  static  (settled). 

I  tegel's  philosophy  had  a  short  but  brilliant  run.  His 
followers  ultimately  split  into  two  camps.  The  right 
wing  clung  to  the  static  side,  believing  that  "  wh 
is  what  ought  to  be  ";  this,  we  have  seen,  was  pleasing 
to  the  Prussian  Government.  But  that  same  Govern- 
ment's "  unjust  "  taxation,  harsh  laws  and  refusal  to 
allow  to  the  German  middle  class  any  democratic  voice 
in  government,  led  to  the  formation  of  the  left  wing, 
known  as  the  Young  Hegelians.  The  left  wing  accepted 
the  dialectical  part  of  Hegel  but  rejected  the  static,  and 
in  the  hands  of  Marx  and  Engels,  who  sprang  from  the 
Young  Hegelians,  and  later,  Dietzgen,  the  dialectical 
view  led  for  the  first  time  to  scientific  results  in 
thinking,  because  it  constituted  the  method  employed, 
or  rather  the  view  taken,  in  building  up  the  science  of 
society. 

Meanwhile  there  were  wars,  misery  and  seemingly 
nothing  but  angry  contention.  When  all  the  philosophers 
one  after  the  other  had  tried  to  solve  the  question  of 
what  was  moral,  right,  just,  etc.,  it  appeared  that 
things  were  worse  than  ever.  This  was  the  state 
of  affairs  that  gained  a  hearing  for  ARTHUR 
SCHOPENHAUER  (1788— 1860,  of  Dantzig,  Berlin 
and    Frankfort  (in  .Main),    who,    like    He  k    his 


94  THINKING 

root  notion  of  the  human  will  from  Kant.  But 
while  Hegel  thought  the  will  was  merely  the 
means  by  which  the  mind  struggled  with  nature  and 
found  out  the  real  good  in  the  Idea,  Schopenhauer 
thought  it  was  the  only  thing  that  existed;  but,  in  order 
to  express  itself,  it  divided  itself  into  "  will  "  (the  reality 
that  strives  to  attain  its  desires)  on  the  one  hand,  and 
"  knowledge  "  (its  own  creation)  on  the  other.  The  will, 
he  thought,  employed  knowledge  for  the  mere  purpose 
of  expressing  its  own  desire  as  "  the  will  to  live."  But 
he  further  thought  the  will  was  essentially  bad)  and  the 
only  good  that  came  out  of  all  the  striving  was  that  the 
reason  ultimately  became  aware  that  complete  satisfac- 
tion cannot  be  attained,  and  therefore  the  best  thing  to 
do  is  to  give  up  striving,  to  renounce  all  interest  in  any 
satisfaction  to  be  got  in  life,  and  to  calmly  await  death. 
It  reminds  one  of  certain  aspects  of  Buddhism  and 
Theosophy. 

However,  the  material  conditions  still  continued  to 
throw  up  their  mental  reflexes.  After  the  German  and 
French  Revolutions  of  1848  and  1852,  capital  was 
producing  wealth,  vice  and  luxury  at  the  top  of  society, 
and  poverty,  vice  and  misery  at  the  bottom;  little  men 
here  and  tnere  were  struggling  to  become  capitalists, 
small  capitalists  struggling  to  become  greater  capitalists 
while  the  great  ones  had  already  entered  on  the 
struggle  to  determine  which  particular  group  should 
become  world  dominant;  it  was  more  than  ever 
the  era  of  competitive  struggle  resulting  from 
the  enormously-increased  machine  production  and 
the  consequent  cross  investments  of  capital  tending 
towards  the  unification  of  ownership  of  tools  and 
materials.  The  better  tools  caused  an  overproduction 
of  certain  classes  of  goods  and  led  to  fierce  international 
competition  for  markets.  All  this  fierce  struggle 
was  expressed  philosophically  by  FRIEDRICH 
NIETZSCHE  (1844 — 1900,  of  Rocken  and  Basel)  who 
imagined  that  those  who  resigned  themselves  to  their 
fate  deserved  nothing  better,  for  the  human  "will  to 
live,"  if  rightly  understood,  was  not  a  bad  thing,  but, 
on  the  contrary,  the  best  thing  we  possessed;  and  far 


THINKING 

from  despondently  waiting  for  death,  we  ought  to  be 
continually  working  with  might  and  main  to  develop 
those  dominant  qualities  whereby  In  the  struggle 
existence  more  vigorous  races  would  be  produced,  men 

who  would  be  as  far  above  the  men  of  today  as  the 
latter  are  ahove  the  beasts;  this  became  known  as  the 

doctrine  of  the  Superman.  Here,  again,  the  advance  oi 
science  was  reflected  in  philosophy,  for  in  1859  Darwin 
had  published  the  results  of  his  biological  researches  in 

which  he  expounded  his  doctrine  of  the  "  origin  ol 
species  "  by  "natural  selection  "  and  "the  survival  ol 
the  fittest." 

I  luring  the  century  preceding  Nietzsche's  philosophy, 
Kant  and  his  German  followers,  as  already  stated,  had 
treated  the  mind  as  capable  of  producing  ideas  without 
the  aid  of  the  senses,  but  it  took  a  long  time  for  this  to 
affect  English  thought.  Englishmen  for  a  couple  o! 
centuries  had  been  materialists,  developing  in  the  main 
along  the  lines  laid  down  by  Bacon,  Hobbes  and  Locke, 
namely,  that  truth  was  to  In-  sought  by  Studying  nature, 
and  that  ideas  could  not  be  produced  except  by  means 
of  sensation.  They  sought  to  account  for  ideas  by  the 
same  method  as  that  used  in  explaining  nature,  and 
treated  ideas  as  being  made  up,  so  1  < *  speak,  of  mental 
atoms.  They  tried  to  explain  mental  work  as  the 
"association  of  ideas,"  and  sought  to  find  the  la.. 
that  association.  For  example,  Hume  explained  the 
notion  of  a  cause  as  being  composed  of,  or  built  up 
from,  often  repeated  associations  of  a  particular 
kind.  These  men  were  known  as  the  "  LMI'IKICAL 
PSYCHOLOGISTS"  and  include  David  llartly 
(1705 — 1757.     of      Halifax  1,      lames     Mill     (1773      [836, 

01  Xorthwater  Bridge,  in  Forfarshire,  later  London  1, 
John  Stuart  Mill  (1806  [873,  of  London,  son  of  lames 
Mill),  and  Alexander  Bain  1  [818  [QM,  Prof,  of  I 
at  Aberdeen).  Between  Hartly  and  I.  Mill  there  \tere 
Thomas  Reid  (1710-  1796,  oi  St  radian,  Kincardine- 
shire; succeeded  Adam  Smith  in  Glasgow  as  Moral 
Philosopher)  and  Dugald  Stewart  (175$— 1828,  of 
Edinburgh),  who  founded  the  Scottish  school,  of  which 
Sir   \V.    Hamilton   was  a   leading    light;   the   general 


96  THINKING 

feature  of  this  school  was  a  confidence  in  common- 
sense  and  intuitive  convictions,  which  made  them 
opponents  of  all  forms  of  philosophic  scepticism. 

If  we  remember  that  philosophers  had  thrown 
theological  direction  in  moral  matters  overboard  and 
were  still  searching  for  the  origin  of  morality  in  the 
human  mind,  we  shall  see  it  to  be  only  natural  that 
those  who  tried  to  explain  all  forms  of  thought  as  being 
due  to  sensation  should  attempt  to  explain  morality  as 
arising  from  a  combination  of  the  feelings  of  pleasure 
and  pain;  and  in  this  way  arose  the  school  of  Utili- 
tarianism represented  by  JEREMY  BENTHAM  (1747 
—1832,  of  London)  and  JOHN  S.  MILL.  When  asked 
to  explain  the  idea  of  "  virture  for  its  own  sake"  on 
the  basis  of  utilitarianism,  they  thought  it  arose  from  the 
"  association  of  ideas  "  wherein  a  man  who  had  learned 
by  experience  that  he  got  most  pleasure  by  being 
virtuous,  gradually  got  into  the  habit  of  being  virtuous, 
so  that  the  practice  of  virtue,  which  originally  had  been 
only  a  means  of  attaining  pleasure,  eventually  came  to 
be  the  end  in  view.  However,  this  is  a  view  developed 
from  the  standpoint  of  an  individual,  it  does  not  explain 
that  conviction  which  most  people  have  of  there  being 
a  "right"  which  is  right  for  everybody;  nor  does  it 
explain  the  so-called  universal  mathematical  truths. 
Herbert  Spencer  suggested  that  the  latter  ideas  might 
be  accounted  for  by  assuming  that  our  ancestors  had 
had  the  experience  necessary  to  form  the  ideas,  and 
that  our  inherent  convictions  had  been  handed  down 
to  us  through  heredity;  but  this  was  no  explanation, 
for  whichever  way  we  look  at  it,  no  amount  of 
individual  experience,  however  far  back,  could  account 
for  what  is  absolutely  and  universally  true,  because  no 
individual  could  ever  experience  something  that  is 
universal. 

By  degrees,  however,  English  sensationalism  came  to 
be  influenced  by  German  idealism.  THOMAS  HILL 
GREEN  (1836— 1882,  of  Birkin,  in  Yorkshire,  and 
Oxford  University),  who  pointed  out  that  Hume  had 
long  ago  reduced  the  sensation  theory  to  scepticism, 
was  a  student  of  Kant  and  Hegel;  he  called  attention  to 


THINKING  97 

the  fact  that  the  objects  of  natural  science  which 

outside  the  mind  could  not  be  reduced  to  a  combination 
of  feelings;  nor  could  a  common  or  universal  "  good  " 
or  "happiness"  or  "right"  be  understood  by  indi- 
viduals as  being  composed  of  their  feelings  in  total  since 
their  feelings  were  only  momentary.  Therefore,  he 
argued,  there  must  be,  in  addition  to  the  objects  outside 
the  mind,  a  permanent  mind  to  remember  those  feelings, 
and  also,  this  mind  must  be  capable  of  knowing  what  is 
always  and  everywhere  true,  it  must  be  a  univi 
mind,  or  God,  of  which  individual  minds  were  so-called 
reproductions.  Others,  not  taking  into  consideration 
that  the  mind  is  always  engaged  in  seeking  unity, 
thought  the  universal  mind  was  nothing  but  an 
abstraction,  so  they  held  that  only  individual  minds 
need  be  considered.  WILLIAM  JAMES  (1N42— 1910, 
Prof,  of  Phil,  at  Harvard)  taught  a  theory  known  as 
"  pragmatism,"  based  on  the  independence  of  individual 
minds  and  their  ability  to  arrive  at  truth  by  finding  out 
what  is  practicable  in  relation  to  individual  interests. 
Altogether,  an  idealist  strain  gradually  permeated 
English  materialism,  but  in  the  latter  part  of  the  nine- 
teenth century  there  were  reversions  which  showed 
themselves  in  what  has  been  called  "  realism,"  though 
with  a  different  meaning  as  compared  with  the  realism 
of  the  Scholastics. 

Realism,  a  reflex  of  German  materialism,  is  really  a 
dualism  of  matter  and  force,  of  which  we  shall 
see  more  in  the  next  chapter.  This  dualism,  added 
to  the  doctrine  of  evolution,  found  expression  in 
HKkBERT  SPENCER'S  "Synthetic  Philosophy," 
wherein  he  attempted  to  show  by  the  "  persistence 
of  force"  the  evolution  from  atoms  to  societies. 
The  concept  of  biological  evolution  when  applied  t < » 
society,  treats  society  as  a  biological  organism  and 
directs  philosophic  thought  towards  the  study  of 
the  biological  principle  of  "  life,"  as  expressed  in  the 
evolution  of  society;  the  ever-present  "  urge  "  which 
drives  society  onward.  George  Bernard  Shaw  calls  this 
"urge"  the  "life  force."  Since  this  active  living 
principle  appears  to  operate  whether  we  are  conscious 

G 


98  THINKING 

of  it  or  not,  there  arise  the  questions  of  its  relation  to 
consciousness  on  the  one  hand  and  to  mere  mechanism 
on  the  other;  these  questions  lie  at  the  root  of  modern 
psychology,  they  are  the  two  parts  of  our  old  question 
as  to  the  connection  between  mind  and  matter,  because 
"  life  "  is  here  treated  as  an  entity  expressing  itself 
partly  in  mind  and  partly  in  matter.  As  far  as  philosophy 
is  concerned,  the  whole  thing  put  simply  means  that 
philosophers  have  definitely  dropped  the  word  "  God  " 
and  substituted  that  of  "  Life,"  but  they  are  still  where 
they  were. 

On  the  idealist  side,  the  final  outburst,  up  to  date, 
comes  from  HENRI  BERGSON  (Prof,  at  the  College 
of  France).  With  Bergson,  truth  is  the  life  which 
pervades  the  universe,  or,  rather,  which  is  the  universe. 
It  consists  of  that  general  consciousness  or  intuition,  of 
which  instinct  (as  in  bees  and  ants)  is  a  more  highly- 
concentrated  form,  while  intellect  (as  in  man),  which 
has  evolved  along  a  different  line,  is  the  most  highly 
concentrated.  Its  essence  is  an  eternally-changing  now, 
an  absolute  time  duration  which  we  apprehend  in 
intuition.  This  intuitive  duration  is  identical  with  being 
or  existence,  for  we  know  intuitively  that  we  are  living 
and  this  life  or  reality  is  nothing  but  movement,  a  move- 
ment of  pure  time.  Matter  is  an  illusion  produced  by 
part  of  the  total  movement  taking  place  in  a  reverse 
direction  to  other  currents,  thus  giving  to  these  time 
currents  the  appearance  of  material  objects.  Material 
objects  are,  therefore,  nothing  but  the  obstacles  that 
each  current  presents  to  the  other  just  at  the  points 
where  the  now  is  becoming  the  future.  This  conception, 
of  matter  being,  by  illusion,  the  materialised  impact  of 
two  time  currents,  is  a  reflex  of  the  electron  theory, 
wherein  matter  is  materialised  energy  resulting  from  the 
impact  of  two  electric  forces  that  reduce  each  other  to 
inertia,  the  electron,  the  base  of  ponderable  matter, 
being  the  point  of  electrical  inertia.  In  Bergson's 
working  out,  the  different  parts  of  consciousness  act 
upon  and  therefore  condition  each  other;  so,  considered 
as  parts,  are  not  free,  but,  when  taken  altogether  are 
conditioned  only  by  their  own  internal  character,  and 


THINKINi 

consequently  have  a  freedom.   This  freedom  holds  alike 
for  a  whole  individual  or  the  whole  of  life.    There! 
when  we  acl  intuitively  (is  a  whole  we  act  fr<  ich  an 

act  is  a  creative  act  and  it  i>  such  acts  thai  constitute  the 
evolutionary  process.   Creative  evolution  is  ac 
the  free  surging  onward  of  some  part  of  univei  sal  "life 
or  Spirit  overcoming   some  other  part.      B  does 

not  offer  a  reconciliation  of  mind  and  matter,  but  rather 
a  new  view  wherein  the  question  of  dualism 
arise,  since  they  are  both  one  life  pi  oce  -  -.  1 1  i  followers 
call  this  reality  "  mind,"  not  because  it  is  ethereal  as 
contrasted  with  gross  matter,  but  because  it  is  the 
active,  living,  intelligent  principle  of  existence.  In 
expounding  this  philosophy,  Bergson  becomes  the 
modern  mystic,  his  intuitive  surging  creation  being  a 
close  parallel  to  the  ecstacy  of  Plotinus. 

Excluding  minor  differences,  it  should  be  plain  that 
modern  philosophy  runs  very  nearly  the  same  course 
as  ancient  philosophy;  for  when  the  Milesians  with 
"  open  "  minds  started  investigations  which  gav< 
to  problems  of  ultimate  reality,  philosophy  developed  its 
"  great  men,"  its  sophists  and  sceptics,  its  dialectics,  its 
atoms,  its  questions  of  morality  wherein  Epicureans 
based  conduct  upon  pleasure,  the  Sceptics  upon  the 
common-sense  of  their  day,  the  Stoics  sinking  bark 
into  faith  while  the  Neoplatonists  fizzled  out  in  a 
state  of  ecstatic  supernatural  mysticism ;  and  - 
similar  manner  did  modern  philosophy  begin  with 
Descartes'  investigations  based  on  doubt,  followed 
by  the  permanent  natures  of  God,  the  scepticism 
of  Hume,  the  materialism  based  on  atomic  science, 
the  utilitarianism  of  Mill  based  on  pleasure,  the  prior 
return  to  faith  by  Kant,  the  dialectics  of  Hegel,  only  in 
the  end  to  fizzle  out  in  the  idealistic  mysticism  of  the 
natural,  as  in  Bergson  and  Shaw.  And  so  must  it  always 
be,  that  those  who  start  from  mind  without  authority, 
end  in  mysticism;  while  those  who  start  from  mind 
along  with  authority,  end  in  faith. 

Mas  it  been  without  results?  No,  not  quite.  Kant 
cleared  the  problem  by  showing  it  to  be  one  of  thinking, 
Hegel  applied  the  dialectic  method  to  a  wide  know  led    c 


ioo  THINKING 

of  history,  but  to  see  how  this  in  the  hands  of  Marx  led 
to  the  solution  of  the  problem  of  thinking,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  go  back  to  the  seventeenth  century  in  order 
to  follow  modern  philosophy  through  the  development 
of  its  materialist  aspects. 


(   II  AM  kk    \  II! 
Materialism  from  Roger  Bacon  to  Marx 

(Although  some  of  the  following  points  have  already 
been  mentioned  in  connection  with  other  phases  of  the 
story,  they  are  repeated  in  this  chapter  for  the  sake  of 
completeness. ) 

Philosophic  materialism  originally  presented  itself 
in  the  form  of  natural  philosophy,  which  later  tame  to 
be  called  natural  science.  Positive  science,  in  so  far  as 
any  beginning  can  be  assigned  to  it.  appeared  with 
ROGER  BACON  (1214 — 1294).  It  ha^  been  assigned 
to  R.  Bacon,  notwithstanding  that  there  had  been  many 
natural  philosophers  before  him,  because  prior  to  his 
time  it  had  been  the  custom  in  solving  problems  to  rely 
for  results  on  a  process  of  deductive  reasoning,  after 
the  manner  of  Aristotle.  Deduction  consists  in  taking 
some  statement  as  being  true  and  then  deducing 
conclusions  from  it,  but  R.  Bacon  thought  that  such  a 
method  was  not  sufficient  in  itself  and  that  we  ought 
to  take  great  care  in  establishing  the  firsl  statement, 
or  premise,  for  if  that  were  false  so  would  the  conclusion 
be  false  however  perfect  our  logic.  His  method  was, 
therefore,  to  base  all  his  firsl  statements  on  obst 
facts,  about  which  he  formed  opinions,  then  by 
deduction  argued  what  oughl  to  follow  and  finally  t< 
his  conclusions  by  experimenting  t<>  see  it  those  con 
elusions  did  actually  follow.  This  method  we  see  at  a 
glance  to  be  the  correct  one  because  it  tests  Hie  results 
obtained,  which,  if  found  not  to  agree  with  the  first 
opinion,  leads  to  a  modification  of  that  opinion.  It 
consists  of  observation  and  experiment,  is  called 
the  inductive  method,  and,  along  with  the  material 
investigated,  forms  the  groundwork  of  all  science. 

101 


102  THINKING 

DUNS  SCOTUS  (1274— 1308),  the  British  School- 
man and  contemporary  of  R.  Bacon,  asked  "Is  it  not 
possible  for  matter  to  think?"  In  this  he  made 
theology  preach  materialism  by  supposing  that  God 
could  have  produced  such  a  miracle  had  he  wished.  He 
was,  we  remember,  partly  a  nominalist,  and  nominalism 
which  arose  from  natural  philosophy  was  the  first  form 
of  materialism. 

Three  centuries  later  FRANCIS  BACON  (1561— - 
1626)  applied  the  inductive  method  more  widely  in 
natural  philosophy,  so  that,  although  not  the  originator 
of  the  method,  as  is  sometimes  said,  he  was,  neverthe- 
less, the  starting  point  of  English  materialism.  He 
sought  by  observation  and  experiment  in  relation  to 
natural  objects  to  explain  the  works  of  God.  Bacon, 
therefore,  never  escaped  from  theistic  prejudice,  even 
though  he  thought  that  all  knowledge  was  based  on  the 
experience  of  the  senses.  His  basis  was  accordingly 
matter,  but  his  conclusions  were  vitiated  by  a 
theological  bias. 

HOBBES  (1588 — 1679)  continued  the  development  by 
reducing  Bacon's  teaching  to  something  like  a  system. 
He  was  not  disinclined  to  the  thought  of  an  eternal 
power  that  one  might  call  God  if  it  suited,  but  could 
conceive  no  knowledge  of  that  God  except  what  came 
to  us  by  our  senses  in  contact  with  material  things; 
accordingly,  we  could  know  nothing  about  the 
existence  of  God,  apart  from  material  things.  He 
believed  that  anything  real  must  occupy  space,  and 
consequently  be  mathematical;  also,  that  all  changes 
imply  motion,  and  must  accordingly  be  mechanical; 
these  two  ideas  were  the  clear  and  distinct  notions  of 
his  contemporary,  Descartes.  That  any  other  attributes 
of  bodies,  such  as  colour,  warmth,  etc.,  could  be  real 
he  would  not  allow.  Therefore,  with  him  as  with 
Descartes,  the  physical  universe  could  be  explained  on 
mechanical  lines.  In  the  realm  of  morality,  since  all 
knowledge  is  due  to  sensation,  all  moral  distinctions 
were  traced  to  self  interest.  In  so  far  as  Hobbes  made 
material  the  source  of  the  idea  of  God,  so  did  he  shatter 
the  theism  of  Bacon,  without,  however,  furnishing  the 


i  mi:,  i 

proof  of  Bacon's  principle  that  knowledge  from 

sensation. 

It  was  JOIIX  LOCKE  (1632  17041  (more  fully 
treated  in  the  fifth  chapter  as  a  background  to  Iiork<lcv 
and  Hume)  who  supplied  the  beginning  of  that  proof. 
lie  supported  the  idea  of  sensation  being  tin-  basis  of 
knowledge,  by  his  theory  that  understanding  was  wholly 
dependent  on  experience,  but  that  experience  v.., 
two  kinds — sensation  and  reflection;  the  reflection 
taking  place  in  relation  to  what  was  in  t lie  mind  as  the 
result  of  sense  perception  (Leibnitz  and  Berkeley,  as  we 
have  seen,  criticised  this  position  from  the  idealistic 
standpoint,  see  pp.  70-2).  His  doctrine  still  retained 
traces  of  theology  to  the  extent  of  a  belief  in  a  Creator, 
since  something  could  not  come  from  nothing;  but  the.se 
were  eventually  dissipated  by  a  succession  of  brilliant 
scientist — philosophers  who  gradually  got  rid  of  the 
Supreme  Mind,  though  to  this  day  they  are  confused 
with  respect  to  the  problem  of  the  human  mind. 
However,  the  basic  thought  of  the  sensational  school 
remained  in  England,  and  with  succeeding  generations 
of  discovery,  invention  and  studv,  developed  into  the 
modern  science  and  modern  rationalism  that  may  be 
typified  by  such  names  as  Darwin,  Huxley  and  Spencer. 
The  philosophic  characteristic  of  these  thinkers  has  been 
referred  to  as  "  realism,"  which,  as  opposed  to  idealism 
of  the  Kantian  and  Hegelian  types,  means  that  external 
objects  have  a  real  existence;  it  is  a  product  of  the 
later  nineteenth  century  science,  whose  findings  were  in 
conflict  with  the  remains  of  supernaturalism,  which, 
from  the  rationalists'  standpoint,  had  to  be  fought,  and 
is  really  a  dualism  of  matter  and  force,  or,  in  other 
words,  it  is  a  materialist  doctrine  that  zcas  never  fully 
worked  out.  The  English  branch  of  it  was  in  opposi- 
tion to  German  idealism,  which  permeated  English 
thought  through  the  work  of  students  of  Kant  and 
Hegel,  but  it  received  much  support  from  German 
materialism.  Therefore,  since  the  time  of  Locke,  the 
development  of  materialism  represents  a  long  fight 
between  supernatural  religion  and  idealist  philosophy, 
on  the  one  side,  and  natural  science  on  the  other,  so, 


104  THINKING 

although  it  is  not  our  purpose  to  follow  the  develop- 
ment of  science  from  the  standpoint  of  science, 
nevertheless,  since  scientific  achievements  have  had  a 
great  effect  on  both  religion  and  philosophy,  they 
cannot  be  disregarded. 

Before  the  time  of  Locke,  Copernicus  (1473— 1543) 
had  laid  the  base  of  modern  astronomy  with  his 
heliocentric  theory,  which  contradicted  previous 
religious  teaching.  Vesalius  (1514 — 1564)  had  made  a 
start  in  the  direction  of  modern  anatomy.  Gilbert 
(1540 — 1603)  had  discovered  the  principles  of  terrestrial 
magnetism.  Lippershey's  telescope  had  appeared  in 
1608.  Galeleo  (1564 — 1642)  had  contributed  the 
principles  of  falling  bodies,  etc.  Kepler  (1571 — 1630) 
had  added  the  laws  of  motion.  At  about  Locke's  time 
Harvey  (1578 — 1657)  discovered  the  circulation  of  the 
blood,  which  considerably  modified  previous  physiology. 
Boyle  (1627 — 1691)  discovered  the  atomic  laws,  which 
constituted  the  basis  of  modern  chemistry,  and  which, 
as  applied  to  natural  processes,  ruined  much  of  the 
teaching  of  the  Church.  Newton  (1642 — 1721)  gave  us 
the  spectroscope,  the  planetary  laws  of  motion,  and  the 
universal  law  of  gravitation.  Hutton  (1726 — 1797) 
worked  out  a  systematic  foundation  of  geology  (1795), 
which  contradicted  previous  ideas  of  the  creation  and 
the  age  of  the  earth.  Kant  in  1757  and  Laplace  in  1796 
formulated  the  nebular  theory,  with  a  similar  result. 
Priestley  (1733 — 1804)  had  many  discoveries  in  gases  to 
his  credit,  and  in  combination  with  Scheele  discovered 
oxygen,  which  was  finally  established  by  Lavoisier 
(1743 — 1794).  Cuvier  (1769 — 1832)  founded  the  science 
of  comparative  anatomy.  Karl  von  Baer  (1792 — 1876) 
discovered  the  mammalian  ovum — the  basis  of  compara- 
tive embryology,  which,  more  than  any  other  science, 
established  man's  relationship  to  the  animal  world. 
Wohler  (1802 — 1882)  in  1828  dealt  a  great  blow  to 
religious  belief  by  producing  urea  synthetically;  this  was 
thought  to  be  a  compound  peculiar  to  animal  life,  and  as 
such  part  of  the  handiwork  of  God.  But  probably  the 
greatest  blow  of  all  was  given  by  Darwin  (1809 — 1882), 
who  in  1859  published  his  theory  of  the  "  Origin  of 


THINKING  105 

Species."     Of  course  one  could  enumerate  exampl 
much  greater  length,  l>ut   sufficient  1ms  been  said  t" 

indicate  the  trend  of  thought  that  undermined  belief  in 
the  supernatural. 

The  same  scientific  development  had  its  influence 
in  philosophy,  which  wo  have  seen  reflected  in  the 
realism  of  the  nineteenth  century;  but  this  realistic 
thought  is  itself  undergoing  a  change  consequent  upon 
further  scientific  development.  Most  thinking  in 
connection  with  the  various  sciences  has  long  been 
freed  from  the  supernatural,  nevertheless  until  quite 
recently  it  stuck  at  trying"  to  prove  that  mind  is  a  mere 
product  of  ponderable  matter.  Later  students  are 
taking  up  the  attitude  that  mind  can  never  be  material, 
that  it  indeed  is  not  even  physical,  but  that  mind  and 
matter  are  two  different  orders  of  being,  running 
parallel  to  each  other.  The  latter  idea,  which  has 
received  support  from  the  electron  theory,  arises  as  a 
contradictory  reflex  from  the  idea  that  matter  is  nothing 
but  materialised  energy;  so,  they  argue,  if  thought  IS 
energised  matter  then  it  should  be  measurable  in  terms 
of  "work"'  done,  just  as  are  other  forms  of  energy; 
and,  since  it  is  not  measurable  they  conclude  that  it  is 
not  physical.  Such  a  mode  of  reasoning,  however,  is  a 
long  way  from  proof,  its  weakness  lying  in  the  fact  that, 
if  it  were  true,  nothing  could  be  called  physical  until  it 
had  been  measured;  for  example,  the  scent  of  a  flower 
is  admittedly  physical,  yet  it  cannot  be  said  to  be  capable 
of  measurement.  It  will  be  seen,  therefore,  that  while 
these  people  are  presumably  scientific  in  their  own  fields 
of  enquiry,  they  appear  to  be  just  as  ignorant  as  many 
others  when  dealing  with  the  problem  of  the  mind,  the 
obvious  reason  being  that  they  employ  the  scientific 
method  in  their  own  special  work,  while  outside  that 
sphere  they  remain  mere  speculative  wondcrers.  \\  t 
shall  see  more  of  this  in  Part  II.  of  our  enquiry:  for  the 
present  we  must  return  to  the  sensational  school  of 
Bacon,  Hobbes  and  Locke,  and  follow  it  in  its 
migration  to  France. 

France  in  the  eighteenth  century  was  in  a  stat< 
feudalism,    with,    first,    a    superior    territorial    clergy: 


106  THINKING 

second,  the  nobility;  and  third,  the  small  landholders, 
who  were  striving  to  become  what  is  now  called  the 
middle  class  (the  serf  or  common  labourer  was  "no 
class  "  at  all).  The  small  landholders  were  oppressed; 
there  was  economic  servitude  for  the  masses,  combined 
with  a  corrupt  State  reeking-  with  debauchery  and 
general  mental  demoralisation.  This  was  the  field  in 
which  English  materialism  took  root  and  registered  its 
protest  against  the  tyranny  and  corruption  alike  in 
morals,  religion  and  State;  in  fact  against  all  existing 
forms  of  authoritative  restraint.  The  lower  orders  had 
lost  all  patience,  for  in  addition  to  the  corruption  just 
mentioned,  'he  new  machinery  being  introduced  from 
England  was  developing  in  the  industrial  areas  a 
proletariat  on  the  one  hand  and  an  industrial  capitalist 
class  on  the  other.  In  earlier  times  the  Renaissance 
had  been  influential  in  producing  a  mental  reaction 
against  traditional  thought,  and  in  the  period  we  are 
treating  a  development  of  that  reaction  was  exemplified 
in  the  writings  of  men  such  as  Rousseau  and  Voltaire; 
the  rising  movement  also  developed  a  school  of 
materialist-atheists  who,  because  they  were  engaged  in 
producing  a  great  Encyclopaedia,  came  to  be  known  as 
the  Encyclopaedists.  Among  these  were  several  men  of 
note — Diderot  (the  editor),  D'Alembert,  Montesqieu, 
Mirabeau  and  Baron  D'Holbach,  the  last  of  whom, 
under  the  name  of  Miraband,  wrote  a  work  entitled 
"  The  System  of  Nature."  This  work  is  representative 
of  French  materialism;  it  attempts  an  explanation  of  the 
whole  of  nature,  including  man  and  his  mind,  on  strictly 
mechanical  lines.  We  may  here  see  why  Engels  calls 
Bacon,  Hobbes  and  Locke  the  fathers  of  eighteenth 
century  materialists. 

The  argument  running  through  "The  System  of 
Nature "  starts  from  the  assumption  that  everything 
that  is,  is  natural,  and  is  perpetually  changing,  the 
changes  being  due  to  motion.  Therefore,  everything 
in  the  universe  is  some  combination  or  other  of 
ponderable  matter  and  motion.  Mind  is  a  product  of  so 
much  brain  matter,  and  takes  effect  according  to  the 
material  constitution  of  any  particular  brain  plus  its 


THINKU  ir7 

subsequent  experience.     In  addition  to  the  motion  oi 
bodies,  such  as  vehicles,  the  moving  oi  a  table, 
which  can   be   seen  and   which   excites   no   particular 
attention,  there  is  much  motion  that  cannot  be 

What  we  call  tbc  Soul  is  really  motion  of  the  latter  kind, 
but  man  not  understanding  it  has  presupposed  a  self- 
moving  Soid  of  a  supernatural  order  of  being.     There 

are  no   innate   ideas,    because   the   intellectual    faculties 
depend  upon  sen.se  perceptions,  though  thoughl  itself 
being  motion  may  be  the  object  of  thought,  just  as  a 
given  direction  of  motion  may  be  changed  by  a  ; 
acting  in  a  different  direction. 

Morality  arises  from  tbc  difference  in  the  constitu 
tions  of  different  individuals.  Since  individuals  vary 
according"  to  tbeir  material  or  bodily  constitution  in 
addition  to  tbeir  experiences,  and  since  each  tri> 
that  which  pleases  him  according  to  bis  constitution, 
there  arises  a  diversity  of  interests.  In  the  conflict  of 
interests,  those  individuals  who  have  a  knowledge  <i 
nature's  laws  and  are  therefore  reasoning  beings,  come 
to  see  that  the  greatest  amount  of  good  accrues  to  the 
individual  only  when  the  wishes  of  other  individuals  are 
taken  into  account;  and  so  arise  the  laws  of  morals,  the 
general  love  of  man  for  man,  justice  in  politics  and 
law,  etc. 

I  >f  course,  such  doctrines  were  opposed  to  tyrannical 
churches,  governments  and  ( iod.  They  constituted  the 
rationalisation  of  the  material  interests  of  the  middle 
class,  and  accordingly  appeared  as  the  consciously 
worked  out  mental  stock-in-trade  of  the  revolutionists 
of  1789,  who,  in  place  of  the  former  morality  of  Church. 
State  and  feudal  nobility,  set  up  the  moral  standards  of 
Liberty,  Equality  and  Fraternity,  based  upon  human 
reason.  The  laws  underlying  reason  in  the  human  mind 
were  supposed  to  be  eternal  in  the  eternal  matter  and 
motion.  With  these  one-sided  materialists,  matter  was 
primary,  while  thought,  being  a  mere  product  of  brain 
substance  plus  experience,  was  secondary. 

This  teaching,  though  it  does  away  with  the  Supreme 
mind  of  God  as  the   source   of  morality,   neverti 
remains  very  much  at  sea  when  trying  to  extract  moral 


108  THINKING 

notions  from  the  human  mind,  for  after  treating  mind 
as  an  effect  of  matter,  it  elevates  it  to  the  control  of 
matter  by  the  fact  that  some  men  by  the  aid  of  their 
reason  first  find  out  the  natural  laws,  which  are  deemed 
to  be  eternal,  and  then  impose  those  laws  on  other  men 
who,  for  lack  of  this  knowledge,  are  deemed  unreason- 
able. And.  of  course,  "  it  stands  to  reason  "  that  if 
natural  laws  are  eternal,  so  will  men  who  understand 
those  laws  be  able  to  arrive  at  "  eternally  "  correct 
systems  of  morality,  politics,  laws  and  truth.  It  all 
amounts  to  this,  that  they  had  elevated  their  own  reason 
over  that  of  their  opponents,  but  did  not  know  what  to 
do  with  it  when  they  had  got  it.  They  had  scornfully 
cast  on  one  side  the  transcendental  speculations  about 
the  Supreme  mind  with  its  eternal  moralities  of  Church 
and  State,  only  in  the  end  to  develop  motions  of 
"eternal'"  love,  freedom,  equality,  justice,  etc.,  as  a 
result  of  worshipping  the  human  mind,  and  to  this 
extent  they  remained  idealists,  though  otherwise  doing 
much  good  work  on  the  philosophic  materialist  field. 
While  Kant  hailed  the  Revolution  and  freedom,  he 
nevertheless,  as  stated  in  the  last  chapter,  refuted  these 
rationalist  materialists  on  the  philosophical  field, 
thereby  leaving  room  for  faith  in  the  supernatural,  and 
thus  safeguarding  the  basis  of  the  authority  of  the 
middle  class  over  the  working  class. 

We  have  now  to  notice  how  materialism  broke  out  in 
Germany  in  the  nineteenth  century;  the  story  is  much 
the  same.  With  Austria's  defeat  by  Napoleon  at 
Austerlitz  (1805)  and  Prussia's  similar  fate  at  Jena 
(1806),  the  dying  embers  of  the  Holy  Roman  Empire, 
whose  flame  had  gone  out  at  Constantinople  in  1453, 
parted  with  their  last  curl  of  smoke.  This  resulted  in 
a  number  of  small  German  States  acknowledging 
Napoleon  as  their  protector.  After  the  fall  of 
Napoleon  the  princes  of  those  States  agreed  to  unite  in 
a  confederation,  and  in  each  State  a  constitutional 
government  was  to  be  set  up;  this  was  echoing  the 
results  of  the  French  Revolution,  for  that  nearly  went 
too  far  on  the  side  of  the  proletariat,  so  in  Germany  the 
middle  class  tried  to  get  a  voice  in  the  government, 


THINKING 

without  revolution.  Prussia  and  Austria,  how< 
were  opposed  to  popular  representation.  The  Pru 
Government  was  oppressive  and  unjust  from  the  stand 

point  of  the  middle  class;  it  believed  in  its  eternal  rights 
and  did  not  see  why  it  should  give  its  people  a 
We  have  seen   that   it   found  justification   in    He 
statement,  "  all  that  is  reasonable  is  real,  ami  all  that  is 
real  is  reasonable,"  and.  accordingly,  "  what  is,  is  what 
ought  to  Ik-  " ;  so  l  legel  was  in  favour  w  ith  tin.-  Pm 
Government,  hut  this  Government  was  not  in  favour 

with  those  people  who  wanted  a  voice  in  BUCh  public 
affairs  as  taxation,  and  who  did  not  believe  that  the  laws 

then  existing  were  "  what  ought  to  he,"  consequently, 
since  the  Government  persistently  dilly-dallied  with  the 
question  of  popular  representation,  a  revolution  became 

necessary. 

The  whole  affair,  arising  from  the  economic  needs  of 
the  times,  was,  of  course,  political,  hut  open  opposition 
to  the  Prussian  Government  was  dangerous  worl 
the  prologue  to  the  German  revolution  of  [848  1  which 
found  its  immediate  incentive  in  the  French  revolution 
of  1848),  wherein  the  German  middle  class  conquered 
"  liberty,"  took  the  form  of  philosophical  arguments  in 
the  press,  which  quite  naturally  criticised  Hegel's 
idealism  and  the  prevalent  religion.  At  first  the  new- 
philosophers  fell  back  on  French  materialism  in  their 
tight  against  positive  religion,  which  fight  was  also 
indirectly  a  political  one,  so  it  was  not  surprising  that 
their  philosophy  contained  the  same  essential  glorifica- 
tion of  the  human  mind  after  having  dispensed  with  the 
Almighty  one;  this  may  be  seen  in  the  work  of  Ludwig 
Feuerbach  (1804 — 1872,  of  Landshut,  Erlanden  and 
Bruckberg),  who  put  human  love  as  the  guide  in  place 
of  reason.  Later  ones,  including  Carl  vogt  (1817 
1895,  of  Giessen,  German  biologist),  facob  Mjoleschotte 
(1822— 1893,  Dutch  physiologist,  of  Bois-le-Duc,  settled 
in  Italy),  and  Ludwig  Buchner  <  [824  1899,  "'.  Darm- 
stadt and  Tubingen,  physician'),  were  more  like  the 
modern  English  rationalists  of  the  Herbert  Spencer 
type,  and  believed  in  nothing  but  matter  and  fo 
Haeckel  (1834— 1919,  of  Potsdam  and  Jena,  biolo 


no  THINKING 

even  thought  he  had  discovered  the  Soul  cells. 
Though  considerably  more  advanced  from  the  stand- 
point of  science,  yet,  from  the  standpoint  of  philosophy, 
the  nineteenth  century  materialists  (excepting  those  of 
the  proletarian  movement)  were  crude  and  mechanical, 
like  those  of  the  eighteenth  century,  in  that  ponderable 
matter  was  their  base;  so  it  is  not  necessary  to  work 
through  their  arguments,  since  they  follow  the  same 
main  lines  and  may  be  read  in  "  Force  and  Matter  " — 
an  English  translation  (1864)  of  Biichner's  "  Kraft  und 

Stoff  "(1855). 

At  this  point  we  must  turn  to  the  beginnings  of 
proletarian  science.  The  originators  of  proletarian 
social  science  (so  called  because  it  is  not  accepted  by 
the  university  representatives  of  the  capitalist  class,  but 
which,  nevertheless,  is  nothing  short  of  the  science  of 
society)  sprang  from  Hegel's  left  wing,  the  "  Young 
Hegelians."  They  were  materialists,  though  in  a 
different  sense  from  those  just  treated.  FEUER- 
BACH,  KARL  MARX  (1818— 1883,  of  Treves, 
Cologne,  Paris  and  London)  and  FRIEDRICH 
ENGELS  (1820 — 1895,  °f  Barmen,  Paris,  London 
and  Manchester)  were  of  this  school ;  but  Feuerbach 
belonged  partly  to  the  crude  mechanicalists  described 
by  Engels  as  the  "  metaphysical  materialists,"  because 
when  they  had  finished  with  mechanical  explana- 
tions they  fell  back  on  "pure"  reason,  though 
in  Feuerbach's  case  it  took  the  form  of  sentiment. 
If  we  remember  that  Hegel,  though  an  idealist,  was 
a  dialectician,  and  that  this  was  his  chief  contribu- 
tion to  philosophy,  we  shall  see  why  Feuerbach,  who 
broke  through  Hegel's  "  system "  but  retained  the 
dialectic  "  method  "  of  explaining  all  things  as  evolving 
out  of  other  things,  became  a  materialist  dialectician. 
He  believed  that  the  evolution  of  society  had  in  the  past 
been  along  materialist  lines,  but  he  never  could  cut  quite 
clear  from  the  mechanical  mode  of  thinking,  and  so,  to 
escape  the  consequences,  finally  fell  into  the  trap  of  an 
eternal  human  love  as  the  directive  force  for  the  future. 
In  this  he  was  just  like  the  other  materialists,  who 
prated  of  "  pure  "   reason,  that   is,  he  was   an   idealist 


THINK  I'  in 

with  regard  to  the  future.     Nevertheless,  he  <li<l 
work,  ami  stands  at  the  beginning  of  socialist   pnilo 
sophy;  he  is  the  halfway  house  from  Hegel's  dialectic 
idealism   to   Marx  and    Engels'  dialectic   materialism, 
from  which  arises  scientific  socialism;  Marx  and  Ei 
are  accordingly  the  real  pioneers  in  Bocial 

During  the  nineteenth  century  the  work  of   H< 
gave  increased  momentum  to  the  study  of  history, 
Marx,  one  of  the   students,   took   the  dialectic   method 
from    him,    I  >nt    applied    it    from    the    standpoinl     of 
materialism.      Marx   sought   to   show   the   law   of   .social 

progress  worked  out  in  materialist  dialectic-,  and  one 
of  his  great  discoveries  was  that  history  from  early 
communism   had  been  a  series  of   struggles  between 

different     classes.      From     special     studies     of     those 

Struggles,  plus  the  economic  and  social  institutions  ot 
their  periods,  he  arrived  at  his  concept  oi  "  historical 
materialism,"  which  is,  that  the  economic  mode  of 
production  (which  means  the  way  in  which  people 
their  living),  determines  the  general  form  of  society, 
and  the  general  mental  attitude  of  any  given  period. 

It  determines  the  kind  of  slavery,  the  kind  of  trade. 
the  conflicting  interests  of  different  -roups  and  then- 
consequent  political  struggles.  As  a  result  of  these 
Struggles,  the  conquerers  express  their  interests  in 
various  kinds  of  laws  and  of  governments;  meanwhile 
justifying  themselves  by  claiming  sanction  from  on 
High  through  different  forms  of  religion  and  philo- 
sophy, while  on  the  other  hand  those  who  are  in 
opposition  contend  for  an  opposite  view.  Consequently, 
if  the  opposition  should  represent  the  economic  interests 
of  a  rising  class,  it  has  necessarily  to  attack  the  existing 
political,  legal,  religious  and  philosophical  institutions. 
This  accounts  for  all  rising  movements  being  irreligious 
from  the  standpoint  of  those  already  in  power,  while 
developing  a  religion  that  serves  their  own  purp 
it  also  accounts  for  the  final  rising  movement, 
namely,  that  of  the  working  class  being  non-religious. 
Literature  also  does  but  express  the  thought  of  its 
period,  therefore,  taken  altogether,  the  political,  l< 
religious,  philosophical  and  literary  aspects  ol  thinl 


ii2  THINKING 

ultimately  arise  from  and  necessarily  correspond  to 
given  modes  of  producing-  wealth;  as  the  mode  changes 
so  does  the  thinking;  and  in  the  end  the  changes  depend 
upon  the  evolution  of  tools  or  methods  which  enable 
wealth  to  be  produced  with  a  less  expenditure  of  energy 
than  formerly — in  this  lies  the  essence  of  progress. 
The  evolution  of  Society  expresses  the  evolution 
of  tools.  This  doctrine  constitutes  what  is  known  as 
the  "  Materialistic  Conception  of  History." 

But  the  study  of  modes  of  production,  apart  from  the 
purely  technical  side,  expresses  itself  theoretically  in  the 
science  of  economics,  wherein  Marx  discovered  "  the 
twofold  nature  of  labour."  This  idea  lies  at  the  root  of 
his  theory  of  value.  These  generalisations  could  not 
have  been  discovered  before,  because  a  scientific  theory 
of  value  necessarily  concerns  commodity  production, 
and  could  not  be  thoroughly  worked  out  until  such 
production  had  reached  an  advanced  stage,  for  not  until 
the  system  of  paying  wages  had  separated  more  sharply 
the  middle  class  from  the  working  class,  could  it  be 
clearly  seen  that  the  worker  sells  his  labour  power,  that 
is,  his  strength  or  ability  (physical  and  mental)  to 
perform  labour,  but  not  the  labour  itself.  Once  the 
latter  idea  became  clear  the  secret  of  the  source  of  profit 
was  out,  and  then  a  great  many  other  things  became 
clear.  Marx'  contributions  to  social  science  are  the 
materialistic  conception  of  history,  and  a  well  worked 
out  theory  of  surplus  value  (profit  in  general). 

After  being  exiled  from  the  continent,  Marx  settled  in 
England,  where  he  had  the  chance  of  studying  capital 
in  its  original  home.  In  this  work  he  was  assisted  by 
Engels,  and  between  them  they  formulated  the  general 
proposition  just  outlined  (Engels  gives  the  greater  part 
of  the  credit  to  Marx).  They  did  this  in  the  ordinary 
scientific  manner,  by  first  collecting  historical  material, 
forming  a  general  opinion  regarding  it,  deducing  what 
ought  to  take  place  if  their  general  opinion  were  correct, 
and  finally  noting  the  general  agreement  between  their 
arguments  and  observed  facts.  By  this  method  they 
arrived  at  their  great  generalisation  which,  though 
given    at    the    end    of   the    fourth   chapter,    will    bear 


THINKING  n  ; 

repeating — "In  every  historical  epoch  the  prevailing 
modi-  <>i  economic  production  and  exchange,  and  Un- 
social organisation  necessarily  following  from  it.  form 
the  basis  upon  which  is  built  up  and  from  which  alone 
can  be  explained  the-  political  and  intellectual  history  ol 
that  epoch."  But,  though  Marx  and  Engels  supplied  the 
general  theory  it  remained  for  JOSEPH  DIETZ< 
(1828  -1888,  a  working  tanner  born  at  Blankenberg)  to 
work  out  the  more  detailed  aspects  of  the  mental  reflex  . 
this  he  did  by  showing  the  identity  of  mental  work  with 
the  rest  of  nature.  Dietzgen's  work  will  he  treated  in 
Part  II.  of  this  book,  so  we  leave  it  for  the  present,  but 
before  closing  our  historical  survey,  it  may  he  advisable 
to  refer  to  some  curious  products  of  bourgeois  (middle 
class)  idealism  in  relation  to  the  misery  id'  the 
proletariat  (working  class). 

As  the  modern  working  class  was  evolved  by  capitalist 
development,  and  the  resultant  luxury  on  the  one  hand 
and  misery  on  the  other  became  more  marked,  there 
were  not  wanting  "high  souled  "  people  to  point  out 
the  "  injustice  "  of  such  a  state  of  things,  and  to  suggest 
"remedies";  they  thought  it  was  only  necessary  to 
think  of  some  scheme  of  betterment  and  then  to  appl) 
it;  these  people  are  usually  called  Utopians. 

From  early  times  there  had  been  Utopias  (impractic- 
able dreams  of  a  better  society)  of  different  kinds,  such 
as  Plato's  "Republic,"  Aristotle's  "Politics,'  the 
levelling  tendencies  of  Christianity  in  the  Roman 
Period  with  SS.  Augustine,  Basil  and  Benedict's  "  rules 
of  life,"  including  personal  poverty,  obedience  to  the 
laws  of  God,  chastity,  etc.,  and  excluding  any  material 
considerations  that  would  interfere  with  the  contempla- 
tion of  (iod;  the  whole  pointing  to  a  community  ol 
hit  crests.  Even  in  Feudal  times  there  was  a  soil  "t 
community  in  land,  there  were  landholders  hut  not  land- 
owners; each  landholder  held  of  somebody  higher  in  the 
social  scale,  and  these  ultimately  of  the  King>  i"'- 
Church),  who  held  it  in  trust  for  all  his  subjects. 
Through  the  Middle  Ages  there  were  CommunitK 
the  monastic  orders  of  Dominicans  and  Franciscans; 
the  latter  attacked  not  only  the  wealthy  but  even  the 

11 


H4  THINKING 

Pope  on  the  question  of  the  rights  of  private  ownership 
of  property.  In  1381  John  Ball,  of  Kent,  quoting  an 
earlier  writer,  asked  "  When  Adam  delved  and  Eve 
span,  who  was  then  the  gentleman?  " 

But  before  this  time  these  mediaeval  ideas  of 
communism  were  being  attacked,  for  Aquinas  had  begun 
in  contradistinction  to  others  of  his  order  (Dominican) 
to  defend  private  property;  his  teaching  on  this  point 
may  be  summarised  in  the  sentence  :  "A  distinction  of 
property  is  decidedly  in  accord  with  a  peaceful  social 
life."  With  him  Nature  makes  no  division  of  property, 
common  property  was  sufficient  before  the  Fall  of  man, 
but  the  Fall,  and  the  consequent  wickedness  of  man, 
introduced  the  supremacy  of  might,  which  makes  the 
hope  of  peaceful  intercourse  to  lie  in  agreement  regard- 
ing division  of  property.  Therefore,  in  the  interests  of 
peace  (!)  private  property  is  justified,  notwithstanding 
that  "by  nature  all  things  are  in  common."  Such 
teaching  admits  of  either  view,  and  both  sides  may  quote 
him  in  support,  but,  in  certain  cases,  he  reserves  the 
right  of  God,  expressed  through  the  Church  or  through 
the  State,  to  decide  either  way.  Here  we  have  the 
eternal  rights  of  the  Church,  ultimately  from  God. 

In  law,  as  distinct  from  religion,  the  ethics  of  property 
holding  took  a  different  turn  and  expressed  themselves 
in  antagonism  to  the  supremacy  of  the  Church.  Feudal 
landholding,  from  the  King  downward,  consisted  of  a 
series  of  contracts  between  man  and  man,  and  for  the 
adjustment  of  grievances  there  existed  the  courts  baron 
and  customary,  the  sokes  of  privileged  townships  and 
the  courts  Christian  (clerical  criminal  courts).  There 
were  quarrels  between  King,  Barons  and  Church,  for 
power  in  law,  which  ended  in  the  King's  favour.  Here 
we  have  the  supreme  authority  of  the  King  as  the 
eternal  right.  After  this,  came  reform  movements 
ending  in  constitutional  governments  based  on  the 
eternal  rights  of  the  people  as  being  superior  to  either 
King  or  Church,  so  the  common  good  became  divine, 
but  only  to  the  extent  of  the  middle  class. 

Then  came  the  Industrial  Revolution  about  1760,  with 
a  new  mode  of  production  (the  factory  system),  bringing 


THINKIN<  us 

with  it  a  mosl  shocking  development  of  the  already 
existing  proletariat,  and  in  tin-  early  nineti  titury 

there  began  modern  Utopian  Socialism  both  in  France 
and  in  England,  in  which  the  greater  c(>ntni<')>  ^mnl  was 
demanded  in  the  name  of  the  eternal  principles  of 
humanity;  numerous  "  schemes  "  were  propounded,  and 
numerous  sections  of  the  working  class  are  still  playing 
the  same  game.  In  France,  Saint-Simon  thought  thai 
an  aristocracy  of  ability  should  be  the  rul<  urier 

proposed  the  organisation  of  society  into  small  com- 
munities each  01  four  hundred  families  living  on  a 
square  league  of  land;  Louis  Blanc  worked  for  a  State 
organisation  of  industry  and  Government  workshops; 
I'roudhon  tried  to  introduce  into  political  economy  the 
eternal  principles  of  "  justice  "  and  "  liberty  "  by  means 
of  a  fanciful  arrangement  of  the  method  of  exchange. 
In  England  it  took  the  form  of  Chartism,  based  upon 
the  eternal  rights  of  the  people.  Robert  (  >wen  tried  the 
experiment  oi  industry  run  on  communal  line>.  but  when 
he  attacked  religion  his  socialism  was  called  atheism. 
As  opposed  to  this  there  arose  an  enthusiastic  band  oi 
Christian  socialists  finding  their  inspiration  in  the 
Sermon  on  the  Mount;  they  included  Maurice,  Kin 
and  Ludlow.  There  was  also  the  Anarchist  school  with 
ideas  based  on  the  eternal  and  immutable  laws  ol 
nature,  they  therefore  recognised  no  law  of  man 
man,  nor  any  God;  among  these  maj  be  mentioned 
Stirner,  Bakunine,  and,  later,  though  in  a  small  way. 
Paraf  J  aval,  while  Tolstoy  was  one  of  a  different  type, 
who  denied  the  law  of  man  but  affirmed  the  law  of  I  rod. 
Along  with  the  above,  Ruskin  may  be  taken  as  typifying 
those  who  worship  "  the  beautiful  "  as  one  means 
towards  social  regeneration. 

I  Mi  the  industrial  field  the  proletariat  have  orgai 
in  trade  unions  which  again  e\pre>s  an  abstract  eternal 
justice   in   the   form   oi   "a   fair  day's   wage   for  a   fair 
day's    work";    while    on    the    political    field    the)    have 
organised  political  parties  who  seek  to  apply  "  hlW 
tarian  "     principles     in     government,      or     to     e 
humanitarian    reforms    in    different    aspects    of    social 
life. 


n6  THINKING 

It  will  be  found  that  at  the  root  of  the  activities  of 
all  the  foregoing-,  whether  they  be  Christian  or  anti- 
Christian,  Theists  or  Atheists,  there  exists  a,n  idealist 
philosophy  expressed  in  the  first  case  as  based  upon  the 
eternal  truths  of  God,  and  in  the  second  case  upon 
the  eternal  principles  of  human  love,  or  reason,  from 
which  arise  eternal  justice,  eternal  right,  eternal 
freedom,  equality  and  fraternity  and  many  other  eternal 
sentimentalities.  They  even  go  so  far  as  claiming  to  be 
advanced  in  their  thinking,  while,  as  we  shall  see  in 
Part  II.,  their  idealism  is  all  along  preventing  them  from 
seeing  the  limits  to  practicability. 

In  closing  this  Introduction  to  the  History  of 
Thinking,  if  we  may  dignify  such  a  small  and 
rough  work  with  that  title,  we  may  remember  the 
evolution  of  brains,  the  production  of  religion  and 
mythology  through  ignorance  of  nature;  that  the  Ionian 
philosophers  turned  to  nature  and  found  nothing  but 
change;  later  ones  turned  to  examine  thinking  and 
threw  nature  on  one  side,  thus  casting  out  just  the 
material  needed,  although  as  yet  it  was  too  early  in  the 
economic  development  of  the  world  to  solve  such 
a  problem.  They  thought  they  had  discovered  the 
permanent  principle  in  mind,  but  their  own  logic 
reduced  their  systems  to  scepticism  and  faith.  Faith 
lived  on  for  many  centuries  with  philosophy  as  a  kitchen 
help  until  a  revival  of  logic  led  the  said  kitchen  help 
to  demand  more  and  more  days  "  off,"  and  finally  to 
give  a  couple  of  centuries'  notice  of  leaving.  Philosophy 
ultimately  freed  itself  from  theology  or  nearly  so,  but 
by  that  time  a  new  method  of  investigating  all  sorts  of 
questions  had  sprung  up,  the  inductive,  or  scientific 
method,  that  brought  in  its  train  a  positive  science 
which  likewise  freed  itself  from  philosophy.  In  science, 
men  are  agreed  as  to  the  accuracy  of  the  laws  discovered 
after  they  have  passed  the  experimental  stage,  and  by 
means  of  those  laws  can  predict  results  (though  it  must 
be  remembered  that  changing  conditions  bring  new 
laws).  But,  notwithstanding  the  successes  of  science 
in  fields  other  than  mental,  philosophy  imagined 
thought  was  produced  by  pure  neason,  though  no  two 


THINKING  ir7 

philosophers  could  evi  r  agree,  and  they  have  rem 

in  that  unscientific  State  to  this  day.     Meanwhile,   Kant 

turned  his  attention  to  examining  reason.  From  hi> 
time  materialism  and  idealism  became  more  decidedly 
separated  but  ultimately  got   reconciled  by   I 

though  towards  the  end  of  the  nineteenth  century  the 
cry  "  Back  to  Kant  "  had  been  raised  as  a  iralve 

against  the  rising  materialism.  Dietzgen,  for  the  first 
time  in  the  history  of  the  world,  made  thinking  into  a 

science,  and  consequently  philosophy,  as  such,  comes  to 
an  end  except  for  some  mystic  rags  with  which  a  few 
grown-up  children  love  to  play. 

The  new  materialism  of  the  Marxian  brand  is  rapidly 
influencing  both  the  political  and  industrial  wing 
the  working  class  movement.  The  capitalist  class,  in 
mortal  dread  at  losing  its  grip  of  "eternal"  realities, 
no  longer  cries  "  Back  to  Kant,"  if  it  must  recognise  a 
doctrine  of  change,  then,  hurry  along  to  Bergson,  th<* 
mystic,  whose  only  reality  is  a  changing  "time." 
The  workers  will  not  be  held  down  by  religion; 
patriotism  is  no  longer  a  trustworthy  tag,  its  gorgeous 
exterior  having  become  somewhat  tarnished  through  the 
war;  so,  if  our  masters,  as  represented  in  their  university 
teachers,  could  only  get  us  mystified  with  Bergson,  their 
"great  man  theory,"  namely,  that  social  progn 
due  to  the  thinking  of  the  "great"  men.  would,  they 
think,  receive  another  lease  of  life. 

While  the  practical  fight  lies  between  the  forcefully- 
defended  rights  of  private  property  on  the  one  hand, 
and  the  forceful  abolition  of  slavery  on  the  other,  the 
theoretical  tight  lies  between  the  remains  of  philosophy, 
a  false  economics  and  a  so-called  impartial  history  on 
the  capitalists'  side,  as  against  a  scientific  method  of 
thinking,  a  science  of  economics  rind  a  history  alive  with 
class  struggles  on  the  workers'  side.  We  now  leave  the 
history  OI  thinking  and  pass  to  a  short  exposition  of 
its  science. 


PART  II 

LOGIC,    OR   THE   SCIENCE   OF 
UNDERSTANDING 


PART    I! 
Logic,  or  the  Science  of   Understanding 

CHAPTER  IX 

Logic  applied  to  the  General  Nature  of   Thought  (Mind) 
and  of  Things  (Matter) 

From  the  time  when  the  (Greeks  turned  away  from 
nature  and  took  to  examining  mind,  down  to  the 
present,  there  have  been  two  main  streams  of 
philosophic  thought  which  in  their  passage  have  not 
always  been  clear  and  distinct  from  each  other,  nor 
has  even  their  general  nature  been  interpreted  in  the 
same  way  at  all  times ;  these  lines  of  thought  are  idealism 
and  materialism.  After  Descartes  they  became  more 
clearly  distinguished,  and  still  more  so  after  Kant. 

Both  materialists  and  idealists  take  existence  as  a 
fact;  the  materialist  (old  school)  says  the  nature  of  this 
existence  is  ponderable  matter  (the  later  ones,  such  as 
Sir  Oliver  Lod.^e.  have  etherialised  it  hut  still  regard  it 
as  physical),  though  he  does  not  deny  the  phenomena 
of  mind;  he  conceives  of  it  as  some  sort  of  emanation 
from  matter,  but  which  has  no  existence  in  its  own 
right.  On  the  other  hand,  the  idealist  says  the  nature 
of  existence  is  mental,  though  he  does  not  deny  the 
phenomena  of  matter,  but  conceives  of  it  as  an  illusion 
of  mind.  It  will  be  seen  that  each  admits  the  phenomena 
of  the  other  and  tries  to  interpret  it  in  terms  of  his  own 
particular  fancy;  each  can  prove  to  his  own  satisfaction 
that  the  other  is  wrong,  though  each  fails  to  prove  t<> 
his  opponent's  satisfaction  that  he  himself  is  right 


122  THINKING 

Now  it  must  be  remembered  that  the  terms  "  mind" 
and  "matter"  are  merely  names  which  enable  us  to 
distinguish  between  two  different  things,  but,  since  the 
names  are  not  the  things,  it  does  not  follow  that 
because  we  use  two  names  there  are  two  completely 
separate  and  distinct  things,  so  different  that  they  have 
nothing  in  common,  the  two  may  be  just  two  parts  of 
one  thing  and  only  mentally  separated.  As  we  go  on  we 
shall  see  that  all  the  philosophic  word-spinning  arises 
from  the  use  of  a  rigid  logic  which  first  makes  mental 
distinctions,  gives  names  to  the  parts,  and  then  treats 
the  parts  as  being  distinct  and  separate,  whereas  in 
reality  they  are  not  so ;  it  was  in  this  way  that  the  old 
philosophers  first  started  with  unity  (the  universe)  and 
then  instinctively  separated  it  into  mind  and  matter 
without  being  fully  conscious  of  what  they  had  done, 
since  when  their  philosophic  descendants  have  been 
staring  at  mind. in  one  hand  and  matter  in  the  other, 
wondering  which  part  constitutes  both  parts. 

Before  passing  on  to  study  the  newer  logic,  which 
treats  of  thinking  in  relation  to  a  constantly-changing 
universe,  it  may  be  as  well  to  give  some  of  the  general 
laws  of  this  rigid  logic  for  purposes  of  comparison. 
First,  there  is  the  law  of  identity,  by  which  we  say 
A  is  A;  second,  the  law  of  contradiction  which  says  that 
A  is  not  B;  and  third,  the  law  of  the  excluded  third 
which  says  that  A  is  not  part  of  B.  According  to  the 
first  of  these  rules,  a  thing  is  what  it  is;  according  to 
the  second,  no  thing  is  what  it  is  not;  and,  according  to 
the  third,  no  thing  is  part  of  what  it  Is  not.  As 
examples :  — 

A  square  is  a  square,  a  square  is  not  a  circle,  nor  is  a 
square  part  of  a  circle. 

A  straight  line  is  straight,  it  is  not  crooked,  nor  is  it 
partly  crooked. 

A  moving  thing  is  in  motion,  it  is  not  still,  nor  is  it 
partly  still. 

Land  is  land,  land  is  not  water,  nor  is  it  partly  water. 

A  door  that  is  shut  is  shut,  it  is  not  open,  nor  is  it 
partly  open. 

In  our  everyday  business  we  all  employ  this  sort  of 


THINKING 

logic,  nor  could  we  manage  very  well  without  it, 
neverthele  it  needs  supplementing  by  the  dialectic 
method   which   shows   that   all   things   arc   constantly 

flowing  into  other  things,  and  consequently  that  all  I 
statements,  such  as  the  foregoing,  can  he  tine  only 

within  certain  well-defined  limits,  anil  are  never  wholly 

true;  and  which  shows,  furthermore,  that  unless  the 
limits  of  a  question  are  clearly  defined,  no  statement 
regarding  it  can  have  a>>\<  meaning,  because  no  relation 
si  lip  hetween  the  implied  fact  and  the  statement  has  been 
established  :  tin-,  in  working  class  language,  moan-  "  lei 
us  know  what  we  are  talking  about,  otherwise  talking  i- 
no  good."  As  an  example,  take  the  statemenl  "  a  door 
that  is  open  is  not  shut  ";  while  this  looks  like  common- 
sense,  in  reality  it  is  not  sense  at  all  unless  we 
the  purpose  in  view,  for,  assuming  a  door  to  be  open  one 
inch,  it  would  he  open  for  the  purpose  of  letting  in  noise 
or  a  draught,  hut  it  would  not  he  open  for  allowing  a 
person  to  pass,  so  accordingly  the  truth  of  the  statement 
will  vary  as  the  purpose  to  be  realised  varies.  As 
another  example,  suppose  it  be  said  that  "  right  i- 
right,  right  cannot  be  wrong,"  this  statement  has  no 
meaning  at  all  unless  we  connect  ft  with  some  definite 
purpose,  when  we  very  quickly  discover  that  any 
particular  statement  might  be  right  in  relation  to  some 
purpose  but  wrong  in  relation  to  others. 

Logic,  it  need  hardly  be  said,  is  to  enable  us  to  make 
distinctions  between  different  things  so  that  we  may 
find  our  way  about  in  the  mental  world  without  making 
mistake^.  But  to  be  any  good,  the  work  of  distinguish- 
ing must  obviously  start  from  some  point  about  which 
nobody  can  quarrel,  something  that  is  certain;  and  the 
rock-bottom  fact  from  which  nobody  can  get  away  is 
plainly  that  of  existence,  for  it  is  clearly  impossible  to 
argue  about  that  which  does  not  exist,  and  since 
"  existence  "  includes  everything,  existence,  here, 
means  the  same  thing  that  we  call  Universe,  or 
Being  or  Nature.  People  who  think  of  a  Creator 
outside  the  universe  are  attempting  to  imagine 
a  universe  that  is  not  a  universe.  So  the  urn 
exists,    and    is    the    only    thing    that    exists.      t/onse- 


124  THINKING 

quently,  the  thing  we  call  mind  must  be  a  part 
of  it,  and  the  thing  we  call  matter  must  be  another 
part  of  it,  they  differ,  of  course,  otherwise  we  should  not 
require  a  different  name  for  each;  and  since  mind  or 
understanding  is  busily  engaged  in  understanding  both 
itself  and  as  much  of  the  remainder  as  it  can  get  at, 
there  is  evidently  a  relation  between  the  understanding 
which  knows  and  the  object  that  is  known,  even  when 
the  understanding  is  concerned  with  itself.  Our  present 
work  is  to  study  this  relationship,  to  trace  out  its 
connections  and  limitations,  and  our  starting  point  is 
the  whole  universe,  the  only  single  thing,  the  only 
absolutely  true  unit. 

A  unit  is,  of  course,  capable  of  being  divided  into  an 
infinite  number  of  parts  after  the  manner  represented 
in  Fig.  2,  which  shows  that  while  one-sixteenth  is  not 
another  sixteenth  yet  they  are  both  parts  of  one-eighth, 
two-eights  are  parts  of  one-quarter,  and  similarly  with 
all  the  rest. 

Fig.  2.     The  Universe. 
1 


i  i 

4~  4 


11       11       11       11       11       1111       11 
TS   Tff    T6    1^    Ttf   TS    15    16     TS    TS    T~5   Tt    T*   T*     TT    T6 

For  certain  purposes,  any  of  these  fractional  parts 
may  be  taken  as  a  unit;  for  example,  an  eighth,  when 
considered  as  a  unit,  may  be  split  into  two  halves  (not 
sixteenths),  but  we  must  never  forget  that  this  is  merely 
a  mental  convenience  because  the  only  real  unit  is  the 
universe.  Therefore,  we  may  start  anywhere,  call  our 
particular  point  a  unit  and  break  it  down  into  its  parts, 
or  we  may  take  a  given  number  of  parts  and  with  them 
construct  a  unit.  The  contradiction  that  exists  when  we 
say  that  one  half  is  not  the  other  half  (A  is  not  B)  is 
reconciled  as  soon  as  we  consider  them  joined  together 


THINK  IXC 

in  one  unit ;  the  idea  of  contradiction  is.  therefore,  a 
product  of  our  understanding  which  is  constantly  either 
splitting  up  units  or  constructing  them  in  classifying  the 

different  parts  of  the  universe. 

\'o\v  tin's  is  very  easy  to  see  when  put  in  the  form  ol 

figures,  and  although  the  essential  character  of  under- 
standing is  number,  yet,  when  we  come  to  apply  it  to 
the  universe  or  to  any  part  of  it,  the  idea  is  so  strange 

that  most  folks  never  realise  that  it  is  what  human 
brains  are  doing  all  along,  and  through  the  lack  of  a 
knowledge  of  this  general  principle  of  thinking  they 
necessarily  perform  their  thinking  instinctively  instead 
of  scientifically,  and  consequently  make  far  more 
mistakes  than  they  would  if  they  knew  the  scientific 
principle  and  consciously  applied  it. 

To  understand  the  universe  the  understanding  divides 
it  into  a  great  number  of  parts,  that  is.  it  classifies  or 
separates  the  parts  and  gives  them  names  to  distinguish 
one  from  the  other,  though  in  reality  these  parts  do  in  it 
exi>t  separately;  for  example,  the  universe,  though  it  is 
in  itself  one  whole,  may  be  divided  mentally  into  solar 
systems,  a  solar  system  may  be  divided  into  a  central 
sun  and  several  planets  of  which  the  earth  is  one,  and 
the  earth  may  be  divided  into  land  and  water,  and  so  on 
to  infinity.  For  ordinary  purposes  it  would  be  false  to 
say  that  land  and  water  are  the  same  thing,  it  would 
be  a  contradiction;  nevertheless,  this  contradiction, 
which  is  a  product  of  the  understanding,  disappears  if 
we  say  that  land  and  water  are  both  parts  of  the  earth, 
for  if  one  is  a  part  of  the  earth  and  the  other  equally  so, 
then,  considered  as  farts  of  the  earth,  each  is  the  same 
as  the  other.  From  this  it  follows  that  a  thing  can  he 
the  same  as  another  thing  and  at  the  same  time  be 
different  from  it,  and  all  this  depends  upon  the  way  we 
look  at  any  given  problem,  in  other  word-,  depends  upon 
the  purpose  we  nave  in  view;  whereas  old-style  logic 
would  say  "  land  is  land,  land  is  not  water,  nor  does  \\ 
partake  of  the  nature  of  water  in  any  way,"  and,  there 
fore,  that  "  land  is  not  water  "  is  a  true  statement — true 
for  all  time;  though  in  the  next  argument  it  might  seek 
to  prove  that  England  is  the  best  of  all  lands,  forgetting 


126  THINKING 

that  England  contains  many  lakes,  rivers,  reservoirs, 
etc. 

Very  well,  let  us  with  the  help  of  the  newer  logic 
turn  to  the  question  of  mind  and  matter!  The 
idealist  insists  on  mind  as  the  dominant  reality,  the  old 
materialist  looks  at  the  question  the  other  way  about 
and  pins  his  faith  to  ponderable  matter.  Contrary  to 
each  of  these  schools,  we  start  from  the  existence  of  a 
real  universe  which  our  understanding  may  divide  in 
hundreds  of  ways  according  to  its  particular  problem  at 
any  given  moment,  and  since  our  problem  just  now  is 
that  of  the  understanding  itself,  then  for  the  purposes 
of  this  discussion  we  divide  the  universe  into  mind  and 
matter,  or,  to  be  more  correct,  thought  and  things. 

But  what  shall  we  call  the  universe  itself?  Is  it  a 
material  or  physical  or  real  universe?  Well,  it  is 
certainly  a  real  universe,  for  we  cannot  deny  that  even 
thought  is  real  thought;  thought  is  not  nothing  at  all, 
consequently  thought,  being  part  of  the  universe,  it 
must  possess  the  same  universal  nature  as  is  possessed 
by  everything  else,  whatever  that  should  be.  "  But," 
the  reader  may  say,  "  thought  is  so  different  from  a 
lump  of  coal,  surely  it  is  not  suggested  that  they  have 
the  same  nature"?  "And,"  one  might  ask  in  return, 
"  are  not  wireless  radiations  different  from  coal  and  yet 
both  are  described  as  physical"?  "True  enough,  but 
still,  thought  is  different  even  from  '  wireless,'  thought 
has  an  intellectual  character  that  no  other  thing  has." 
"Just  so;  but  if  every  other  thing  had  the  same 
character  there  would  be  no  object  in  making  the 
distinction;  it  is  precisely  because  thought  has  a  special 
character  of  its  own,  we  give  it  a  special  name."  We 
give  wireless  radiations  their  special  name  to  distinguish 
them  from  coal  and  all  other  things.  A  brain  is  different 
from  wireless  instruments  or  our  legs,  so  why  should 
we  be  surprised  because  all  these  things  exhibit  different 
functions  ?  It  is  not  marvellous  that  brains  should  think, 
but  it  would  be  exceedingly  so  if  they  did  not.  We  do 
not  walk  on  our  brains  and  think  with  our  legs.  The 
peculiar  function  of  brains  is  to  think,  of  legs  to  walk, 
and   of  wireless   instruments   to   transmit  and   receive 


THINKING  127 

electrical  radiations,  .so  why  should  we  expect  anything 
different,  <>r  why  should  we  single  out  thought  (called 
mind)  as  having  a  nature  so  special  and  peculiar  a-^  to 

separate  it  entirely  from  all  the  rest  of  the  universe? 
Thinking  is  the  function  of  a  physical  brain,  just  like 
walking  is  a  function  of  physical  legs,  and  even  though 
the  conversion  of  sense  stimuli  into  thought  is  not 
understood,  this  does  not  prove  that  thought  is  not 
physical,  if  it  did,  then,  by  comparison,  we  should  have 
to  say  that  electricity  is  not  physical  because  we  do  not 
understand  the  nature  of  the  conversion  of  magnetism 
into  electricity.  Even  so,  does  it  follow  that  if 
"  wireless  "  and  thought  are  physical  that  they  are  also 
material?  Well,  that  depends  upon  how  the  reader 
mentally  divides  the  universe.  If  he  divides  it  into 
the  ponderable,  such  as  coal,  iron,  pencils,  etc.,  and  the 
imponderable,  such  as  thought,  light,  sound,  electricity, 
ether  or  gravity,  and  then  decides  to  describe  the 
ponderable  as  material  and  the  imponderable  as 
immaterial,  that  is  his  own  affair,  but  please  let  him 
remember  he  did  it  himself,  it  is  not  so  in  nature  merely 
because  he  arranged  his  classification  that  way,  and  to 
describe  thought  as  psychical  does  not  alter  its  nature. 
Had  we  all  along  been" in  the  habit  of  calling  all  things 
material  the  present  question  would  not  have  arisen. 
So.  if  we  call  thought  material  it  is  in  order  to  bring  its 
description  (its  nature  is  already  in  line)  into  line  with 
that  of  the  rest  of  what  most  people,  ourselves  included, 
call  the  material  universe;  and  the  term  "  material  "is 
as  good  as  any  we  can  find,  for  old-style  logic  made  its 
distinction  between  mind  and  matter  but  left  us  without 
a  term  that  would  include  both;  therefore,  in  discussing 
the  relation  that  exists  between  the  different  pan--  .'I 
the  universe  we  must  bear  in  mind  that  thought  is  a 
material  part  just  like  any  other. 

I  laving  seen  that  the  universe  can  be  mentally  divided 
into  an  infinite  number  of  parts,  as  suggested  in  Fig.  3. 
all  of  which  have  their  special  natures  and  special  names 
to  distinguish  them  from  one  another,  in  addition  to 
their  general  material  nature  and  corresponding  name, 
our  progress  will  consist  in  noting  how  these  different 


128  THINKING 

parts  are  related  to  each  other.  All  parts  enter  into 
relations  with  other  parts,  though  each  part,  excepting 
thought,   has   a  limited  range   of  relationships   which 


Fig.  3.     Parts  of  Material  Universe. 

depends  upon  its  particular  constitution;  thought  alone 
is  capable  of  entering  into  relation  with  every  other  part. 
Take,  for  example,  vinegar  and  iron.  If  we  pour 
vinegar  on  iron  it  dissolves  the  iron  and  forms  rust, 
but  this  rust  is  due  as  much  to  the  iron  as  to  the  vinegar, 
therefore,  to  say  that  vinegar  is  a  solvent  is  wrong  if 
considered  by  itself,  because  vinegar  is  not  a  solvent 
unless  taken  in  relation  to  something  that  dissolves  by 
contact  with  it.  Or,  to  say  that  vinegar  is  an  acid  is 
wrong,  it  is  an  acid  when  in  contact  with  somebody's 
tongue  but  not  in  those  relationships  where  acidity  is 
not  produced.  If  we  say  that  water  is  liquid,  we  mean  it 
is  liquid  in  relation  to  certain  temperatures;  at  other 
temperatures  it  becomes  ice  or  steam,  its  liquid  state 


THINKING  129 

is)  therefore,  the  producl  of  itself  taken  in  conjun 
with  some  other  part  or  parts  of  the  universe,  such  as 
heat  or  gravity.    From  these  examples  we  see  that  no 
one  thing  is  anything  at  all  by  itself,  any  one  part  of 

the  universe  is  what  it  is  only  because  of  its  relation 
with  something  else,  therefore  every  so-called  "  single" 
thing  is  a  product  of  many  things,  it  is  a  mental  unit 
made  up  of  fractions ;  for  example,  a  piece  of  iron  cannot 
mceived  without  its  shape,  weight,  colour,  heat, 
etc.,  once  change  the  relationships  and  the  thing 
changes,  and  when  it  has  changed  so  much  that  its 
previous  general  nature  is  changed  it  requires  a  different 
name.  As  an  instance,  imagine  the  general  character  of 
dust  along  a  road;  after  very  light  rain  we  should  say 
the  dust  was  laid;  the  nature  of  the  dust  would  be 
changed,  though,  not  so  much  as  to  make  it  require 
another  name,  for  we  should  still  call  it  dust,  but  after 
heavy  rain  its  nature  would  be  changed  to  such  an  extent 
that  it  would  have  acquired  a  different  general  character 
and  we  should  have  to  describe  it  as  mud.  Giving  names, 
however,  presupposes  that  we  have  thought  about 
something,  in  fact,  we  cannot  imagine  anything  existing 
that  has  not  been  thought  about,  for  in  the  very  act 
of  attempting  to  do  so  we  are  already  thinking  about 
it,  so  this  brings  US  to  consider  the  relation  between 
thought  and  everything  with  which  it  comes  into  contact. 

Thought— Its  General  Character.  A  thought  like 
any  other  part  of  existence,  is  made  up  of  matiy 
parts.  It  arises  from  the  relation  between  a  thinking 
brain  (and  a  brain  that  does  not  think  loses  its 
character  and  ceases  to  be  what  we  mean  when  we 
speak  of  a  brain)  and  some  object  about  which  the  brain 
thinks.  This  thought,  just  like  the  rust,  is  as  much  a 
product  of  the  object  as  of  the  thinking,  for  it  is  clear 
there  never  was  a  brain  that  could  think  about  nothing. 
And  again,  it  will  be  clear  that  there  must  be  some 
medium  by  which  the  relation  between  brain  and  object 
is  established.  This  medium  is  composed  of  OUT  five 
senses  (and  possibly  a  sixth  in  the  course  of  being 
evolved) — seeing,  hearing,  smelling,  feeling  and  tasting. 

1 


130  THINKING 

These  senses  acquaint  us  with  the  various  parts  of 
objects,  for  any  single  object,  as  already  stated,  is  made 
up  of  many  parts,  such  as  shape,  weight,  colour,  heat, 
etc.  Take,  for  illustration,  an  apple;  our  sense  of  sight 
perceives  its  roundness  and  colour,  when  we  chew  it 
our  sense  of  hearing  perceives  a  sound,  it  gives  off  a 
characteristic  odour  perceived  by  our  sense  of  smell,  by 
our  sense  of  touch  or  feeling  we  perceive  that  it  has 
weight,  shape,  solidity,  coolness,  etc.,  and  our  sense  of 
taste  acquaints  us  with  its  specific  flavour.  Not  one  of 
these  sense  perceptions  is  sufficient  by  itself,  nor,  indeed, 
would  they  all,  taken  together,  give  us  a  mind  picture 
of  the  apple,  without  a  brain  which,  so  to  speak,  adds 
them  together.  The  peculiar  function  of  the  brain  is 
to  combine  or  to  generalise  all  these  sense  perceptions 
into  one  idea  to  which  it  gives  the  name  "  apple  "  for 
the  purpose  of  distinguishing  that  particular  combination 
of  parts  from  other  and  different  combinations. 
If  we  had  another  sense  capable  of  being  applied 
we  should  get  our  idea  extended  accordingly,  just  as  in 
the  reverse  case  our  idea  would  be  narrowed,  as,  for 
example,  in  the  case  of  a  blind  person  who  has  no  sense 
of  colour;  from  this  it  will  be  seen  that  a  brain  cannot 
replace  any  of  the  senses,  brain  and  senses  having  each 
their  special  functions  to  perform.  It  is  important  also 
to  remember  that  although  thinking  and  thought  occur 
at  the  same  time,  they  are  not  the  same  things.  Thought 
is  a  result,  thinking  is  the  work  of  producing  that  result, 
thinking,  however,  is  impossible  without  some  object  to 
think  about,  so  the  whole  thing  is  a  sort  of  trinity  that 
might  be  represented  by  a  triangle  as  in  Fig.  4. 

Since  it  is  the  peculiar  function  of  the  brain  to 
generalise  sense  perceptions  into  ideas,  and  since  our 
ideas  constitute  knowledge,  it  will  be  clear  that  under- 
standing consists  solely  of  our  ability  to  combine 
different  parts  of  the  universe  under  one  head  or  name, 
whereby  we  may  know  it  from  something  else;  or, 
speaking  in  terms  of  number,  our  ability  to  combine 
four-sixteenths  into  one-quarter,  two-eighths  into  a 
quarter,  and  so  on;  or,  again,  to  use  a  more  practical 
illustration,  we  may  take  apples,  oranges  and  bananas, 


THINK  IXC. 


i  [1 


etc.,  and  give  them  the  general  pame  <>f  fruit;  .-* <  1  <  1  to 
these,    vegetable  .    bread,    meat,    drink  our 

extended    generalisation    becomes    food;    add,    a 


Cork.  I  • 

existence 


Fig.  4.      Brain  Work. 

clothes,  fuel,  furniture,  books,  houses,  we  might  call 
these,  altogether,  the  necessaries  of  life.  No  matter 
how  large  or  how  small,  every  single  idea  is  made  up 
of  parts;  even  the  idea  of  an  atom  contains  parts  such 
as  shape,  weight,  chemical  peculiarity,  size,  etc. 

It  is  possible  to  mentally  generalise  or  combine  any 
number  of  parts  up  to  the  limit  of  the  whole  umV 
whether  they  arc  actually  combined  in  that  way  or  not 
outside  the  head,  as,  for  example,  when  an  artist 
conceives  a  fanciful  picture,  or  a  novelist  writes  an 
extravagant  novel,  or  when,  as  in  a  nightmare,  the  I  >e\  il 

with  cloven  hoofs  and  a  red  hot  pitchfork  carried  us  off 

to  Hell,  or  when  we  imagine  a  Government  that  acts 

impartially  to  everybody,  or  when  somebody  tells  the 


132  THINKING 

workers  that  "a  better  spirit"  between  masters  and 
men  will  solve  economic  troubles  to  all  peoples'  satis- 
faction. It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  these  fancies  are 
all  truly  parts  of  the  universe,  that  is,  they  are  real 
fancies,  even  mistakes  and  lies  are  real  mistakes  and 
true  lies;  we  mean  by  this  that  they  have  a  real  existence, 
for  thought,  as  we  have  said,  is  real;  it  would  be  a  funny 
contradiction  to  speak  of  "  imaginary  "  thought.  What, 
then,  is  the  difference  between  truth  and  error  ?  This 
question  brings  us  to  consider  the  other  part  of  brain 
activity. 

We  have  hitherto  considered  the  brain  as  a  generalising 
instrument,  wherein  it  combines  sense  perceptions  into 
an  abstract  idea  or  unit.  But  it  also  works  the  other  way ; 
it  analyses  an  idea  by  breaking  it  down  into  its  parts. 
We  have  seen  that  every  single  idea  is  composed  of 
parts  which  by  division  run  to  infinity,  and  which  by 
addition  run  into  one  another  up  to  the  limit  of  the 
universe;  this  for  us  is  also  infinity.  We  have  further 
seen  that  no  idea  is  possible  without  both  a  brain  and 
some  object,  connected  by  the  senses.  Now  where  the 
idea  or  abstract  picture  in  the  mind  corresponds  with 
some  object  outside  the  mind  (any  part  of  existence 
whatsoever,  including  thought,  may  be  the  object  of 
thought),  it  will  be  clear  that  such  a  picture  will  be  a 
true  picture,  but  if  the  opposite  is  the  case  it  will  be 
false.  By  way  of  illustration,  suppose  a  novelist  wrote 
a  tale  describing  a  foreign  tribe  of  human  beings  who 
lived  by  eating  coal ;  this  tale  would  be  a  true  tale  in  so 
far  as  it  itself  exists  as  a  tale,  but  it  would  be  false  in 
so  far  as  coal  outside  the  mind  is  not  a  food,  and,  there- 
fore, to  generalise  coal  under  the  name  of  food  would 
be  an  error  because  it  would  lack  that  correspondence 
between  abstract  mind  picture  and  outside  objective 
existence  which  is  necessary  for  truth;  it  would  be  like 
trying  to  make  three-sixteenths  into  one-eight.  Truth, 
then,  evidently  consists  of  those  mental  or  subjective 
generalisations  which  correspond  with  objective  reality, 
and  just  as  objective  reality  changes,  so  does  truth 
change;  for  example,  we  have  just  said  that  coal  is  not 
a  food,  but  suppose  that  in  the  future  some  chemist 


THINKING  133 

discovered  a  way  of  cooking  coal  so  that  it  could  be 

eaten,    and    the    energy    which    is    now    latent    in    it    he 

assimilated  by  the  human  body,  such  changed  conditions 
would  bring  it  about  that  what  is  now  error  would  then 
be  true,  and  onr  unit  (food)  would  be  enlarged  to 
accommodate  the  new  factor.  Therefore,  since  all  ideas 
are  built  up  as  mind  pictures  from  sense  perception-,  ot 
material  objects,  tangible  and  intangible,  to  test  an  idea 
for  truth,  we  must  break  it  down  into  its  parts,  then 
look  outside  the  mind  to  see  if  the  previous  mental 
combination  is  possible  as  an  outside  objective  com- 
bination; if  it  is,  the  idea  is  true;  if  not,  it  is  untrue.  By 
now  it  should  almost  go  without  saying  that  such 
generalisations  as  sea  serpents,  mermaids,  twodieaded 
donkeys,  angels,  and  happy  hunting  grounds,  in  fact, 
all  the  ghosts  of  heaven  and  earth,  holy  and  unholy,  are 
those  whose  parts  are  abstract  mind  pictures  taken  from 
concrete  parts  of  nature  outside  the  mind  and  added 
together  inside  the  mind;  although  the  parts  exist 
outside  the  mind,  the  combination  docs  not,  conse- 
quently they  are  errors,  for  the  reason  that  too  many 
factors  have  been  combined  to  agree  with  objective 
reality. 

Still,  the  matter  is  not  ended,  for  even  though  we 
confine  our  attention  to  real  objective  combinations, 
another  difficulty  arises,  because  if  all  things  run  into 
one  another  how  shall  we  know  when  a  mind  picture 
corresponds  with  reality,  where  shall  we  look,  where 
shall  we  start  with  our  generalising,  or  where  shall  we 
stop?  There  is  only  one  thing  possible,  and  that  i-  to 
seleet  or  mentally  mark  off  that  fart  of  the  universe  the 
truth  of  which  is  to  he  sought  ("  let  us  know  what  we 
are  talking  about  "),  and  then  abstract  its  general 
character.  Our  selected  number  of  parts  we  may 
imagine  to  thin  out  at  each  end  where  the  general 
character  is  merging  or  flowing  into  other  things  with 
different  names;  these  thin  ends  are  the  special  parts, 
as  compared  with  the  general  body,  and  if  we  -peak  of 
them  as  being  typical  of  the  general  body,  we  should  he 
wrong,  we  should  be  taking  too  few  factors  to  agree 
with  the  general  objective  reality;  consequently  these 


134  THINKING 

special  parts  must  be  ignored,  they  do  not  constitute  the 
truth  concerning  that  particular  number  of  parts 
because  they  do  not  express  its  general  character,  so 
truth  is,  accordingly,  that  which  is  general  within  a 
clearly  denned  part  of  existence;  this  is  true  logic, 
because  it  provides  for  a  continual  readjustment  of  our 
abstract  mind  pictures,  to  correspond  with  a  continually 
changing  objective  reality.  As  a  simple  example  it 
would  be  true  to  describe  apples  and  bananas  as  fruit, 
but  false  to  describe  them  simply  as  food  without  any 
qualification,  notwithstanding  that  fruit  is  a  food;  this 
would  be  false  for  the  simple  reason  that  the  term 
"  food  "  denotes  something  having  a  general  nature 
possessed  by  many  other  things  as  well  as  fruit,  so  to 
say  that  fruit  constitutes  food  would  be  making  the 
special  element  into  the  general.  Again,  food  is  not  the 
necessaries  of  life,  it  is  only  one  of  them;  the 
"  necessaries  of  life  "  constitutes  a  wider  unit  or 
generalisation,  because  its  common  or  general  nature  is 
possessed  by  other  things  as  well  as  food.  Truth,  then, 
is  any  statement  that  accurately  expresses  the  general  or 
common  features  of  a  certain  definite  number  of  parts 
and,  of  course,  is  relative  to  those  parts,  vary  the 
number  of  parts  and  the  common  nature  will  vary,  and 
truth  likewise. 

Though  this  logic  is  easy  in  theory,  it  is  not  always 
easy  in  practice,  so  from  this  point  onwards  we  will 
,-tpply  it  to  a  series  of  questions  by  way  of  illustration, 
remembering  that  no  idea  is  possible  without  sense 
perception,  and  therefore  every  idea  may  be  understood 
by  tracing  it  to  its  sense  perceived  source. 

Mind.  The  brain,  of  course,  is  not  the  mind, 
it  is  the  seat  of  the  mind ;  but  since  the  word 
"  mind  "  certainly  stands  for  an  idea  of  something, 
there  arises  the  question,  what  is  this  "  something," 
"or  what  is  the  mind  itself?  Let  us  apply  our 
logic.  Since  every  single  idea  is  built  up  of  parts, 
nnd  is  expressed  by  a  name,  if  we  analyse  the 
idea  represented  by  its  name  we  shall  get  at  the  nature 
of  the  thing  for  which  the  name  stands,  therefore,  to 


THINKING  135 

understand  the  mind,  we  must  examine  its  parts.  When 
we  speak  of  mental  work  we  think  of  a  vast  number  of 
ideas,  memories,  reflections,  judgments,  acts  of  the  will. 
etc..  in  short,  our  general  reasoning.  And  we  think  of 
the  mind  as  a  being  of  some  shadowy  kind  that  performs 
all  the  reasoning.  However,  if  we  break  down  the  idea 
of  mind  into  its  parts,  we  find  that  memories  are  ideas, 
reflections  are  ideas,  judgments  are  ideas,  in  fact,  all 
our  reasoning  is  composed  of  ideas,  the  mind,  then, 
consists  of  a  bundle  of  ideas  which  are,  as  we  know, 
produced  by  sense  perceptions  (the  stimulus  of  which 
may  last  quite  a  time,  as  in  the  case  of  memory)  being 
generalised  by  our  brains,  so  there  can  be  no  "  reason  " 
or  "  mind  "  that  produces  or  originates  ideas  without 
something  to  think  about,  without  sense  perception-. 
Looked  at  like  this  it  becomes  clear  that  what  we  call 
"  mind  "  is  not  a  shadowy  something  that  we  can  never 
get  at  and  which  thinks  thoughts  entirely  unaided,  but 
on  the  contrary  it  is  the  sum  total  of  all  the  ideas  we 
possess,  and  apart  from  these  ideas  there  is  nothing  at 
all,  for  even  the  idea  of  "  mind  "  must  have  a  basis  of 
sense  perceptions;  it  is  simply  that  the  brain  combines 
all  its  ideas  into  one  generalisation,  that  is,  into  one  unit 
to  which  it  nives  the  name  of  "  mind  ";  so  mind,  then, 
is  nothing  but  generalised  thought.  No  wonder 
scientists  cannot  find  it  with  the  knife  and  the  micro- 
scope; theologians,  of  course,  are  interested  in  not 
looking  for  it. 

Still,  there  is  one  point  that  needs  explaining  ;  if  ideas 
are  impossible  without  sense  perceptions,  how  does  the 
brain  get  the  idea  of  mind,  seeing  that  the  mind  is 
composed  of  ideas  inside  the  head?  Which  of  our 
senses  enables  us  to  become  aware  of  them?  It  is  the 
sense  of  feeling,  for  when  we  are  thinking,  we  feci  that 
zve  arc  thinking,  a  fact  which  everyone  may  test;  for 
example,  we  feel  sorry,  or  glad,  or  we  feel  we  could  hit 
certain  people  at  times.  In  this  case  the  sense  of  feeling 
presents  a.  series  of  perceptions  of  thoughts  to  the 
brain,  and  the  brain  in  its  functioning  generalises  them 
into  the  one  idea  of  "  mind."  Our  logic  thus  solves  the 
twenty-six-centuries-old  problem  of  "  mind  "  and  "  pure 


136  THINKING 

reason  " ;   let   us   next    see   what    it   can   do   with   the 
corresponding  problem  of  matter  or  things. 

Matter — Its  General  Nature.  What  is  matter?  Let 
us  apply  our  logic  in  just  the  same  way  as  when 
examining  mind.  If  every  idea  is  built  up  of 
parts,  we  ask  what  are  the  parts  constituting  the 
idea  of  matter?  Take  for  example  a  table.  Kant 
would  tell  us  that  all  we  know  about  the  table  is 
composed  of  its  appearances,  but  that  in  addition 
there  must  be  something  behind  the  appearances. 
though  we  never  can  know  it,  a  "thing  in  itself." 
Various  philosopher-scientists  say  the  same  thing  in 
various  ways;  for  instance,  that  light  is  not  the  beautiful 
colour  we  see,  but  an  ethereal  wave  motion  of  which 
we  become  aware  by  noting  its  effects;  or,  that  the 
colour  of  an  object,  or  its  weight,  shape,  etc.,  are  only 
attributes  of  the  object  and  not  the  thing  in  reality. 
They  tell  us  that  not  a  particle  of  matter  is  ever 
destroyed,  that  its  form  is  constantly  changing,  but, 
through  all  the  changes  of  form  the  essential  matter 
remains.  Now,  what  is  this  essential  matter  when 
divested  of  its  attributes  ?  Some  say  we  shall  never 
know,  for  nothing  ever  appears  to  our  senses  but  the 
attributes,  and  these  do  not  constitute  the  essence,  for 
the  essence  or  true  nature  of  matter  is  something  that 
lies  beyond. 

It  is  indeed  perfectly  true  that  our  senses  do  not 
acquaint  us  with  its  true  nature,  but  our  understanding 
(brain  function)  does,  and  when  scientists  say  we  shall 
never  know,  it  can  only  be  because  they  do  not  under- 
stand how  all  understanding  takes  place.  The  true  or 
essential  nature  of  matter  does  not,  as  we  have  said, 
appear  to  the  senses  but  to  our  understanding,  though 
the  parts  of  the  idea  come  to  us  through  the  senses  just 
like  the  parts  of  all  ideas.  Imagine  for  a  moment  what 
would  become  of  the  table  if  we  took  away  one  after  the 
other  all  its  attributes.  When  we  have  taken  away  its 
colour,  solidity,  weight,  shape,  hardness,  grain,  etc., 
there  is  nothing  left,  nothing  at  all;  it  therefore  could 
not  appear  to  our  senses,  and  yet  we  have  the  idea  of  it; 


THINKING  137 

now  how  can  we  have  the  idea  of  a  thing  that  does  not 
exist  ? 

The  brain  firsl  thinks  of  all  kinds  of  objects — water, 
horses,  coal,  etc.,  etc.;  these  objects  have  each  the 
common  attribute  of  being  material,  even  though  they 
cacli  possess  many  different  and  special  attributes  (also 
matt-rial);  the  brain,  then,  separates  the  special 
characteristics  from  the  general]  and  with  these  many 
parts  of  material  generality,  constructs  the  idea  of 
"  essential  matter  "  as  distinct  from  its  attributes.  So, 
only  in  the  light  of  our  logic  does  it  become  clear  to  us 
that  matter,  apart  from  its  attributes,  is  nothing  but  an 
abstracl  generalisation.  Therefore,  in  reality,  matter 
consists  of  the  sum  total  of  its  attributes,  its  general 
nature  is  unceasing  change,  and  there  is  nothing  else 
beyond.  We  see,  then,  that  this  "  essential  matter"  is  a 
creature  of  the  mind;  this  concept  may  perhaps  be  ren- 
dered more  easily  intelligible  if  we  think  for  a  moment 
of  the  impossibility  of  there  being  any  stable  unchanging 
matter  apart  from  its  changing  forms,  without  any 
attributes,  without  any  form.  The  raw  material  of 
material  attributes  is  as  funny  as  imaginary  thought! 

It  will  now  be  clear  that  mind  is  not  a  "  thing  in 
itself"  independent  of  thoughts,  and  which  thinks 
thoughts  or  produces  them  out  of  its  inmost  recesses; 
in  reality,  it  is  the  brain  which  generalises  sense 
perceptions  into  ideas,  and  these  ideas,  taken  altogether, 
constitute  the  mind.  It  will  also  be  clear  that  matter  i> 
not  a  "  thing  in  itself"  independent  of  its  forms,  and 
which  takes  first  one  form,  then  another;  it  is  the  brain 
which  generalises  selected  sense  perceptions  of  material 
attributes  into  the  idea  of  matter,  so  that  in  reality  all 
attributes  taken  together  constitute  matter.  So  mind 
consists  of  the  sum  total  of  thoughts,  and  matter 
consists  of  the  sum  total  of  its  forms;  consequently 
mind  and  matter  considered  as  separate  entities  (things 
existing  by  themselves)  are  nothing  but  mental 
generalisations,  produced  instinctively,  but.  because  the 
understanding  did  not  understand  itself,  it  did  not  know 
how  it  got  them  and  thought  they  represented  definite 
parts  of  objective  reality. 


CHAPTER    X 

Logic  applied  to  Physical  Science 

In  the  last  chapter  we  were  occupied  in  explaining  the 
principles  of  that  logic  which  treats  the  universe  as  a 
thing  in  motion,  in  opposition  to  ordinary  logic  which 
makes  its  distinctions  and  considers  them  as  stationary. 
In  our  treatment  we  dealt  with  the  general  nature  of 
thought  and  of  things,  and  we  saw  that  both  thought 
and  things  were  material  or  physical,  so  that  science  in 
any  line  of  enquiry  must  of  necessity  be  physical  science ; 
nevertheless,  as  all  divisions  of  the  universe  are  made 
by  the  understanding  in  its  desire  for  classification,  we 
now,  for  the  purposes  of  this  chapter,  take  the  liberty 
of  dividing  all  science  into  the  mental  and  the  physical; 
we  therefore  use  the  word  "  physical  "  in  the  sense 
usually  attached  to  it  as  meaning  all  that  is  not  mental 
or  metaphysical;  consequently  we  shall  be  concerned 
with  such  things  as  force,  light,  sound,  matter,  cause, 
effect,  and  so  on.  Since  the  basis  of  the  solution  of 
every  problem,  so  far  as  logic  is  concerned,  lies  in  under- 
standing the  origin  of  all  the  ideas  contained  in  it,  our 
progress  will  consist  in  applying  to  such  things  the 
principles  we  have  already  learned.  It  is  futile  to  say 
that  it  does  not  matter  where  we  get  the  ideas  so  long 
as  we  have  them,  for  the  reason  that  so  long  as  we 
cannot  trace  them  to  their  source  we  cannot  make  any 
scientific  selection,  nor  can  we  understand  how  under- 
standing itself  takes  place. 

Nature.  Take  first  the  idea  of  nature,  since  it  is  the 
basis  of  all  science.   What  is  Nature? 

Remembering  that  every  single  idea  is  produced  by 

138 


THINKING  139 

the  brain  generalising  a  number  of  sense  perceptions, 

and  thus  reducing  them  to  unity,  we  must  attack  the  idea 
of  Nature  by  breaking  it  into  its  parts  to  see  where  we 
gel  it. 

Nature  consi>ts  of  the  sum  total  of  all  the  things  we 
experience  with  the  aid  of  our  senses;  all  these  things 
have  their  special  natures  according  to  their  constitu- 
tion, but  the  understanding  puts  these  specialities  on 
one  side,  it  mentally  takes  the  general  natures  of  all 
things  apart  from  their  special  characters,  and  combines 
them  into  one  abstract  whole,  to  which  it  gives  the  name 
of  Nature,  which  afterwards  is  supposed  to  be  the  parent 
of  the  specialities.  Therefore  it  is  not  our  senses  that 
perceive  "  Nature,"  they  only  perceive  the  various  parts 
separately,  but  with  those  parts  the  understanding 
constructs  the  idea  of  nature  in  general;  it  is  accordingly 
the  understanding  which  perceives  nature  as  a  whole. 
As  a  rule,  when  we  speak  of  Nature  producing  beautiful 
flowers,  healing  wounds,  causing  this  and  that,  or  when, 
as  is  quite  usual,  we  speak  of  "  the  wonders  of  Nature  " 
after  the  manner  of  poets  and  dreamers,  including  not  a 
few  scientists,  who  are  continually  marvelling  about  our 
great  "  mother  nature,"  we  have  a  vague,  indistinct 
notion  of  Nature  being  something  unknowable,  a  kind 
of  universal  directive  agency  which  somehow,  in  a 
transcendental  manner,  causes  all  the  things  we 
experience;  but  with  our  logic  we  see  that  there  is  no 
"  mother  nature  "  apart  from  all  the  things  that  go  to 
construct  her;  so  this  idea  is  just  an  instance  of  the 
understanding  constructing  one  thing  out  of  many 
parts,  or,  as  it  is  often  put,  constructing  unity  out  of 
multiplicity. 

According  to  this  all  things  are  natural,  and  cannot  be 
anything  else:  so  what  do  we  mean  when  we  say  a  thing 
is  unnatural,  has  the  term  no  meaning?  Oh  yes.  We 
do  not  mean  the  thing  has  no  nature  at  all.  It  means 
the  unusual,  or  special,  that  which  is  not  general,  or 
that  to  which  we  are  not  accustomed,  and  which,  there- 
fore, is  not  included  in  our  general  conception  of  what 
we  expect.  So  the  natural  and  the  unnatural  are  simply 
two     mental     divisions     of     those     things     we     have 


140  THINKING 

experienced,  the  one  general,  the  other  special.  For 
example,  it  is  not  usual  for  people  in  England  to  murder 
their  parents  when  they  are  getting  old,  and  if  somebody 
did  we  should  probably  say  it  was  a  most  unnatural 
thing  to  do;  it  is,  of  course,  unusual  or  special.  But  if 
it  were  generally  practised,  as  it  was  among  low  savage 
hunting  tribes,  it  would  be  regarded  as  quite  all  right 
and  the  most  natural  thing  to  do.  To  give  another 
example :  when  exceptionally  dark  clouds  come  over- 
head during  the  daytime,  that  give  the  appearance  of 
night,  it  is  said  to  be  unnatural.  We  therefore  see  the 
unnatural  to  be  merely  the  general  character  of  the 
unusual  or  special,  whereas  the  natural  is  the  general 
character  of  that  which  is  usual,  and  therefore  more 
widely  general. 

Old  style  logic  would  say,  the  natural  is  natural,  it  is 
not  unnatural,  nor  is  it  partly  unnatural.  Dialectic 
logic  says  that  the  unnatural  is  both  unnatural  and 
natural  at  one  and  the  same  time,  for  the  reason  that  all 
things  are  natural,  though  we  only  give  the  name 
natural  to  that  which  is  general  in  relation  to  any 
particular  part  of  nature  which  happens  to  be  under 
discussion,  while  the  unnatural  is  any  special  circum- 
stances relating  to  that  same  part.  If  Nature  in  its 
entirety  is  being  discussed,  then  there  can  be  nothing 
unnatural,  for  nature  in  that  sense  includes  everything. 
We  turn  now  to  consider  some  special  parts  of  nature. 

Cause  and  Effect.  There  is  a  fourth  rule  of  logic 
known  as  "the  law  of  adequate  cause,"  which  means 
that  every  effect  must  have  a  sufficient  cause;  and 
it  is  quite  commonly  accepted  by  "  educated  "  people 
who  are  ignorant  of  logic  (true  logic)  that  not  only 
must  an  effect  have  a  cause,  but  that  this  cause 
must  be  the  effect  of  a  previous  cause  which 
is  the  effect  of  a  still  more  previous  cause,  and  so 
on  back  to  the  "  first  cause,"  which  itself  never 
was  caused.  Some  say  the  first  cause  is  God,  others 
Nature,  though  all  believe  its  essential  character  to  be 
unknown;  and  no  wonder,  when  we  consider  for 
a  moment  that  if  an  effect  had  never  taken  place  the 


THINKING  141 

cause  could  never  have  been  a  cause,  therefore  the 
effect  is  as  much  the  cause  of  the  cause  being  a  cause, 
as  the  cause  is  the  cause  of  the  effect— if  the  child  had 
never  been  horn  the  father  would  never  have  been  its 
father,  so  the  child  is  as  much  the  cause  of  the  father 
being  the  father,  as  the  father  is  the  cause  of  the  child. 
Hut  what  really  constitutes  a  cause?  Let  us  apply  our 
logic  and  break  the  ideas  of  cause  and  effect  into  their 
parts,  thus  seeing  where  we  get  them. 

With  the  understanding  that  all  parts  of  the  universe 
are  continually  changing,  it  is  obvious  that  some  of  the 
parts  precede  others  in  the  order  of  time.  The  senses 
supply  the  brain  with  ^ense  perceptions  of  those  parts 
that  generally  precede,  and  the  understanding  adds 
them  together  to  form  the  idea  of  cause.  For  example, 
in  summer,  showers  of  rain  generally  precede  or  bring 
about  a  cooler  atmosphere;  the  senses  of  sight  and  of 
feeling  supplv  the  brain  with  perceptions  of  falling  rain 
preceding  a  feeling  of  coolness  at  such  times,  where- 
upon the  brain  function  combines  all  those  separate 
perceptions  into  the  one  idea  of  rain  being  the  cause  of 
the  coolness.  In  the  same  way  the  idea  of  effect  may 
be  broken  into  its  parts;  they  consist  of  sense 
perceptions  of  phenomena  that  generally  follow.  For 
example,  the  sense  of  feeling  supplies  the  brain  with 
perceptions  of  coolness  that  generally  follow  the  falling 
of  rain  at  such  times,  and  the  brain  function  combines 
these  perceptions  into  the  one  idea  of  coolness  being  the 
effect  of  the  rain. 

But  looking  a  little  more  closely,  we  see  that  rain 
could  not  cause  coolness  were  there  no  heat  for  it  to 
absorb,  so  the  heat  is  as  much  a  cause  of  coolness  as  the 
lain.  And  again,  if  the  coolness  had  not  taken  place 
after  the  rain  (and  there  are  times  when  it  does  not,  as 
far  as  our  senses  tell  us)  the  rain  could  not  have  been  a 
cause,  therefore,  at  the  time  when  it  did  take  place  the 
coolness  is  as  much  a  cause  of  the  rain  causing  coolness 
as  the  rain  itself.  From  this  we  see  there  is  no  such 
thing  as  a  cause  "  in  itself."  It  is  the  understanding 
that  constructs  the  ideas  of  cause  and  effect.  And, 
moreover,   with  every  extension  of  parts  so  does  the 


142  THINKING 

cause  vary;  for  example,  if  rain  is  the  cause  of  coolness, 
so  is  the  heat  of  the  atmosphere,  and  the  contour  of  the 
land  that  produces  rain,  also  the  wind  that  carries  the 
moisture,  and  the  sun  that  raised  it.  Here  we  see  that 
all  these  small  generalisations  constitute  the  special  or 
particular  parts  out  of  which  the  understanding 
constructs  the  greater  generalisation  of  a  "  first 
cause";  and  then,  because  man  cannot  understand  a 
cause  not  consciously  directed,  and  this  is  because 
his  knowledge  of  the  universe  takes  the  form  of 
intelligence,  he  says  there  must  be  a  God  who  causes  it 
all ;  but,  when  we  remember  that  all  ideas,  including  that 
of  cause,  are  abstract  mental  generalisations  of  sense 
perceptions,  it  becomes  a  waste  of  time  to  think  about  a 
first  cause  that  is  independent  of  a  material  basis,  for  it 
is  obvious  there  cannot  be  any  such  thing.  The  idea  is 
a  wrong  generalisation  of  parts  that  have  no 
corresponding  generalisation  in  reality.  Nature  as  the 
great  uncaused  cause,  consists  of  the  sum  total  of  all 
the  smaller  or  special  causes,  so  there  is  no  one  cause 
except  as  a  mental  abstraction. 

Absolute  Straightness.  It  is  well  known  that  the 
most  perfect  line,  drawn  by  the  most  able  of  draughts- 
men, with  the  aid  of  the  best  instruments  and 
on  the  best  paper  for  the  purpose,  will,  if  seen  through 
a  miscroscope,  show  many  irregularities.  We  may, 
therefore,  conclude  there  is  no  absolute  straight- 
ness in  nature,  and  yet  the  idea  of  it  plays  a  very 
important  part  in  geometry,  mechanics,  architecture, 
etc.  Now,  if  every  idea  is  based  on  sense  perceptions, 
and  if  there  is  no  absolute  straightness  in  nature  for  the 
senses  to  perceive,  how  do  we  come  by  the  idea?  To 
solve  this  question  we  must  follow  our  logic  and  break 
the  idea  into  its  parts.  In  nature  there  are  many  lines 
that  appear  to  be  straight,  some  more  so  than  others, 
so  the  brain  takes  the  many  sense  perceptions  of  objects, 
separates  the  qualities  of  straightness  from  all  other 
qualities  of  the  objects,  and  out  of  the  many  parts  or 
degrees  of  straightness  constructs  the  unity  or  one 
single  idea  of  absolute   straightness.     It  is  therefore 


THINKING  143 

perfectly  true  that  the  senses  do  not  perceive  tin- 
absolutely  or  theoretically  straight,  they  only  perceive 
the  special  or  separate  parts  of  it ;  it  is  the  understanding 
alone  that  perceives  the  general  nature  of  straightness, 
hut,  of  course,  it  could  not  do  this  without  the  material 
supplied  by  the  senses.  So,  complete  and  absolute 
straightness  is  not  something-  that  exists  first  and  from 
which  all  the  less  perfect  parts  are  derived;  on  the 
contrary,  it  consists  of  all  the  parts  of  straightness, 
separated  from  other  qualities  and  taken  mentally  as  one 
whole;  apart  from  these  it  has  no  existence.  To  say 
that  a  thing  is  straight  is  like  saying  a  thing  is  right, 
neither  statement  has  any  meaning  unless  we  connect  it 
with  some  purpose,  for  example,  we  might  say  that  a 
certain  piece  of  wood  is  straight  for  the  purpose  of 
making  a  window-frame  but  not  for  testing  a  lathe 
bed. 

The  Exact  Mathematical  Unit.  No  two  potatoes, 
men,  scientific  instruments  or  finely-wrought  billiard 
balls  are  exactly  alike,  so  where  do  we  get  the 
idea  of  exact  equality  between  one  and  one,  or 
between  one  hundred  and  one  hundred,  if  all  ideas  are 
based  on  sense  perceptions?  If  we  break  the  idea  of 
an  abstract  unit  into  its  parts  we  find  that  the  senses 
perceive  varying  degrees  of  what  appears  to  be  quantita- 
tive similarly  in  various  objects.  The  understanding 
mentally  separates  these  particular  perceptions  from 
those  of  weight,  colour,  etc.,  and  by  selecting  the 
general  element  of  equality  from  the  varying  degrees 
of  approximate  equality,  constructs  the  idea  of 
absolutely  similar  units  of  quantity.  An  absolutely 
exact  unit  is,  therefore,  not  perceived  by  the  senses 
(they  perceive  only  the  parts  of  the  idea)  but  is  produced 
by  the  understanding  working  with  sense-perceived 
material,  from  which  it  mentally  separates  the  general 
element  of  quantitative  equality  from  all  other  parts  of 
the  universe.  This  absolute  unit,  then  serves  as  the 
base  for  abstract  calculations  of  all  kinds,  and  is  the 
abstract  foundation  of  mathematical  consistency  or 
truth,  though  one  should  not  forget  that  the  whole  range 


144  THINKING 

of  mathematical  reasoning"  has  no  meaning  unless 
applied  to  something  practical,  when  it  is  very  quickly 
discovered  that  allowances  have  to  be  made;  therefore, 
no  such  independent  mathematical  truth  exists,  as  has 
been  affirmed,  except  as  a  mental  generalisation  based 
on  sense-perceived  material.  Those  who  speak  of  the 
eternal  principles  of  the  circle,  the  triangle,  etc.,  and 
who  think  these  principles  exist  in  things  independently 
of  men's  thoughts,  are  evidently  unaware  that  every 
"  single"  thing  is  a  product  of  many  things,  including 
thought;  therefore,  all  principles  are  abstract  generalisa- 
tions of  sense  perceptions.  It  is  no  doubt  a  principle  (to 
the  mind  that  can  understand  it)  that  every  circle 
contains  three  hundred  and  sixty  degrees,  but  if  the 
geometricians  of  the  future  take  to  milesimal  measure- 
ments and  decide  to  divide  the  circle  into  one  thousand 
degrees,  the  three-sixty  principle  would  vanish;  of 
course,  things  would  still  be  things  if  that  is  what  is 
meant,  but  we  already  know  the  universe  had  no 
beginning  and  will  have  no  end,  and,  therefore,  "  there 
will  always  and  everywhere  be  matter  ";  what  needs  to 
be  insisted  upon  is  that  things  considered  apart  from 
thought  contain  no  principles,  for  a  principle  must  of 
necessity  be  a  product  of  thought  plus  the  things  thought 
about.  If  geometricians  have  referred  to  such  principles 
as  "  properties  "  of  things  and  then  gone  on  to  imagine 
the  existence  of  those  "  properties  "  independent  of 
thought,  it  is  time  they  studied  logic. 

Space  and  Time.  The  idea  of  space  is  an  abstract 
generalisation  constructed  from  sense  perceptions 
of  objects  that  are  extended,  such  as  houses, 
tables,  etc.,  and  that  are  said  to  occupy  "space"; 
there  is,  of  course,  no  separate  entity  which  consti- 
tutes space.  The  idea  of  time  is  constructed  in 
the  same  way  from  sense-perceived  successions,  such  as 
one  day  following  another,  but  there  is  no  "thing" 
called  "time"  after  the  manner  of  Bergson.  Space 
consists  of  its  many  parts.  Time  consists  of  its  many 
moments.  In  each  case  the  abstract  unity  is  constructed 
from  sense  perceptions  of  concrete  realities. 


THINKING  145 

Force  and  Matter.  Preliminary,  Let  us  once  again 
insist  that  the  idea  of  distinguishing  between  different 
parts  implies  that  such  parts  are  parts  of  one  whole, 
and,  therefore,  the  universe  as  a  whole  is  the  logical 
Starting  point  in  any  work  of  distinguishing.  If 
we  bear  this  in  mind  we  guard  against  considering  any 
part  that  we  have  separated  and  considered  as  a  unit, 
as  being  a  whole  in  itself  apart  from  the  rest  of  the 
universe,  when  in  reality  it  is  only  our  mental  arrange- 
ment. Idealists  have  instinctively  generalised  force  or 
energy  and  then  treated  it  as  though  it  was  an 
altogether  distinct  and  separate  kind  of  thing;  they  have 
spiritualised  it  in  the  name  of  God  or  intangible  Nature, 
whereafter  it  is  God  who  makes  railway  engines  move. 
The  materialists  of  the  narrow  physical  science  school 
have  gone  the  other  way.  They  have  mentally  separated 
the  ponderable  matter  from  the  force  which  is  part  of 
it,  and  then  considered  this  distinction  as  absolute,  with 
ponderable  matter  as  the  dominant  partner  in  all  their 
associations;  whereafter  it  is  ponderable  matter  that 
causes  all  things.  Both  have  instinctively  performed  the 
mental  separation,  but  have  not  been  fully  aware  of  what 
they  have  done,  and  all  this  because  neither  under- 
stands the  science  of  understanding.  Let  us  now 
analyse  a  few  of  the  ideas  occurring  under  the 
head  of  force. 

Gravity.  Breaking  the  idea  of  gravity  into  its 
parts,  we  see  that  the  senses  perceive  parts  of  ponderable 
matter  that  appear  to  attract  each  other;  they  do  not 
perceive  the  general  force  of  gravity,  it  is  the  under- 
standing that  does  this  by  mentally  separating  these 
particular  phenomena  of  seeming  attraction  from  all 
other  qualities  of  ponderable  matter,  and  then  by  adding 
them  together,  that  is,  generalising  them,  it  constructs 
the  single  idea  of  gravity  and  gives  it  a  name.  Gravity 
as  a  whole  is,  therefore,  perceived  by  the  understanding 
and  not  by  the  senses,  though  the  understanding  could 
not  do  this  if  the  senses  did  not  perceive  the  separate 
parts  of  it.  In  objective  reality  outside  the  mind,  gravity 
consists    of    the    sum    total    of    all    its    manifestations 


146  THINKING 

unseparated    from    the    whole    of    the    nature,    so    it 
constitutes  one  of  the  parts  of  matter. 

Heat.  The  idea  of  heat  when  analysed  shows  heat  to 
be  nothing  that  exists  by  itself.  It  is  seen  as  a  whole  only 
by  the  understanding  which  takes  the  separate  sense 
perceptions  of  heat,  such  as  those  of  the  sun,  a  gas  jet, 
a  fire,  an  electric  radiator  or  the  result  of  any  chemical 
action,  mentally  separates  these  parts  from  all  other 
qualities  of  the  sun,  etc.,  and  generalises  them  into  one 
idea  to  which  it  gives  the  name  of  heat,  thus  mentally 
distinguishing  between  heat  in  general  and  all  the  special 
or  particular  parts  of  it.  Of  course,  there  is  no  such 
thing  as  heat  apart  from  things  that  are  heated,  there- 
fore, heat  in  general  is  an  abstraction,  while  in  objective 
reality  it  consists  of  all  its  parts  undetached  from  nature ; 
accordingly,  heat  is  one  of  the  parts  of  matter.  "  Hot  " 
and  "  cold  "  are,  of  course,  relative  terms,  so  they  must 
be  connected  with  some  purpose,  that  is,  we  must  say 
what  we  are  talking  about  before  they  can  have  any 
meaning;  for  example,  water  at  1050  Fahr.  may  be  hot 
for  taking  a  bath  but  cold  for  cooking  potatoes. 

Light  and  Darkness.  What  is  light?  The  sense 
of  sight  acquaints  us  with  many  manifestations  of 
light.  The  understanding  takes  all  these  parts,  and  for 
the  special  purpose  of  discussing  light,  mentally 
separates  them  from  all  else  and  combines  them  into  one 
general  unit  or  idea  of  light.  The  senses  acquaint  us  only 
with  the  separate  parts,  it  is  the  understanding  using 
these  parts  as  its  material  that  constructs  the  general 
nature  of  light,  that  is,  light  taken  as  a  whole.  There 
is,  of  course,  no  such  thing  as  light  existing  by  itself 
and  which  somehow  or  other  pervades  the  rest  of 
nature.  In  reality,  outside  the  mind,  light  exists 
objectively  only  in  the  sum  total  of  all  its  manifestations 
(all  the  beautiful  colours  we  see),  it  consists  of  these 
manifestations,  it  is  one  of  the  parts  of  matter  and  is, 
therefore,  not  a  something  unknowable  that  remains  at 
the  back  of  the  manifestations.  Once  we  know  how 
understanding  performs   its  understanding  it   is   clear 


THINKING  147 

that  the  general  conception  of  light  is  simply  the  abstract 
or  mental  form  of  what  exists  in  the  concrete  outside 
the  mind  in  the  totality  of  its  separate  manifestations 
undetached  from  matter. 

But  now,  what  is  darkness?  Darkness  is  the 
negation  of  light,  and  how  can  the  senses  perceive  a 
negative?  If  all  ideas  are  based  on  sense  perception 
and  the  senses  cannot  perceive  darkness  where  do  we 
get  the  idea  of  it?  If  we  remember  that  every  unit,  no 
matter  how  small,  may  he  divided  into  still  smaller  parts, 
we  shall  see  that  light  may  be  divided  into  different 
degrees  of  light,  some  of  which  are  not  so  light  as 
others.  Those  parts  that  present  the  greatest  degrees 
of  light  are  the  parts  from  which  the  understanding 
constructs  the  general  idea  of  light;  the  other  parts 
which  are  not  so  light  are  the  specials  for  the  time 
being.  But,  just  in  the  same  way,  the  understanding 
may,  if  it  wishes,  take  these  specials  and  with  them 
construct  the  idea  of  darkness,  which,  of  course, 
constitutes  their  general  nature,  and  in  this  case  the 
greater  degrees  of  light  would  constitute  the  special 
parts;  in  other  words,  what  is  special  in  one  set  of 
relationships  may  be  general  in  others,  or,  the  other  way 
about.  Wherefore,  we  see  that  darkness  does  not  mean 
no  light  at  all,  nor  does  light  imply  no  darkness  at  all. 
Light  is  the  general  nature  of  a  relative  lack  of  darkness, 
while  darkness  is  the  general  nature  of  a  relative  lack 
of  light;  relative,  that  is,  to  certain  purposes,  for 
example,  a  certain  degree  of  light  might  be  quite  light 
for  reading  large  print  but  dark  for  taking  photographs. 

Sound  and  Silence.  Analysing  the  idea  of  sound, 
we  see  the  sounds  of  bells,  drums,  hammering,  etc., 
to  be  separate  manifestations  of  sound  perceived 
by  our  sense  of  hearing.  The  understanding  takes  these 
separate  perceptions  or  parts,  mentally  separates  the 
sounds  from  all  other  qualities  of  the  objects,  and  com- 
bines them  into  one  idea,  that  of  sound  in  general. 
Again,  this  general  nature  is  not  perceived  by  the  senses 
but  by  the  understanding  working  with  the  materia] 
supplied  by  the  senses.    VVith  regard  to  silence,  this  idea 


148  THINKING 

does  not  arise  from  an  absolute  absence  of  sound,  which 
obviously  could  not  possibly  be  sense  perceived;  but  as 
the  general  character  of  those  degrees  of  sound  that  are 
relatively  less  noisy. 

Motion  and  Stillness.  What  is  motion?  Let  us 
analyse  the  idea  in  just  the  same  way.  We  see  men, 
machines,  ships,  clouds,  in  short,  all  kinds  of  bodies 
moving,  we  feel  them  moving,  we  come  to  know  that 
all  things  are  in  motion.  The  understanding  takes  all 
these  separate  sense  perceptions  as  one  lot,  separates 
this  lot  mentally  from  all  other  qualities  possessed  by 
the  bodies,  and  then  abstracts  the  general  nature  from 
all  the  separate  motions,  that  is,  it  generalises  their 
common  features  into  the  one  idea  of  motion.  It 
is,  therefore,  the  understanding  that  perceives  the 
general  nature  of  motion,  the  senses  perceive  only  the 
separate  parts  of  it.  Outside  the  mind,  motion  exists 
objectively  in  the  sum  total  of  the  movements  of  all 
bodies,  and  is  a  part  of  matter;  of  course,  there  is  no 
separate  entity  constituting  motion,  and  which,  so  to 
speak,  enters  bodies  or  leaves  them  to  go  somewhere 
else. 

Now,  how  about  stillness?  Think  of  a  man  sitting 
still  in  a  railway  train  going  at  forty  miles  an  hour  on 
an  earthly  sphere  that  turns  a  complete  revolution  about 
its  axis  every  twenty-four  hours,  meanwhile  it  is  whirling 
around  its  orbit  at  about  thirty  miles  a  second,  while 
some  say  the  whole  solar  system  is  rushing  headlong 
through  space.  From  this  it  will  be  evident  that  stillness 
can  only  be  conceived  in  a  relative  sense;  for  example, 
a  man  may  sit  still  in  a  train  in  relation  to  other  people 
or  to  the  compartment  in  which  he  happens  to  be;  or 
if  two  trains  are  running  on  adjacent  lines  in  the  same 
direction  at  the  same  speed,  except  for  lateral  vibration, 
one  will  be  still  in  relation  to  the  other,  and  so  on; 
therefore,  the  idea  of  stillness  is  a  generalisation  from 
sense-perceived  parts  or  instances  of  relative  stillness. 
We  can  hear  old-fashioned  logic  saying,  "  a  thing  in 
motion  is  in  motion,  it  is  not  still,  nor  is  it  partly  still," 
but  our  logic  can  explain  how  a  thing  can  be  still  and 


THINKING  M9 

yet  in  motion  at  one  and  the  same  time,  just  as  a  man 
inay  be  living-  and  dying  at  the  same  time. 

Something  and  Nothing.  That  the  idea  of  some- 
thing is  a  generalisation  from  sense  perceptions  of 
tilings,  surely  needs  no  explanation;  but  how  do  we 
come  by  the  idea  of  nothing?  If  we  remember  that  the 
word  "nothing"  does  not  mean  nothing  at  all  but 
refers  to  those  parts  of  existence  that  are  relatively 
unimportant,  as,  for  instance,  when  we  speak  of  a  bit 
of  dust  as  being  nothing,  or  a  scratch  on  the  hand  as 
nothing,  we  shall  see  that  the  idea  of  nothing  is  simply 
a  generalisation  drawn  from  those  parts  of  nature  that 
are  unimportant  for  the  time  being.  This,  despite  the 
horror  on  the  face  of  "Old  Logic,"  teaches  us  that 
"  nothing  itself  is  something,"  for,  considered  as  only 
an  abstract  generalisation,  it  is  at  least  a  thought,  and 
thought  is  real. 

Power.  If  the  idea  of  power  be  analysed  and  resolved 
into  its  factors  we  shall  see  these  to  consist  of 
sun  power,  horse  power,  wind  power,  man  power,  steam 
power,  and  so  on.  But,  as  in  previous  cases,  the  senses 
never  perceive  power  in  its  totality.  It  is  the  under- 
standing, using  these  sense  perceptions  as  material,  that 
mentally  separates  those  many  parts  of  power  from  all 
other  qualities  of  the  sun,  horses,  etc.,  and  combines 
them  into  the  one  idea  of  power  in  general.  Outside 
the  mind,  the  total  power  consists  of  all  the  special  parts 
of  power,  which  are  unseparated  from  objects  and 
accordingly  form  part  of  them;  there  is  no  other  power, 
SO  the  idea  of  an  Almighty  power  existing  independently 
of  nature,  and  which  supplies  power  to  nature,  becomes 
a  futility  once  we  see  that  "  universal  power  "  is  a  mental 
concept  built  up  from  sense-perceived  parts  and  that 
the  parts  are  prior  to  the  concept.  Were  there  any  other 
power  different  from  what  we  knozv  as  power,  it  would 
require  a  different  name  to  describe  it,  consequently  it 
would  not  be  power. 

Force  and  Matter.  Concluded.  If  heat,  light,  sound, 
feeling,    seeing   (sense   stimuli),    gravity,    etc.,   are   so 


150  THINKING 

many  different  manifestations  of  force,  what  is  force 
itself?  The  physicists  say  we  do  not  know,  we  only 
know  its  effects;  they  also  say  we  do  not  know  the 
ultimate  nature  of  matter,  though  in  recent  years,  by 
the  electron  theory  already  mentioned,  they  have 
resolved  the  atom  into  several  thousands  of  electrons, 
supposed  to  be  the  product  of  electrical  forces  which 
neutralise  each  other  and  so  produce  points  of  electrical 
inertia  expressing  themselves  as  matter  in  the  form  of 
electrons.  So  matter  is  materialised  energy,  and  energy 
is  energised  matter,  the  immaterial  forces  become 
material  substances  and  vice  versa;  but,  withal,  we  do 
not  know  the  ultimate  nature  of  the  energy  which  lies 
at  the  back  of  its  manifestations. 

Now  let  us  apply  our  logic.  Every  idea  is  composed 
of  parts  supplied  by  sense  perception;  the  idea  of  force 
or  energy  is  no  exception.  The  special  parts  of  the  idea, 
or  rather  a  few  of  them,  we  have  already  worked 
through,  they  consist  of  heat,  light,  power,  etc.  All 
these  separate  generalisations,  based  ultimately  on 
sense  perceptions,  are  taken  by  the  understanding  and 
treated  by  it  as  parts  of  a  still  wider  generalisation  which 
takes  the  form  of  force  in  total.  But  this  total,  or 
general  force,  does  not  exist  apart  from  matter,  it  is 
not  a  separate  entity  that  enters  matter  at  one  time  and 
leaves  it  at  another.  It  is  only  the  mind's  way  of  making 
distinctions  that  gives  rise  to  that  idea,  for  if  we 
remember  that  matter  consists  of  all  its  attributes  taken 
together  and  that  all  these  forces  are  just  such 
attributes  (matter  without  force  is  like  matter  without 
shape),  it  becomes  plain  that  force  in  total  is  the  same 
as  matter  in  total,  consequently  there  is  nothing  at  all 
lying  at  the  back  of  the  manifestations  of  force,  because 
it  consists  of  those  manifestations  themselves.  If  we 
are  dealing  with  the  subject  of  force,  we  speak  of 
material  forces  wherein  matter  is  the  predicate  and 
force  the  subject;  but  if  dealing  with  the  subject  of 
matter  we  speak  of  forceful  matter,  wherein  force 
becomes  the  predicate  and  matter  the  subject;  from 
which  it  should  be  clear  that  force  is  the  same  thing 
we  call  material  nature,  or  the  universe,  the  existence 


THINKING  151 

of  which  nobody  doubts,  because  all  know  it  to  be  a 
fact.      What   we  seek  to   understand  is  not  existence 

independent  of  the  parts  of  existence  which,  of  course, 
is  nonsense,  but  the  relations  between  those  parts. 

Scientists  have  long  since  done  away  with  the  supreme 
mind   of   God,    but   they   are    just   as   much   at    sea    as 
theologians  when  dealing  with  the  ultimate  nature  of 
force,    including    the    human    mind,    particularly    as    it 
appears  in  the  realms  of  morality,   reason,    spirit,   the 
true,  the  good,  the  beautiful,  etc.     Not  knowing  lei'-, 
they  operate  in  their  own  special  sciences  practically, 
that  is,  correctly  as  far  as  practice  goes,  but  not  with  a 
full  and  consciously-applied  theory  of  method;  outside 
their  own  speciality,   they  do  not  work  right  even   in 
practice.    Even  the  ordinary  working"  class  reader  (for 
whom  this  book  has  been  written)  may  say  regarding 
such  examples  of  reasoning  as  water  being  hot  for  some 
purposes   but  cold    for   others,    or    it   being   light   for 
reading  but  dark  for  photography,  that  this  book  tells 
him  nothing,  because  he  has  already  reasoned  that  way. 
Probably  he  is  quite  correct,  for  most  people  argue  or 
reason  well  enough  on   small  everyday  matters,   but, 
since  they  do  not  understand  the  theory  of  thinking,  they 
do  not  see  that  exactly   the  same   method   should   be 
employed  in  treating  all  questions,  for  just  as  what  is 
hot  for  some  things  may  be  cold  for  others,   so  may 
some  things  be  right  for  some  people  and  zurong  for 
others,  and  if  the  working  class  did  its  own  thinking  and 
employed    for    that    purpose    a    scientific    method    of 
approaching  every  question,  they  would  soon  cease  to 
be  hoodwinked  by  the  master  class  through  accepting 
the  point  of  view  given  them  (often  by  leading  scientists) 
in  the  daily  press,  the  cinema,  the  church,  the  lecture- 
room,   the  political  clubs  and  the  trade  union  branch 
meeting,  not  to  speak  of  wireless  broadcasting;  but,  of 
rights  and  wrongs  we  shall  see  more  in  the  next  chapter. 


CHAPTER  XI 

Logic  applied  to  Mental  and  Moral  Problems 

Every  truth  must  be  the  truth  concerning  something, 
otherwise  it  has  no  meaning  and  is  no  truth  at  all.  In 
searching  for  the  truth  of  anything  we  have,  therefore, 
to  first  make  clear  what  it  is  we  are  talking  about,  what 
the  thing  is,  the  purpose  in  view,  etc.,  and  then,  with 
everything  considered,  to  abstract  the  general  nature 
or  general  agreement  between  the  factors ;  if  in  this 
process  we  mentally  combine  too  few  factors  our 
generalisation  falls  short  of  what  is  combinable  outside 
the  mind,  or,  to  be  more  correct,  in  objective  reality 
(thought  itself  may  be  objective),  and  we  get  error;  if 
we  take  too  many  factors  our  generalisation  overshoots 
the  mark  of  objective  reality,  and  again  we  get  error. 
Assuming  the  reader  agrees  with  the  principles  taught 
in  the  last  two  chapters  and  is  prepared  to  apply  the 
same  method  to  all  questions,  we  now  proceed  to 
consider  a  few  mental  and  moral  problems  that  are  not 
usually  treated  scientifically,  for  it  is  in  the  field  of  the 
moral  nature  of  man's  reason  where  the  greatest  con- 
tention rages  and  where  little  or  no  science  is  applied. 
Take,  first,  the  question  of  the  reasonable. 

The  Reasonable.  How  do  men  know  what  is  reason- 
able when  they  argue  that  five  per  cent,  profit  is 
reasonable,  or  that  a  certain  standard  of  life  is  reason- 
able, or  that  the  demands  of  capitalists  are  reasonable, 
or  that  workers  demand  unreasonably  high  wages,  or 
that  the  present  chaotic  state  of  the  world  can  never 
be  set  straight  till  men  act  towards  each  other  with  "  a 
bit  of  reason";  what  is  the  basis  of  their  argument? 

152 


THINKING  153 

Since  the  understanding  cannot  operate  without  the 
senses,  and  the  senses  cannot  function  unless  in  contact 
with  reality,  it  is  clear  that  men,  if  they  reason  at  all, 
must  reason  about  things,  and  naturally  they  look  upon 
things  from  the  standpoint  of  whether  or  not  they  serve 
some  need;  man's  needs,  therefore,  lie  at  the  bottom  of 
man's  reason.  Things  that  serve  some  need  are  sense 
perceived,  and  from  such  perceptions  the  understanding 
generalises  the  idea  of  the  "reasonable";  while  from 
sense  perceptions  of  things  that  serve  in  a  contrary 
direction  the  understanding  generalises  the  idea  of  the 
"  unreasonable."  For  example,  on  warm  summer  days 
men  do  not  need  to  wear  double-breasted  overcoats;  it 
would,  therefore,  be  just  as  unreasonable  to  wear  them 
at  such  times  as  it  would  be  to  neglect  them  in  excep- 
tionally cold  weather.  But  it  might  be  reasonable  for 
an  invalid  to  wear  such  a  coat  in  summer,  though  his 
would  be  a  special  case;  in  like  manner  some  individual 
might  not  need  one  even  in  cold  weather,  in  which  case 
it  would  be  reasonable  for  him  to  go  without,  for  again 
this  would  be  a  special  case.  Viewed  in  this  way,  that 
which  is  reasonable  depends  upon  the  needs  of  certain 
persons  with  all  the  conditions  taken  into  account;  vary 
the  needs  of  the  people,  the  times  or  the  general 
conditions,  and  what  was  formerly  reasonable  will 
become  unreasonable ;  accordingly,  since  the  needs  of 
different  people  are  widely  different,  there  can  be  no 
one  thing  or  policy  that  is  reasonable  for  all  people  at 
all  times  under  all  conditions. 

To  say  it  would  be  reasonable  for  all  men  to  wear 
great  coats  on  warm  days  because  it  was  reasonable  for 
the  invalid  to  do  so  would  be  an  error,  because  it  would 
be  making  the  special  case  into  the  general,  it  would  be 
taking  fewer  factors  than  would  be  required  to  agree 
with  reality.  Truth  being  that  statement  that  expresses 
the  generality  concerning  any  quantity  of  sense  percep- 
tions, it  follows  that  it  would  be  truly  reasonable  for  the 
invalid  to  wear  the  coat  because  we  are  dealing  only 
with  his  needs;  the  truth  in  this  case  would  be  a 
generalisation  drawn  from  a  small  number  of  sense 
perceptions.      Should    we    take    a    greater    number    of 


154  THINKING 

sense  perceptions  by  considering-  the  needs  of  people 
in  general,  it  would  be  unreasonable  to  say  they 
should  all  wear  such  coats  at  such  times,  because  the 
invalid's  case,  although  a  general  if  taken  by  itself, 
becomes  a  special  when  taken  in  relation  to  a  wider 
general. 

Take  another  instance;  the  needs  of  people  in  general 
may  be  collectively  expressed  as  the  need  to  improve 
their  position  in  life.  Under  the  wages  system,  wage- 
workers  need  more  wages  to  carry  out  this  improvement, 
and  this  need  leads  them  possibly  to  strike.  But 
employers  need  more  profits,  which  lead  them  to  reduce 
wages  and  possibly  to  lock  the  workers  out.  Each 
section  generalises  its  own  needs,  and  what  is  reasonable 
for  one  is  unreasonable  for  the  other.  So  it  is  plain  that 
the  reasonable  is  reasonable  only  in  relation  to  certain 
persons  at  certain  times  and  under  definite  conditions; 
it  is  impossible  for  there  to  be  anything  that  is 
universally  reasonable  under  all  conditions  and  for  all 
persons.  Moreover,  since  the  needs  of  a  small  number 
of  people  within  a  given  group  constitute  the  special 
or  unimportant  needs  as  compared  with  the  general 
needs  of  the  group,  it  would  be  unreasonable  for  the 
smaller  section  to  represent  its  special  needs  as  being 
the  general.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the  larger  section 
were  too  lavish  in  their  generalising  and  included  factors 
that  were  not  applicable  to  their  given  problem,  then 
their  generalisation  would  not  correspond  with 
objective  reality,  it  would  be  too  general  for  the 
given  circumstances;  for  example,  if  the  majority  of 
members  of  a  trade  union  passed  a  resolution  to  the 
effect  that  reductions  in  wages  were  in  the  interest  of 
both  masters  and  men,  or,  if  they  preach  that  in  general 
the  interests  of  masters  and  men  are  alike,  since  the 
separate  needs  of  masters  on  the  one  hand  and  workers 
on  the  other  cannot  be  combined  in  general  practice, 
such  resolution  or  teaching  is  unreasonable,  because 
more  factors  have  been  generalised  inside  the  mind 
than  can  possibly  be  so  in  reality.  To  strive  to  reconcile 
capitalists  and  workers  is  unreasonable,  because  it  is 
not  in  accord  with  objective  reality  (the  capitalists  deny 


THINKING  155 

this,  bill  that  is  bluff),  though  it  may  be  reasonable  to 
attempt  reconciliation  after  the  contradiction  of  private 
ownership  in  means  of  production  has  been  solved  by 
social  ownership,  and  the  capitalist  has  become  a  mere 
man,  that  is.  when  the  conditions  have  changed, 
but  that,  it  must  be  borne  in  mind,  is  a  different 
problem. 

Take  now  an  example  of  a  different  kind.  Rationalists 
tell  us  it  is  unreasonable  to  believe  in  God,  a  future 
life,  miracles,  and  so  on.  These  people  evidently  do 
not  understand  logic;  they  imagine  they  get  reason 
without  sense  perceptions,  or,  if  they  do  not  go  quite 
SO  far  as  that,  they  at  least  elevate  their  own  particular 
reason  into  reason  in  general.  I  lowever,  the  people  who 
worship  God  feel  the  need  for  prayer  just  as  children 
feel  the  need  for  fairy  stories,  and  in  both  cases  it  is 
a  product  of  their  reason  that  they  should  satisfy  their 
need.  Even  a  man  who  understands  logic  might  quite 
reasonably  read  a  book  of  fanciful  poems,  or  go  to  a 
fanciful  opera,  or  to  a  church  service  if  he  likes  those 
things  and  gets  some  degree  of  satisfaction  from  them, 
but  it  would  not  be  reasonable  to  attempt  to  solve 
political  and  economic  questions  with  the  information 
usually  got  from  such  sources,  because,  although  it 
does  not  matter  to  the  rest  of  men  how  he  reasons 
privately  or  semi-privately  among  a  small  group,  those 
reasons  are  small,  unimportant,  particular  or  special 
generalisations  when  considered  in  relation  to  politics 
and  economics,  for  that  which  is  reasonable  in  the  latter 
spheres  depends  upon  the  needs  of  large  groups,  so,  the 
political  and  economic  needs  being  the  more  widely 
general,  it  becomes  unreasonable  to  obtrude  special 
religious  notions;  wherefore,  we  see  once  more  that 
what  is  reasonable  under  some  conditions,  because 
general,  becomes  unreasonable  under  other  conditions 
through  having  become  the  special  in  relation  to  a 
wider  general.  Since  there  mav  be  readers  who  object 
tn  the  idea  of  God's  Holy  religion  being  brought  to  the 
level  of  mere  poetry  or  fairy  lore,  and  who  are  still  of 
the  opinion  that  "sweet  reasonableness"  comes  from 
on  High  and  constitutes  obedience  to  God's  commands. 


156  THINKING 

it  may  be  advisable  to  work  through  a  few  of  the  ideas 
contained  in  the  greater  idea  of  God. 

Life.  What  is  life  ?  According  to  Genesis,  God 
formed  man  out  of  clay.  After  finishing  the  model, 
"  God  saw  that  ...  it  was  very  good,"  so  He 
breathed  "  life  "  into  it,  whereupon  the  model  became 
Adam.  When  Adam's  body  died,  the  breath  of  life 
departed  and  winged  its  way  back  to  God;  in  fact,  it 
belonged  to  God,  or,  rather,  was  part  of  Him  all  along. 

This  crude  form  of  the  idea  has  long  since  been 
discredited,  nevertheless  its  essential  character  remains 
in  many  different  forms,  for  modern  philosophers  are 
asking  the  questions,  "  What  is  life"  ?  and  "  Why  do  we 
ascribe  life  to  the  living  "  ?  They  seem  to  imagine  that 
life  is  an  entity  of  some  kind  that  comes  from  some- 
where, enters  the  body  during  the  pre-natal  period,  only 
to  leave  it  at  death  to  go  on  living  in  some  region  after 
the  body  dies.  Of  course,  there  are  variations  on  this 
theme,  for  some  think  of  a  soul  that  is  not  the  life  itself 
but  which  possesses  life,  though  in  actual  conception 
there  is  little  difference  inasmuch  as  most  people  speak- 
indiscriminately  of  the  "  immortal  soul  "  and  "  immortal 
life." 

The  idea  of  life,  like  all  ideas,  is  built  up  of  parts 
consisting  of  sense  perceptions  of  the  many  separate 
instances  of  life,  such  as  animals,  trees,  microbes,  etc. ; 
the  brain  separates  the  sense  perceptions  of  life  from 
the  sense  perceptions  of  all  other  qualities  of  the 
animals,  etc..  and  generalises  them  into  the  one  idea  of 
life  in  total.  Life  is  not  a  thing,  but  a  function  of  matter, 
and  the  understanding  gives  this  function  a  name  to 
distinguish  it  from  other  functions  of  matter. 

In  reality,  outside  the  mind,  life  consists  of  the  sum 
total  of  the  many  different  instances  of  life.  There  is 
no  separate  thing  called  "  life  "  that  may  enter  the  body, 
or  leave  it  and  still  go  on  living.  Such  an  idea  is  a  mere 
mental  abstraction,  a  unity  that  exists  in  the  mind  only, 
there  being  no  corresponding  unity  outside  the  mind. 

Through  not  understanding  how  the  brain  works, 
people  have  performed  the  generalisation  practically, 


THINK  IXC  157 

but  have  not  understood  it  theoretically;  this  has  led 

them  to  treat  the  abstraction  as  an  entity.  SO  it  1-  no 
longer  wonderful  to  find  thai  living  things  have."  life," 
indeed  it  would  be  peculiar  if  we  did  not  ascribe  life  to 
the  living  seeing  that  we  get  our  general  idea  of  it  from 
sense  perceptions  of  those  same  living  things-  Looked 
at  like  this  it  is  no  more  wonderful  that  certain  combina- 
tions of  matter  should  exhibit  the  function  called  life 
than  that  other  combinations  should  exhibit  other 
functions;  for  example,  that  a  Inciter  match  should  burst 
into  flame  on  being  scratched  by  sand  paper;  each 
particular  combination  of  matter  exhibits  its  particular 
function,  so  we  employ  different  names  to  describe  the 
different  function--. 

Every  part  of  matter  changes  the  manner  of  its 
functioning  with  every  change  in  its  physical  constitu- 
tion; for  example,  a  man's  body  is  gradually  dying  at 
the  same  time  that  it  is  living,  but  we  distinguish 
between  living  and  dying  by  separating  the  special  from 
the  general.  If  a  body  is  building  up  new  parts  more 
quickly  than  old  parts  decay  (both  processes  are  results 
of  changes  in  its  physical  constitution),  the  building-up 
process  is  more  general  than  the  decaying  process,  so 
the  decaying  relates  to  a  smaller  quantity  of  material 
changes,  it  is  consequently  the  special  in  this  case,  and 
we  say  truly  that  the  body  is  living  because  that  is  its 
general  character.  After  a  body  has  reached  maturity  it 
begins  to  decay  more  rapidly  than  it  builds  up;  it  is  then 
in  the  dying  stage,  because  the  decay  is  becoming  more 
general  than  its  opposite;  when  the  decay  has  reached 
such  a  point  that  building  up  in  the  form  of  that 
particular  organism  ceases,  then  the  dying  process  has 
become  very  general,  and  we  truly  state  the  body  to  be 
dead.  We  should  never  forget  that  decay  itself  is  but 
the  building  up  of  new  forms  of  matter.  University  logic 
would  say  life  is  not  death,  nor  is  it  partly  so,  for  life 
and  death  are  opposite  terms;  but  our  logic  shows  them 
to  be  one  process,  the  different  parts  of  which  are 
separated  entirely  by  the  mind  working  with  sense 
perceptions.  To  ask  "  what  is  the  '  life  force  '  apart  from 
the  remainder  of  living  matter  "  is  like  asking  "  what  is 


158  THINKING 

explosive  force  apart  from  matter  that  is  exploding,  or 
freezing  force  apart  from  ice  "  ? 

Robert  Blatchf  ord  has  quite  recently  again  made  the  old 
remark,  that  when  a  man  is  struck  dead  with  a  cannon 
ball  the  chemical  elements  are  still  there  but  the  body  is 
no  longer  living,  and  asks,  "  What  is  it  that  has  gone  "  ? 
We  answer,  it  is  the  particular  arrangement  of  the  parts 
that  has  gone,  which  arrangement  was  necessary  to 
enable  the  chemicals  to  function  in  the  way  we  describe 
as  living,  just  as  in  case  the  cannon  ball  had  struck  a 
house  and  reduced  it  to  ruins,  the  bricks  and  mortar 
would  still  be  there  but  lack  of  the  required  arrangement 
would  prevent  them  from  functioning  by  way  of  giving 
shelter  (in  ridicule  we  might  even  ask  what  has 
become  of  the  "  shelter  "  apart  from  the  bricks  and 
mortar — shall  we  meet  it  again  in  the  Great  Beyond  ?). 
In  the  former  case  we  no  longer  call  the  body  a 
man,  nor  in  the  latter  case  do  we  call  the  bricks  and 
mortar  a  house,  because  in  each  case  the  general  nature 
has  been  changed,  and  so  we  require  a  different  name  to 
describe  it.  If  the  argument  be  advanced  that  we  could 
rebuild  the  house  but  not  the  man,  we  should  say  this 
was  merely  a  question  of  the  extent  of  the  damage  in 
either  case,  coupled  with  the  relative  skill  on  the  part 
of  the  doctors  and  of  the  builders.  In  case  the  damage 
is  too  extensive  to  be  repaired,  a  new  house  might 
be  built,  or  a  new  man  be  produced,  by  taking  the 
action  appropriate  in  either  case. 

Immortality.  This  idea  has  for  its  parts  just  the 
same  as  life,  but  with  other  parts  added  to  them,  such 
as  the  continuity  of  functioning  running  through  living 
organisms  taken  as  a  whole  throughout  history,  the 
desire  of  every  conscious  organism  to  live  as  long  as 
it  can,  the  desire  for  continued  companionship,  the  idea 
of  a  stable  condition  of  things  which  takes  no  notice 
of  the  continual  change,  the  desire  for  rest  and  peace 
when  one  feels  tired  of  work,  the  hurly-burly  of  life  or 
the  agony  of  prolonged  sickness  and  suffering,  and  so 
on.  When  a  man  says  "  I  wish  I  were  dead  "  he  means 
(usually)  nothing  of  the  kind,  rather  does  he  feel  a  desire 


THINKING  159 

to  be  free  from  his  present  trouble,  and  if  the  only 
possible  way  is  by  parting  with  his  body,  then  he  is 
willing  to  pa]  thai  price,  Dili  he  has  the  idea  of  still 
going  nn  living.  We,  therefore,  see  the  idea  of  Immor- 
tality to  be  an  abstract  generalisation  from  sense 
perceptions  of  parts  of  the  universal  being  that  are  not 
eneralised  outside  the  mind;  it  is  consequently  an 
error. 

Perfection.  In  life,  people  perceive  by  the  aid 
of  their  senses  that  some  machines  work  more  accurately 
than  others;  that  some  persons  are  more  refined  than 
others,  or  more  generally  useful  to  society,  nicer  to  get 
on  with,  easier  to  talk  to,  and  so  on;  that  some  books 
as  compared  with  others  are  easier  to  read  and  contain 
more  beautiful  language;  also  a  thousand-and-one  other 
excellences.  Now,  it  will  he  quite  evident  that  what  is 
desirable  or  nice  for  one  person  will  not  be  equally  so 
for  all.  Each  person  takes  his  own  circle  of  sense 
perceptions,  singles  out  what  is  for  him  the  generally 
desirable,  and  calls  it  the  perfect,  whereafter  this 
becomes  his  standard  of  perfection,  while  his  standard  of 
imperfection  consists  of  the  general  character  of  the 
undesirable.  There  are,  of  course,  no  such  things  as 
"  perfection  "  in  itself,  "  beauty  "  in  itself,  "  good  "  in 
itself,  and  so  on;  otherwise  we  might  ask  "  Why  have 
last  year's  beautiful  fashions  become  ugly"? 

But  these  individual  concepts  are  not  the*  end  of  the 
question,  for  such  separate  generalisations  come  in 
conflict  with  one  another  through  conversation  or 
comparisons  of  various  kinds,  thereby  leading  to  a  more 
extended  idea  which  becomes  a  generalisation  drawn 
from  a  wider  circle;  it  may  be  in  style  of  dress,  manner 
of  address,  style  of  writing,  deportment,  knowledge, 
etc.  From  all  these  separate  and  relatively  small 
generalisations,  there  are  brains  that  generalise  the  idea 
of  a  complete  and  absolute  perfection  contrasted  with  its 
opposite  complete  imperfection. 

With  our  explanation  we  see  these  latter  ideas  to  be 
mere  mental  abstractions,  the  unity  exists  in  the  mind 
only,  there  being  no  corresponding  unity  outside  the 


160  THINKING 

mind.  It  is  not  the  senses  that  perceive  perfection  but 
the  understanding-,  though  it  could  not  do  this  without 
the  material  supplied  by  the  senses.  Outside  the  mind 
the  only  perfection  that  exists  is  contained  in  the  many 
concrete  instances  of  perfection  which  themselves 
consist  of  small  mental  generalisations  of  sense-perceived 
facts,  having  for  their  base  that  which  is  admirable 
because  desirable.  Therefore,  human  wants  lie  at  the 
bottom  of  the  absolutely  perfect,  it  being  nothing  but 
the  abstract  mental  reflection  of  the  general  desires  of 
mankind. 

Freedom  and  Will.  What  is  freedom?  By  their 
senses  men  perceive  that  they  may  move  from  place 
to  place,  they  may  write  letters,  they  may  make 
wealth,  they  may  be  lazy,  etc.  Throughout  all  such-like 
they  feel  they  are  choosing  one  line  of  action  in  prefer- 
ence to  another,  and  when  they  have  done  something 
they  feel  they  could  have  done  otherwise  had  they 
wished,  and  that  accordingly  they  are  free  to  choose; 
from  all  these  sense  perceptions  the  understanding 
generalises  the  idea  of  freedom.  But  what  are  sense 
perceptions  ?  Do  they  not  imply  a  relation  between  that 
which  perceives  and  that  which  is  perceived  ?  Evidently 
these  apparently  free  acts  are  expressions  of  the 
relations  between  the  individual  and  the  rest  of  nature 
and  his  acts  are  a  product  of  both.  This  being  so  they 
cannot  be  called  free  any  more  than  a  cork  can  be  called 
free  when,  on  being  released  at  the  bottom  of  a  tank  of 
water,  it  rises  to  the  surface.  The  movement  of  the  cork 
is  determined  (not  pre-determined)  by  both  itself  and  the 
water,  and  so  are  men's  acts  determined  in  like  manner. 

Man's  needs,  again,  lie  at  the  bottom  of  this  question ; 
he  requires  the  necessaries  of  life,  and  in  order  to  live 
it  is  necessary  that  he  exert  himself  to  get  them.  This 
necessary  exertion  is  already  implied  in  the  fact  of 
existence  for  without  such  striving  there  would  be  no 
existence  at  all,  the  idea  of  existence  is  but  the  abstract 
form  of  all  that  is.  Man's  acts  are,  therefore,  nothing 
but  the  carrying  into  effect  of  all  the  necessary  relations 
between    himself    and    the    rest    of    nature,    and    are 


THINKING  161 

consequently  determined  at  each  given  moment  This 
nty  appears  in  the  form  of  a  series  of  impulses  to 
do  certain  things;  those  impulses  that  are  strongest 
within  a  man  at  any  given  moment  are  executed, 
provided  there  are  no  combinations  of  outside  forces 
sufficient  to  stop  him;  at  these  times  he  experiences  the 
feeling  of  freedom  and,  of  course,  in  the  reverse  case, 
lack  of  freedom.  Since  only  those  impulses  that  are 
Strongest  or  quantitatively  superior  can  prevail,  it 
follows  again  that  the  expression  of  what  is  called  the 
"  human  will  *'  is  only  the  expression  of  the  general  over 
the  particular.  From  separate  sense  perceptions  of 
numerous  carryings  out  of  such  strong  impulses,  the 
understanding  generalises  the  idea  of  the  human 
"  will,"  whereafter  that  generalisation  is  regarded  as  a 
mysterious  entity,  and  is  called  the  "  will  ";  but  we  see 
there  is  no  such  entity  in  reality,  either  outside  the  mind 
or  even  inside,  except  the  mental  abstraction. 

Since  all  things  are  necessary  parts  of  existence, 
"  freedom  "  is  nothing  but  a  name  for  the  expression  of 
the  strongest  forces,  and  is,  of  course,  relative  to  those 
forces.  For  example,  each  rising  political  class  makes 
its  demands  in  the  name  of  "  freedom  "  or  "  liberty"  as 
an  appeal  to  an  "eternal"  principle;  when  it  gets 
sufficient  force  to  achieve  power  it  is  said  to  have 
acquired  freedom,  whereafter  it  styles  its  particular 
country  a  "  free  "  country,  while  it  itself  becomes 
conservative  in  order  to  preserve  its  own  particular 
brand  of  freedom.  Since  any  particular  freedom  is 
conditioned  by  force,  so-called  unconditional  freedom 
such  as  is  implied  in  the  Holy  Will  of  God  is  an  error, 
it  is  the  elevation  of  numerous  particular  wills  into  the 
general,  which  is  afterwards  considered  as  detached 
from  and  independent  of  nature. 

As  thought  is  one  of  the  material  parts  of  man,  and 
as  a  man  at  any  given  moment  is  simply  a  combination 
of  material  factors  which  must  act  according  to  its 
constitution,  then  to  give  a  man  a  new  thought 
obviously  varies  the  combination,  and  so  will  he  act  in  a 
different  way  (thinking  is  an  act),  just  as  will  gun 
powder,  in  the  presence  of  a  spark,  act  in  different  trays 

L 


162  THINKING 

according-  to  whether  or  not  it  is  combined  with  water. 
Assuming  a  thousand  impulses  to  act  in  a  certain  way, 
and  a  similar  number  of  similar  strength  to  act  in  some 
other  definite  way,  equilibrium  takes  place  regarding 
those  particular  ways  of  acting,  though  one  additional 
impulse  on  either  side  may  be  enough  to  upset  the 
balance.  This  principle  may  be  seen  at  work  in 
propaganda,  education,  advertising,  scolding,  hyp- 
notism, etc.,  etc.  In  all  these  cases  the  acting  principle 
is  that  of  suggestion,  either  auto  or  non-auto,  and  it 
would  seem  that  those  modern  psychologists,  who  are 
interested  in  what  has  been  erroneously  called 
"  Coueism,"  are  coming  to  realise  this  when  they  ask 
"  is  the  imagination  (thought)  stronger  than  the  will?  " 

If  the  foregoing  is  true,  then  it  becomes  quite 
scientific  to  tell  oneself  repeatedly  what  one  intends  or 
wishes  to  do,  for  as  soon  as  the  repeated  stimulus  has 
acquired  sufficient  accumulated  subconscious  strength, 
or  developed  a  new  neurone  pattern,  the  individual 
must  respond,  of  course  within  the  limits  to  which 
thought  is  operative,  for  we  must  remember  that 
thought  is  only  one  part  of  the  universe.  Faith 
considered  as  faith  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  matter, 
but  considered  as  thought  it  is  operative  like  all 
thought. 

The  writer  feels  that  the  sooner  psychologists  drop 
the  "will"  overboard  the  better;  there  will  then  be  a 
clear  field  in  which  to  develop  the  practice  of  suggestion 
on  scientific  lines,  the  inapplicability  of  the  idea  of 
"  will  "  is  at  present  a  stumbling  block. 

Knowledge.  What  is  knowledge  ?  The  idea  of 
knowledge  is  a  generalisation  drawn  from  sense 
perceptions  of  the  different  parts  of  knowledge 
possessed  by  everybody  and  everything  that  knows 
anything  at  all,  that  is  clear.  From  our  previous  work 
it  will  also  be  clear  that  there  is  no  knowledge  without 
sense  perception;  for  there  is  no  other  kind  of  know- 
ledge besides  that  which  we  know  as  knowledge,  if  there 
were  it  would  require  a  different  name,  and  consequently 
would  not  be  knowledge.     Again,  knowledge  can  only 


THINK  IXC,  163 

l)c  known  by  brains  that  are  dependent  on  sense 
perceived  material,  otherwise  knowledge  would  be  the 
knowledge  of  nothing;  so  there  can  be  no  knowledge  of 
all  the  past  and  the  future,  that  is,  of  eternity  "  from  the 
beginning  unto  the  end." 

God.  To  analyse  the  idea  of  God  we  must  follow 
the  rules  of  our  logic  in  just  the  same  manner  as  before. 
We  think  of  God  as  being  the  source  of  life,  or  as  being 
life  itself;  as  being  without  beginning  or  end.  and  there- 
fore immortal;  as  being  completely  perfect;  as  being 
that  which  is  all  good;  as  being  omnipotent  or  all 
powerful,  omniscient  or  all  knowing,  and  omnipresent 
or  everywhere  at  once;  as  being  eternally  just,  eternally 
loving,  eternally  merciful,  eternally  angry,  eternally 
mild  and,  at  least  as  far  as  Christians  are  concerned,  as 
having  the  form  of  a  human  being  inasmuch  as  "  God 
made  man  in  his  own  image."  Now  realising  that  all 
ideas  must  necessarily  be  based  upon  sense  perceptions, 
we  see  that  God  is  a  mental  generalisation  of  a  great 
number  of  smaller  generalisations,  all  of  which  we  have 
seen  to  consist,  in  their  parts,  of  the  abstract  form  of 
man's  material  relations  between  himself  and  other 
natural  objects.  And  since  this  mental  combination 
does  not  exist  as  a  combination  outside  the  human  head, 
notwithstanding  that  its  parts  exist  and  are  separately 
sense  perceived,  it  follows  that  we  perceive  God  with 
our  understanding  merely  as  an  abstraction.  See  Fig.  5. 
He  is,  in  fact,  abstract  man  carried  to  infinity;  so  we 
may  truly  say  that  "  Man  made  God  in  his  own  image." 

Morality  and  Right.  (  )ur  logic  is  the  one  and 
only  guide  that  can  conduct  us  safely  through  the 
maze  of  the  moral.  In  war  time  it  is  right  to  kill,  to  tell 
lies  about  the  enemy,  etc.  ;  in  peace  time  it  is  considered 
wrong.  Polygamy  is  moral  in  Eastern  countries,  in 
Western  countries  it  is  immoral.  But  among  the  many 
notions  of  morality  there  is  one  general  outstanding 
feature  common  to  them  all — they  all  serve  some 
general  need  pertaining  to  a  certain  society  or  group 
within  a  society;  and  if  we  take  any  such  group,  consider 


1 64 


THINKING 


its  interests  and  find  out  what  is  its  general  need,  we 
shall  have  found  what  is  truly  moral  for  that  particular 
group. 

Let  us  start  with  one  man.     If  a  man  lives  entirely  by 
himself  he  makes  his  own  morals,  or  to  be  more  correct, 

bense  perceptions 
of 

Thmkinq  oK.^     ,^Lwinq  men 
%\  ""J/'-Continuity 


Thmkinq  of-___ 


■Immortal  Life 

Ihinkmq  of~-.^   ..-Beauty 

Accuracy 
Utility 
etc.* 

-Infinite  Perfection 

Trunkinq  ot-._     ".-Kindness 
-Justice 
Pi  evidence 

elc. 

Infinite  Goodness 

T>i mkinq  of-..    "-Gravity 

;J-lumanWil 
"  Storms 
etc. 


Intuition 
nsfmcf 
."lnfelliqence 
etc 


Infinite  Knowledge 


All  Miqhty 


Fig-  5-     Diagrammatic  suggestion  of  the  construction  of  the 
thought  of  God,  from  sense  perceptions  of  objective  reality. 

the  question  of  morality  as  generally,  and  therefore 
truly,  understood  does  not  arise,  for  the  reason  that  he 
cannot  have  any  relations  with  other  people.  But,  if  he 
lives  with  another  man  they  each  have  to  respect  the 
other's  needs,  and  if  one  is  a  pugilist  while  the  other  is 
a  weakling,  then,  in  any  matter  of  dispute,  the  morality 


THINKING  165 

is  finally  dictated  by  the  pugilist;  though  if  the  work  fir, 
maybe,  the  companionship  of  (he  weakling  is  necessary 
for  the  well  being  of  the  pugilist,  the  pugilist  must  take 
this  into  consideration  for  his  own  sake.  While  each 
man  has  likes  and  dislikes  peculiar  to  himself,  these  are 
only  special  needs  and  do  not  count,  it  is  therefore  their 
common  or  general  needs  that  determine  their  morality, 
and  this  at  any  moment  of  serious  difference  between 
them  turns  upon  the  will  of  the  pugilist,  because  he  is 
able  to  coerce  his  partner  if  necessary  ("  I'm  the  boss 
here,  I'll  tell  you  what's  right  ").  Coercion,  though, 
is  not  always  pugilistic  in  character;  it  might  be  that  the 
weakling  is  a  weakling  in  the  body,  but  very  cunning 
and  superior  mentally  (analogous  to  the  capitalist  class 
and  the  working  class).  Assuming  this,  it  would  be 
possible  for  him  to  demonstrate  his  mental  might  by 
"educating"  the  pugilist  "in  the  way  he  should  go," 
unless  the  pugilist  should  "educate  himself"  from  his 
own  standpoint.  In  either  case,  whichever  particular 
morality  obtained,  it  would  only  be  the  mental 
generalisation  of  sense  perceptions  which,  of  course, 
depend  upon  the  material  conditions  governing  their 
lives;  should  these  change  the  morality  changes.  It  is 
evident,  then,  there  is  no  morality  that  is  right  for  all 
people  and  for  all  time. 

To  take  another  example.  We  go  to  the  theatre, 
where  we  are  in  company  with  a  number  of  people  who 
desire  entertainment,  and  have  therefore  a  common 
need.  If  among  the  audience  there  should  be  a  drunken 
man,  who  persists  in  being  a  nuisance,  the  general  body 
assert  their  morality  in  calling  for  his  removal,  and,  if 
necessary,  that  morality  is  demonstrated  by  the  man 
being  forcibly  ejected. 

That  which  is  moral  is,  accordingly,  that  which  serves 
the  general  needs  of  certain  groups  of  people  at  certain 
times  and  places;  and  the  nature  of  morality  is  the 
upholding  of  the  general  interest  over  the  particular. 

As  sense  perceptions  vary  with  variations  in  the 
material  or  economic  conditions  to  which  different 
nations  at  the  same  time  or  the  same  nation  at  different 
times  are  subject,   so  do  different  moralities  exist  as 


166  THINKING 

between  different  countries  at  the  same  time  or  within  a 
given  country  at  different  times  (the  same  remarks  apply- 
to  different  classes  within  a  country).  For  example,  the 
morality  of  the  Dark  Ages  was  that  of  the  Catholic 
Church  and  Feudal  Barons,  and  its  might  consisted 
theoretically  of  the  threat  of  Hell,  and  practically  of  the 
sword  and  torture.  When  the  Church  and  the  nobles 
were  in  the  strongest  position  they  were  the  dictators, 
as  an  instance,  usury  was  immoral;  but  when  the 
economic  mode  of  production  changed  and  brought 
development  of  trade,  there  arose  new  needs  based  on 
the  new  material  conditions.  The  old  nobility  fought 
to  retain  its  supremacy,  but  as  the  rising  capitalist  class 
increased  in  numbers  their  growing  might  gradually 
asserted  itself;  this  might  was  that  of  monetary  power, 
which,  with  the  need  for  foreign  markets  in  which  to 
dispose  of  the  increased  product  of  machine  work, 
translated  itself  into  extensions  of  military  and  naval 
power  culminating  in  imperialism  and  "  the  honour  of 
the  Flag."  All  these  changes  were  accompanied  by 
different  moralities;  for  example,  with  the  banking 
system,  usury  became  moral,  at  least  to  the  extent  of 
the  usual  rate  of  interest;  the  virtues  included  thrift  and 
abstinence,  solvency  for  those  who  paid  and  bravery  for 
those  who  fought,  and  all  this,  be  it  remembered,  in  the 
name  of  the  Holy  will  of  God.  Each  powerful  class 
claims  that  its  morality  is  based  upon  "  eternal  "  right, 
"  eternal  "  justice,  and  so  on;  but  our  logic  exposes  the 
fact  that  there  is  no  "  eternal  "  or  "  absolute  right,"  it 
shows  us  that  morality  is  relative  to  persons,  times  and 
places,  for  every  so-called  "  absolute  right  "  is  really 
the  might  of  a  particular  class  enforcing  its  particular 
desires  regarding  its  particular  needs.  From  this  it  will 
be  easily  seen  how  powerful  can  be  the  lever  of 
education  in  the  hands  of  a  governing  class,  and  also 
how  necessary  it  is  for  the  working  class  to  educate 
itself  from  its  own  particular  standpoint. 

In  so  far  as  the  development  of  capitalism  is  ever 
increasing  the  number  of  workers,  and  relatively 
thinning  the  ranks  of  the  capitalists,  so  are  the  needs 
of  the  capitalist  class  becoming  the  particular,  while  the 


THINKING  K'7 

needs  of  the  working  class  are  becoming  the  general. 
Working   class   morality   is   slowly   taking    form,   but 

before  it  can  obtain  general  recognition  it  will  have  to 
be  expressed  in  the  economic  might  of  the  workers  in 
expropriating  the  capitalists  by  socialising  the  means  of 
production.  This  is  why  capitalists  arc  so  desperately 
anxious  to  "  educate  "  the  working  class  in  the  direction 
of  conciliation  and  "  impartiality." 

Holiness.  Since  morality  is  determined  by  the 
superior  power  or  might  of  the  general  over  the 
particular,  then  the  general  needs  become  the  end  in 
view,  and,  provided  the  end  as  conceived  in  the  abstract 
is  a  correct  generalisation  of  the  general  needs,  which 
correctness  can  only  be  attained  by  a  study  of  all  the 
factors  concerned,  so  may  we  say  that  the  end  is 
justified.  (  >f  course,  there  is  no  such  thing  as  an  end 
considered  by  itself,  for  like  every  other  single  idea,  the 
idea  of  an  end  is  built  up  of  sense  perceptions. 
consequently  all  "  ends  "  are  constructed  by  the  under- 
standing in  relation  to  the  material  conditions  out  of 
which  they  are  generalised. 

So  also  with  the  idea  of  the  "  means  "  to  attain  a  given 
"end."  If  the  end  is  justified,  so  are  the  means;  but 
since  the  end  in  view  cannot  be  attained  without  the 
necessary  means,  we  see  that  the  end  when  realised  is 
only  the  sum  of  all  its  means  taken  together, 
consequently  means  do  not  exist  in  themselves,  but  arc 
only  means  when  taken  in  relation  to  some  definite  end, 
for  should  the  end  in  view  not  he  realised,  then  what 
were  expected  to  be  the  means  to  that  end  never 
become  means,  therefore  means  are  only  relative. 

If  human  welfare  be  taken  as  the  end  in  view,  then  all 
actions  toward  that  end  become  means,  and  the  end 
being  the  whole  welfare,  is  the  I  loly.  But  if  we  analyse 
the  idea  of  the  whole  well-being  of  the  human  race,  we 
find  it  to  be  composed  of  parts;  for  example,  the 
production  of  food,  clothing,  entertainment,  the 
acquisition  of  knowledge,  etc.  These  parts  are  the 
means  of  attaining  the  cm\  in  view,  and  taken  altogether 
constitute  that  end.     Though  if  we  take  one  of  those 


168  THINKING 

parts  or  "  means  "  and  consider  it  by  itself,  we  find  it 
is  an  "end"  which  has  its  own  special  means;  for 
example,  taking  the  production  of  food  as  the  end  in 
view,  its  parts  or  means  consist  of  the  separate  acts 
involved  in  agriculture,  cattle  raising,  and  so  on. 
Therefore,  the  relatively  small  or  particular  means  of 
agriculture,  etc.,  taken  together  constitute  the  "end" 
of  food  production,  and  likewise  the  particular  means 
employed  in  science,  taken  together,  constitute  the 
"  end  "  in  view,  science.  But  food  and  science,  which 
are  "  ends  "  in  relation  to  their  special  means,  them- 
selves become  the  "  means  "  of  the  greater  "  end  "  of 
human  welfare.  So,  the  whole  welfare  of  the  human 
race,  or  the  Holy,  is  the  only  absolute  end.  all  other 
ends  being  relative.  Wherefore  it  follows  that  if  any 
group  of  persons  having  a  special  end  in  view  call  it  the 
Holy,  they  are  wrong,  and  the  means  they  employ  are 
wrong.  For  example,  the  end  that  capitalists  have  in 
view  is  profit,  and  the  means  they  employ  are  the  private 
ownership  of  factories,  tools,  etc.,  and  the  purchase  of 
labour  power.  These  factors  express  themselves  in 
capitalist  politics,  capitalist  authority,  the  capitalist 
State,  capitalist  law,  capitalist  war,  and  capitalist 
education  for  workers,  inculcating  the  doctrines  of 
thrift,  increased  production,  fighting  for  the  Flag,  etc., 
but,  above  all,  hard  work  for  relatively  low  wages.  "  It 
is  the  holy  will  of  God  that  the  poor  must  work."  "  It 
is  a  grievous  wrong  and  a  sin  to  attack  the  sanctity  of 
private  property."  But  evidently,  since  the  end  in  view, 
namely,  profit,  can  only  serve  the  need  of  a  particular 
class,  then  it  cannot  be  general  or  whole,  or  Holy. 
Although  capital  was  justified  in  its  day  because  it  made 
wealth  to  flow  like  water,  and  so  tended  as  a  step 
towards  the  ultimate  general  good,  it  is  no  longer 
justified,  because  it  is  holding  back  the  general  product 
from  the  general  mass  of  the  people  who  produce  it. 
Therefore,  if  profit  as  an  end  in  view  is  no  longer 
justified,  neither  are  its  means,  the  private  ownership  of 
the  property  used  in  producing  it,  or,  in  a  word,  the 
wages  system. 

Here  more  than  anywhere  else  we  see  the  necessity  of 


THINKING  169 

teaching  logic  to  the  working  class,  and  also  the  reason 
why  university  professors,  who  In-long  directly  or 
indirectly  to  the  capitalist  class,  dare  not  teach  it.  "  It 
is  a  holy  and  a  wholesome  thought  "  not  "to  pray  for 
the  dead,"  hut  to  teach  the  living,  though  almost 
starving,  mass  of  workers  to  reject  the  spurious 
Holiness  offered  them  by  their  masters,  whether  in 
press,  pulpit  or  parliament. 


CHAPTER    XII 

Various  Examples  of  Applied  Logic 

One  who  adopts  the  Science  of  Understanding  as 
outlined  in  the  last  three  chapters  will  agree  that  no 
single  thought  is  possible  without  a  basis  of  sense 
perception,  and,  therefore,  to  trace  our  thoughts  back 
far  enough,  invariably  ends  in  establishing  the  relation- 
ship that  always  exists  between  the  knowing  brain  and 
the  object  which  is  known.  The  method  is  very  simple, 
but  the  acquisition  of  material  upon  which  to  use  it 
means  work,  as  it  involves  a  study  of  all  those  things  we 
wish  to  examine,  for  without  the  necessary  material  we 
are  left  guessing,  and  the  difference  between  guessing 
and  science  is,  of  course,  the  difference  between 
chancing  our  luck  and  certainty.  The  scientific  method 
consists  of  splitting  every  question  into  its  essential 
ideas,  then  splitting  each  idea  into  its  sense  perceived 
parts  and  comparing  our  mental  work  with  what  exists 
outside  the  mind,  that  is,  comparing  the  abstract 
existence  of  things  with  their  concrete  existence.  By 
this  means  we  may  see  which  generalisations  are 
objectively  possible  and  which  are  not,  or,  in  other 
words,  the  difference  between  the  general  and  the 
special,  or,  again,  between  truth  and  error.  Having 
learned  the  method,  we  now  proceed  to  apply  it  to  those 
questions  tabulated  in  the  first  chapter,  not  as  yet 
answered;  in  doing  this  it  is,  of  course,  assumed  that  the 
reader  is  sufficiently  familiar  with  economic  and  social 
science. 

What  is  True  Democracy  ?  Here  are  two  ideas, 
"truth"  and  "democracy."       Truth  is  that  which  is 

170 


THINKING  171 

general  wit  Inn  a  given  circle,  so  much  we  already 
know.  Democracy  means  the  rule  of  the  people,  or 
tli.it  the  whole  of  the  people  rule  themselves.  But, 
dividing  this  idea  into  its  parts,  we  see  it  to  be 
ini|  ossicle  as  an  objective  generalisation,  for  how  can 
the  people  be  said  to  rule  themselves  while  they  are 
divided  into  two  classes,  workers  and  capitalists,  whose 
separate  general  needs  are  opposed?  It  must  of 
necessity  be  the  rule  of  one  class.  The  voting  of  the 
working  class,  although  it  constitutes  a  small  mental 
training  for  the  future,  nevertheless,  at  present  is  no 
more  than  a  hoodwinking  device,  and  must  remain  so 
till  the  might  is  abolished  that  arises  from  the  private 
ownership  of  the  means  of  production  (factories, 
railways,  etc),  upon  which  is  based  capitalist  morality. 
This  morality  preaches  the  sanctity  and  inviolability  of 
such  private  property.  The  capitalist  class  accordingly 
elevates  a  partial  good,  the  realisation  of  its  0101  general 
needs  into  the  general  good  of  all  people,  and 
hypocritically  preaches  the  idea  of  democracy  as  one  of 
the  means  towards  its  own  end. 

There  is,  therefore,  no  such  thing  as  true  democracy, 
nor  can  there  be  under  class  rule.  The  idea  exists  as  a 
generalised  abstraction  in  people's  minds;  it  is  based 
upon  facts  that  are  sense  perceived,  but  since  these  facts 
are  not  capable  of  being  generalised  outside  the  mind 
so  long  as  capitalism  lasts,  the  generalisation  is  for  the 
present  untrue  because  it  is  too  general  for  the  existing 
conditions. 

Would  the  Practice  of  Humanitarian  Principles  be 
good  for  Society?  This  question  presupposes  (1)  that 
general  humanitarian  principles  exist,  (2)  that  we  can 
at  the  present  time  speak  intelligently  of  the  good  of 
society,  and  (3)  that  the  practice  of  such  assumed 
principles  is  possible. 

(11  "Humanitarian  principles"  are  mental  abstrac- 
tions based  upon  sense  perceived  facts  that  relate  to 
human  beings.  Since  the  material  conditions  of  various 
groups  are  very  different  from  each  other,  so  are  their 
sense    perceptions,    and    likewise    consequently    their 


172  THINKING 

mental  generalisations,  as  witness  those  of  Englishmen, 
Turks,  Negroes,  and  so  on;  from  the  various  partial 
generalisations  the  understanding  draws  a  wider 
generalisation,  that  of  the  abstract  "  absolutely  humani- 
tarian," which  has  no  corresponding  existence  outside 
the  mind ;  the  parts  of  it  exist  outside  the  mind,  but  not 
the  combination,  it  is  therefore  too  general. 

(2)  The  "  good  of  society  "  is  another  abstraction  to 
which  the  same  remarks  apply. 

(3)  Since  no  abstract  idea  can  be  put  into  practice 
unless  it  corresponds  with  reality  outside  the  mind,  it 
follows  that  even  within  these  limits  the  practice  of 
humanitarian  principles  turns,  not  upon  their  being 
humanitarian,  but  upon  the  material  conditions 
obtaining  at  any  given  time;  and  if  the  advocates  of 
such  humanitarianism  wish  to  show  the  superiority  of 
their  principles  they  must  be  prepared  to  enforce  them 
and  to  demonstrate  their  morality  by  might. 

Of  course,  just  as  a  certain  group  think  their  special 
ideas  are  correct  because  they  are  in  accord  with  the 
"eternal  principles  of  truth  and  humanity,"  so  do 
groups  whose  interests  lie  in  the  opposite  direction 
appeal  to  the  same  principles  to  justify  their  opposition, 
which  shows  that  the  principles  advocated  by  each 
group,  when  reduced  to  the  concrete,  are  special  to  each 
group.  Each  calls  them  the  general  and  tries  to  bluff 
the  other  by  speaking  of  them  as  Holy,  that  is, 
pertaining  to  the  whole,  when  in  reality  they  are  partial, 
and  have  to  rest  upon  force  for  their  application.  To 
say  "  if  one  man  holds  such  principles,  so  could  all  men 
if  only  they  would  "  ignores  the  fact  that  ideas  are 
determined  by  material  conditions,  which  include  the 
faculty  of  thinking,  so  that  we  cannot  ourselves  choose 
what  we  think.  Therefore,  humanitarian  principles, 
considered  in  the  light  of  what  is  ordinarily  meant  when 
the  term  is  used,  are  simply  beautiful  soap  bubbles 
requiring  nothing  beyond  our  logic  to  demonstrate  their 
emptiness. 

With  regard  to  the  application  of  Christian  principles 
in  solving  social  problems,  the  same  remarks  apply. 
Since     Christian     principles     emanate     from     a     sect, 


THINKING  173 

"advanced"  thinkers  and  orators  throw  them  over- 
board as  being  too  narrow,  they  claim  thai  their  ideas 
are  not  the  silly  sectarian  ones,  but  are  broad-based  on 

the  principles  of  humanity,  and  so  do  they  succeed  in 
showing  the  same  kind  of  silliness  in  the  lump. 

All  ideals  have  a  material  base,  whether  they  be  true 
or  false,  but  they  are  useful  only  when  they  correspond 
with  those  material  conditions  that  may  make  their 
realisation  possible.  Outside  this,  they  may  be  pleasant 
dreams  and  quite  harmless,  provided  they  are  not  taken 
seriously;  but  when  they  are,  much  waste  of  time 
ensues,  and  they  become  a  sub-conscious  but  impractic- 
able nuisance.  Our  logic,  it  must  be  remembered,  does 
not  exclude  the  delights  of  poetic  or  even  political 
imagination,  such  as  communistic  thoughts  of  the 
future  or  I.L.P.  policies  with  regard  to  the  present,  but 
simply  shows  such  imagination  in  its  true  light,  thereby 
keeping  it  from  clogging  the  wheels  of  practical  affairs. 
True  enough,  without  imagination  much  would  be 
missed,  but,  then,  many  things  are  better  missed,  so  we 
should  learn  to  discriminate. 

Is  Education  good  for  the  Working  Class?  Educa 
tion  is  a  means  to  an  end,  if  the  end  is  justified, 
so  are  the  means;  here  we  have  to  split  up  the 
ideas  of  "  education  "  considered  as  a  means,  and 
"  the  good  of  the  working  class  "  considered  as  an  end ; 
and  an  end  to  be  good  must  serve  some  need. 

We  know  that  workers  need  to  live,  as  do  non- 
workers;  and  that  progress  consists  in  maintaining  or 
improving  a  given  standard  of  comfort,  intellectual  or 
otherwise,  with  an  ever  decreasing  expenditure  of 
energy;  consequently  all  education  that  tends  towards 
this  end  is  good  for  the  working  class.  But  we  also 
know  that  in  capitalist  countries  the  people  are  divided 
into  the  capitalist  class  and  the  working  class. 
Capitalists,  living  without  producing  wealth,  have  needs 
opposed  to  those  of  the  workers,  and  since  they  control 
all  general  education  they  necessarily  permeate  that 
education  with  ideas  that  serve  their  class  needs,  because 
those  ideas  necessarily  appear  to  them  as  good;  there- 


174  THINKING 

fore,  while  the  general  nature  of  education  is  good  for 
workers,  that  special  permeation  is  bad. 

To  counteract  this  capitalist  speciality,  it  is  necessary 
for  workers  to  develop  a  type  of  education  consistent 
with  their  own  special  needs,  at  the  same  time  that  they 
partake  of  education  in  its  more  general  character.  Our 
logic  shows  that  both  these  special  types  of  education 
are  small  generalisations  which,  being  opposed  in 
practice,  cannot  be  unified,  though  the  abstract  unity 
may  obtain  inside  the  mind  as  an  error;  nor  at  the 
present  time  can  either  speciality  taken  separately  be  an 
integral  part  of  the  general.  Each  class  strives  to 
demonstrate  the  truth  of  its  special  generalisation,  the 
one  conservative  the  other  revolutionary.  Now,  owing 
to  the  inexorable  working  of  economic  laws,  whereby 
the  working  class  are  becoming  more  numerous  and 
more  dependent,  the  workers'  educational  speciality  is 
gradually  becoming  more  and  more  general;  it  leads  to 
an  abstract  ideal  of  the  social  ownership  of  factories, 
tools,  materials,  and  the  mechanism  of  distribution  and 
exchange.  Whenever  this  ideal  is  realised  in  the 
concrete,  the  special  working-class  character  of 
education  (excluding  the  purely  propagandist  sides)  will 
become  part  of  general  education,  and  thereby  its  truth 
will  be  demonstrated.  The  education  given  to  workers 
by  capitalists  is  conservative  as  considered  from 
their  special  standpoint,  while  pretending  to  be 
impartial,  because  it  tends  to  confuse  the  issue  between 
the  two  classes,  but  they  cannot  help  it  being 
progressive  considered  from  general  standpoints;  this 
essential  contradiction  will  be  solved  by  the  conservative 
side  being  exposed  as  a  result  of  the  progressive 
element  enabling  workers  to  read  for  themselves. 

We  may  conclude,  then,  that  the  general  education 
which  tends  towards  greater  production  with  less  expen- 
diture of  energy,  is  good  for  workers  when  separated 
from  the  special  capitalist  ideas  running  through 
it,  because  it  makes  for  general  progress;  but  for  the 
same  reason  special,  partial  or  Independent  Working- 
Class  Education  is  good  for  workers  because,  first,  it 
leads  to  a  more  correct  generalisation   of  their  own 


THINKING  175 

special  needs,  and,  second,  shows  that  as  economic 
development  proceeds,  it  must  eventually  become  part 
of  a  wider  general.  Consequently  the  special  capitalist 
class   character   of   general    education    is    wrong   for 

workers,   because  it   persists  in   elevating  the   former's 

special  interests  or  special  good  into  the  general  good 
which  it  can  never  become. 

//  Socialism  is  bound  to  come  of  what  use  are  Classes 
in  Social  Science?  This  question  pre-supposes  for  the 
sake  ot"  argument  that  the  human  will  is  determined  or 
not  free,  or  to  put  it  another  way,  that  the  idea  of  "  the 
will  '*  i-  nothing  but  a  mental  generalisation  from  sense 
perceived  impulses  just  as  we  have  previously  described, 
and  then  by  implication  goes  on  to  suppose  that  we  have 
free  wills  and  could  sit  down  and  do  nothing  by  using 
those  wills.     The  fallacy  exists  in  the  question  itself. 

If  all  our  acts  are  determined,  so  are  the  acts  of  class 
teaching  determined,  and  those  who  are  so  constituted, 
other  conditions  permitting,  cannot  avoid  conducting 
classes.  Of  course,  we  could,  and  as  a  matter  of  fact 
would,  sit  down  and  do  nothing  if  we  wished,  but  the 
outstanding  feature  is  that  we  cannot  wish  that  way,  for 
the  material  conditions  governing  our  lives  compel  us  to 
act  in  sonic  way,  and  the  particular  way  is  determined  by 
our  mental  generalisations  of  sense  perceived  facts,  for 
we  cannot  get  knowledge  in  any  other  way.  Time  was 
when  people  thought  that  some  things  tended  to  rise 
and  some  to  fall,  but  the  theory  of  gravitation  offers  a 
much  better  explanation  by  taking  as  its  starting  point 
the  idea  that  all  things  are  attracted  towards  each  other, 
whereby  they  are  saved  from  wasting  time  trying  to 
find  out  which  things  tend  to  fall  and  which  to  rise, 
without  things  being  any  different  in  fact,  for  gravity 
had  operated  all  the  time  on  all  things,  prior  to  the 
discovery  of  its  general  law.  And  just  in  the  same  way 
the  knowledge  that  the  human  will  is  nothing  but  an 
abstract  idea  built  up  from  sense  perceptions  of  those 
impulses  that  are  strongest,  saves  us  from  foolishly 
wasting  time  trying  to  discover  how  far  our  acts  are 
determined  and  how  far  they  are  free,    without  in  the 


176  THINKING 

least  altering  the  way  in  which  man,  including  the  rest 
of  nature,  develops,  for  this  has  been  operative  at  all 
times  just  like  the  principle  of  gravity.  Those  who 
argue  that  the  human  will  is  free  within  limits,  a  freedom 
analogous  to  that  of  a  bird  within  the  limits  of  its  cage, 
might  as  well  argue,  as  in  our  previous  illustration,  that 
a  cork  in  water  is  free  from  the  influence  of  gravity 
when  it  rises  to  the  surface  of  the  water  which  limits  its 
rising  capacity. 

If  it  be  granted  that  the  general  statement  of 
determinism  (not  pre-determinism  or  fatalism)  is  true, 
how  do  we  account  for  those  individuals  who  have 
developed  inertia  consequent  upon  holding  the  idea  that 
socialism  is  inevitable  ?  It  is  simply  that  the  thought, 
sense  perceived,  has  been  one  of  the  determining" 
influences  which,  taken  altogether,  establish  a  balance 
of  impulses  and  consequent  inaction  in  that  particular 
line  (a  balance  in  all  lines  at  the  same  time  is  impossible, 
for  we  must  act  in  some  way) ;  the  practical  corrective 
(from  the  writer's  standpoint)  for  this  state  of  mind  is 
economic  pressure  direct  or  indirect  on  that  particular 
individual  to  which  he  will  or  rather  must  respond  one 
way  or  another,  although  it  might,  and  sometimes  does, 
result  in  suicide;  the  theoretical  corrective  is,  of  course, 
a  study  of  logic.  (The  special  and  the  general  as  relating 
to  this  question  have  already  been  dealt  with  under 
Freedom  and  Will,  page  161.) 

Would  it  be  right  for  Socialists  to  confiscate  the 
Property  of  Capitalists,  or,  is  it  right  to  Steal?  This 
question,  like  very  many  others,  betrays  an  unconscious 
mixing  up  of  ideas  in  that  it  pre-supposes  the  socialisa- 
tion of  the  means  of  production,  and  stealing,  to  be  one 
and  the  same  thing;  as  they  are  quite  different  we  must 
answer  the  two  questions  separately. 

(i)     Is  it  right  to  steal? 

The  idea  of  stealing  can  arise  only  on  the  basis  of 
privately-owned  property,  and  its  parts  consist  of 
numerous  sense  perceptions  of  acts  wherein  certain 
persons  appropriate  to  their  own  uses,  property  which 
by   common    consent    belongs    to    other   people.      All 


THINKING  177 

moralit)  is  based  upon  the  needs  of  mankind,  and  the 
serving  of  the  general  needs  <>t'  any  special  part  oi  man 
kind  is  ensured  by  might;  there  can  be  no  morality  that 
transcends   this,    for   "eternal"   rights,    even   though 

Strongly  advocated,  are  of  no  avail,  therefore,  since 
there  is  nothing  thai  is  right  "  in  itself,"  where  stealing 
serves  some  general  need  and  is  generally  considered 
right,  it  is  right,  and  where  generally  considered  wrong, 
it  is  wrong. 

Among  early  communal  tribes  it  was  quite  common 
to  regard  stealing  from  some  other  tribe  as  the  proper 
thing  to  do,  while  within  the  tribe,  where  things  were 
held  in  common,  the  idea  could  not  apply;  but  as  private 
property  developed  inside  the  tribe,  then,  for  the  general 
good  of  the  tribe,  stealing  was  considered  immoral  inside 
while  it  still  remained  moral  to  steal  from  outside.  As 
tribes  joined  together  to  form  nations  the  immorality  ol 
stealing  became  extended  with  the  greater  generalisa- 
tion uj  the  common  need,  though  it  was  still  moral  to 
steal  from  other  nations  when  needs  decreed  so,  as  in 
the  stealing  of  oil,  coal,  rubber,  iron,  etc.,  always,  of 
course,  under  some  transcendental  guise  as  "  for  the 
greater  honour  and  glory  of  Cod."  or  "  in  the  interests 
of  civilisation  and  progress."  But  with  the  wages 
system  the  human  race  has  been  divided  into  wage- 
workers  and  capitalists,  which  alters  the  question  of 
stealing  the  means  of  production  into  that  of  socialising 
them. 

(_•)  Would  it  be  right  to  socialise  the  means  of 
production  ? 

This  question,  like  the  previous  one,  can  arise  only 
on  the  basis  of  privately-owned  property,  but  not  until 
that  property  has  gone  through  a  long  course  of 
historical  development  and  has  arrived  at  the  point 
where  it  is  against  the  general  need,  inasmuch  as 
the  workers  are  the  most  numerous  but,  speaking 
relatively,  fare  very  badly  ;  and  this  under  conditions  that 
are  technically  capable  of  providing  equitably  for  all. 

The  idea  of  socialisation  is  a  mental  generalistion 
aiising  from  many  sense  perceptions  of  the  fact  that 
ownership  of  the  product  depends  upon  ownership  of 

M 


178  THINKING 

the  means  of  producing  it;  and  since  the  workers 
constitute  the  general  mass  of  the  people  they  see  that 
the  general  needs  of  the  human  race  concerning  wealth, 
production,  and  distribution  can  be  served  only  by  the 
social  ownership  of  factories,  tools,  railways,  etc.  The 
conservative  owning  class  speak  of  socialisation  as 
stealing,  they  make  their  special  needs  (profit)  into  the 
general  and  say  "  stealing  is  wrong  in  the  sight  of  God 
and  man  "  (except  when  they  go  to  war  for  new  markets 
and  raw  materials).  They  do  not  rely,  however,  merely 
on  the  preaching  of  this  abstract  principle,  but  rather 
on  the  physical  force  of  military  and  police.  On  the 
other  hand,  sentimental  socialists  say  that  the  means 
of  life  are  the  "  free  gifts  of  God  "  and  ought  to  belong 
to  all  men.  What  these  people  do  not  see  is  that  their 
abstract  contention  can  only  be  realised  by  might,  the 
might  of  an  economically-organised  working  class.  So, 
because  it  is  in  the  interests  of  the  general  welfare,  it 
becomes  right  to  think  of  socialising  the  means  of  pro- 
duction, and  since  the  end  is  justified  so  are  the  means 
to  that  end.  The  idea  of  paying  for  them  is  absurd,  for, 
according  to  the  most  liberal  estimates,  the  working 
class  receive  only  a  quarter  of  the  product,  and  this  must 
be  consumed  in  order  to  keep  them  alive. 

For  those  who  see  no  difference  between  socialising 
and  stealing,  we  must  point  out  that  stealing  implies  the 
complete  dispossession  of  the  former  owner,  while 
socialisation  implies  joint  ownership.  It  is,  therefore, 
right  to  socialise  the  means  of  life  in  general,  but  wrong 
to  steal  property  not  included  in  those  means,  because 
the  former  serves  a  general  need,  the  latter  only  a 
special  one. 

Why  is  Evil  Desirable!  Nothing  is  evil  in  itself 
or  good  in  itself.  All  acts  are  performed  with  the 
intention  of  serving  man's  needs,  no  matter  how 
depraved  those  needs  may  be  as  viewed  from  other 
people's  standpoints.  Those  acts  which  serve  general 
needs  are  sense  perceived,  whereupon  we  mentally 
separate  those  parts  of  the  acts  which  give  general  satis- 
faction, from  all  other  parts,  and  add  them  together  into 


THINKING  179 

the  one  idea  of  goodness.  *  m  the  other  hand,  all  acts 
which,  though  they  may  serve  individual  or  special 
needs,  yet  are  opposed  to  the  general  good,  are  similarly 
sense  perceived  and  their  common  features  generalised 
by  the  understanding  into  the  idea  of  evil.  There  may, 
of  course,  be  any  number  of  generals,  each  of  which 
becomes  a  special  in  relation  to  a  greater  general;  for 
example,  one  kind  of  food  may  be  good  for  cue  member 
of  a  family  but  bad  for  the  family  in  general;  or  what 
one  whole  family  may  consider  good  for  itself  may  be 
generally  bad  for  some  organisation  to  which  it  belongs; 
similarly,  what  may  be  good  for  that  particular  organisa 
tion  may  be  bad  for  the  class  to  which  it  belongs,  and 
finally,  what  may  be  good  for  one  class  may  be  bad  from 
the  general  standpoint  of  the  whole  of  the  people.  Evil 
is  that  which  is  particular  or  special  from  the  standpoint 
of  any  given  general  view,  while  good  is  that  general 
itself.  Therefore,  evil  is  desirable  because  it  is  good 
within  a  relatively  small  circle,  and  within  this  circle 
it  is  good  because  it  serves  some  need. 

Is  Machine  Production  Beneficial  for  Society?  We 
had  better  know  what  we  are  talking  about  before 
we  start,  for  we  cannot  get  a  solution  unless  we 
know  the  limits  of  the  question;  therefore  we 
must  mark  off  the  circle  of  phenomena  we  wish 
to  investigate.  If  by  "machine  production"  we 
mean  the  machine  production  of  commodities  (the 
words  could  mean  many  other  things;  for  example, 
astronomical  observations  with  an  equatorial  telescope, 
current  coins  turned  out  from  the  Mint,  gramophone 
tunes,  etc.),  the  question  becomes  clear,  and  all  we  need 
do  is  to  split  it  into  its  essential  ideas,  then  take  each 
one  separately  and  split  it  into  its  parts  to  see  how 
the  generalisations  arise.  It  is  only  alter  this  process 
has  been  gone  through  that  we  can  get  an  accurate 
solution,  for  only  then  can  we  see  whether  or  not  the 
generalisations  correspond  with  reality;  though  we  may, 
and  occasionally  do,  get  right  by  accident  so  far 
as  our  awareness  is  concerned.  After  limiting  the 
question  to  the  machine  production  of  commodities,  the 


180  THINKING 

essential  ideas  are  "beneficial  "  and  "  society."  From 
the  standpoint  of  commodity  production  and  the  distri- 
bution of  the  product,  the  idea  of  "society"  is  an 
abstract  generalisation  that  embraces  too  much,  seeing 
that  society  is  divided  into  workers  and  capitalists  whose 
economic  interests  are  opposed;  the  idea,  accordingly, 
does  not  correspond  with  reality,  nor  can  it  so  long  as 
the  conflicting  interests  are  facts;  therefore,  in  this 
connection  the  word  "  society  "  is  an  error.  With  regard 
to  the  idea  of  "benefit,"  that  which  is  beneficial  must 
be  sense  perceived  as  serving  some  need,  and  if  we 
analyse  these  needs  we  shall  find  the  limitations  within 
which  the  term  can  be  accurately  employed. 

Assume  an  individual  who  owns  a  machine  that  enables 
him  by  its  output  to  withdraw  from  the  socially-produced 
surplus  value  a  greater  amount  of  that  value  in  money 
form  than  he  contributes  in  commodity  form,  obviously 
that  would  be  specially  good  for  him  but  generally  bad 
for  the  others.  The  same  applies  to  group  ownership 
within  the  capitalist  class,  for  the  success  of  one  group 
would  be  special  as  compared  with  the  general  needs 
of  the  whole  class.  But  now,  taking  the  whole  capitalist 
class  as  a  general  by  itself,  since  profit  (surplus  value) 
is  socially  produced,  that  is,  by  the  combined  total 
capital,  then  in  proportion  as  the  application  of 
machinery  extends  their  field  of  exploitation  into  the 
world  of  unskilled  labour,  so  in  general  does  the  whole 
of  the  capitalist  class,  considered  as  a  unit,  derive  special 
benefit  from  its  special  ownership  of  the  machines,  while 
the  working  class  in  general  gets  no  more  than  a  living. 
Therefore,  not  until  the  workers  force  the  principle  of 
the  social  ownership  of  machinery,  etc.,  can  they  partake 
of  the  total  product  in  proportion  to  their  contribution; 
consequently,  not  till  then  could  we  say  that  machinery 
benefits  society  as  a  whole,  for  it  is  only  under  those 
conditions  that  society  will  be  a  whole  in  relation  to  such 
a  question. 

Is  Happiness  as  an  end  in  i'icw  morally  justified} 
The  moral,  as  we  have  demonstrated,  is  that  which 
serves     the     general    needs     of     any     definite     social 


Til  INK  INC 

group.  If  any  person  attains  happiness  by  pursuing 
a  course  of  action  that  serves  those  general  needs, 
then,  even  though  the  pursuit  <>f  happiness  be  the 
end    in    view    rather    than    the    general    good    of    his 

group,  it  is  justified;  in  the  reverse  case  it  is 
not.  The  same  remarks  apply  to  a  small  group  within 
a  large  and.  therefore,  more  general  group,  where  an 
individual  thinks  his  actions  to  be  in  the  general  interest, 
it  might  he  necessary  to  restrain  him  by  the  general 
might,  for  his  is  a  special  case:  for  example,  a  religious 
fanatic  whose  revivalist  tendencies  make  for  insanin 
among  his  followers. 

Is  it  desirable  that  all  people  should  have  good 
health?  Here  we  have  a  question  that  may  he 
taken  as  a  type  of  many  similarly  silly  questions, 
it  is  like  asking  "should  all  people  he  virtuous?" 
or  "is  education  a  good  thing?"  Such  questions 
are  so  far  removed  in  the  abstract  from  their 
concrete  bases  (sense  perceptions')  that  no  intelligent 
answers  can  he  given  until  we  have  first  brought  them 
down  to  earth  as  it  were,  and  the  only  wav  to  do  this 
is  to  substitute  some  practical  question  for  the  one 
submitted,  for  if  we  say  "  yes  "  in  answer  to  our  original 
question  the  answer  has  no  practical  value,  it  tells  us 
nothing  as  to  how  good  health  may  he  secured  because 
there  is  no  absolutely  general  viewpoint  in  such  ma1 

For  the  sake  of  argument,  let  us  assume  that  it  i-  in 
the  general  interest  and,  therefore,  desirable  that  all 
people  should  have  good  health.  To  carry  this  desire 
into  effect  it  would  be  necessary  to  enlist  the  services  of 
doctors,  nurses  and  all  persons  capable  ctf  curing  others, 
and  if  the  desire  were  attained  these  people  would  have 
no  work,  and,  from  their  particular  standpoint, 
such  an  end  is  not  desirable,  so  what  are  we  to 
do?  Provide  for  them  at  the  public  expense?1  Rut, 
public  provision  for  doctors  and  nurses  involves 
taxation,  and  taxation  can  never  be  quite  equitable, 
so  now  the  practical  question  submitted  in  place 
of  the  original  one  takes  this  form  fit  might 
take  other  forms,  all  that  is  meant  just  here  is  that  it 


182  THINKING 

must  take  a  practical  form)  "  is  State  payment  and 
control  of  the  medical  faculty  desirable."  and,  from  the 
workers'  standpoint,  we  might  add  "  and  should 
workers  work  for  this  through  their  political  or  other 
organisations  "  ? 

From  the  standpoint  of  those  of  the  medical  and 
nursing  fraternities  who  fear  bad  administration,  undue 
interference  on  the  part  of  authorities,  etc.,  the  answer 
is  in  the  negative.  From  those  who  are  already  in  good 
health,  but  who  would  have  to  contribute,  the  general 
answer  would  probably  be  the  same.  It  would  be 
unprofitable  at  this  point  to  follow  out  all  the  con- 
flicting interests  involved,  even  were  it  possible; 
all  we  need  notice  is  that  no  intelligent  answer 
can  be  given  without  a  knowledge  of  the  material 
conditions  which,  in  communion  with  the  senses,  produce 
the  sense  perceptions  from  which  the  understanding 
derives  its  generalisation.  Regarding  the  workers' 
interest  in  such  a  question,  they  need  not  waste  any  time 
on  it,  for  if  it  is  decided  before  the  advent  of  socialism 
it  will  be  by  the  generalising  of  the  common  features  of 
the  conflicting  interests  to  which  we  have  just  referred, 
and  these  are  interests  in  which  workers  have  no  control. 
Under  communism,  State  support  and  control  of  the 
medical  service  would,  of  course,  be  a  foregone  conclu- 
sion, because  by  that  time  the  chief  contradictions 
between  the  different  interests,  which  are  mainly 
financial,  would  have  already  been  solved  through  the 
successive  over-riding  of  special  interests  by  an  ever- 
widening  general,  and,  therefore,  there  would  be  no 
reason  to  interfere  with  the  administration  and  directive 
ability  of  those  who  know  best  how  to  manage  their 
own  special  work. 

Are  Strikes  Unreasonable?  Once  again!  All  ideas 
are  brought  into  being  by  the  understanding  generalis- 
ing sense  perceptions.  Assume  some  working  men 
have  sense  perceptions  of  what  seems  to  them  bad 
conditions  in  the  workshop  (bad  because  they  do  not 
serve  their  general  need).  Each  one  has  a  generalisation 
of  his  own,  the  result  of  his  own  reasoning.     By  con- 


THINKING  183 

faring  with  one  another  they  pool  the  common  feature 
of  their  separate  and  small  generalisations  into  one  idea, 
a    greater   generalisation,    by   taking  a   vote.      If   the 

derision  is  to  strike  then  evidently  that  decision  is 
arrived  at  by  the  general  reason  of  that  particular  group 
of  persons,  and  consequently  is  reasonable.  But  if  this 
of  men  constitute  only  a  small  section  of  those 
engaged  in  the  whole  industry,  and  if  the  rest  of  the 
main  body  do  not  think  them  justified  or  wise  in  their 
decision,  then  that  decision,  though  general  and  reason- 
able for  t lie  smaller  body,  becomes  particular  or  special 
when  regarded  from  the  standpoint  of  the  larger  body, 
and.  of  course,  unreasonable,  though  if  the  larger  body 
uphold  the  decision  of  the  smaller  one  it  remains 
reasonable ;  this  is  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  workers. 
But  since  strikes  in  these  days  always  mean  a  blow  at 
some  section  of  the  capitalist  class,  either  in  attack  or 
defence,  then,  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  general 
body  of  capitalists,  strikes  are  always  unreasonable,  as 
witness  their  views  in  the  Press. 

The  foregoing  leads  to  the  next  question,  for  if  the 
reasonable  is  that  which  is  general  within  the  limits  of 
a  certain  group,  and  this  general  is  determined  by  taking 
a  vote,  does  it  follow  that  majority  decisions,  though 
reasonable,  are  always  right  ? 

Arc  Majorities  always  Right?  The  findings  of 
a  majority,  as  we  have  said,  are  reasonable  because 
they  are  the  product  of  reasoning  in  general  as 
opposed  to  the  reasoning  in  particular  of  smaller  groups 
or  of  individuals;  but  these  findings  are  not  right,  or 
true,  unless  they  correspond  with  reality  outside  the 
mind;  for  it  is  often  the  fact  that  majority  decisions  in 
relation  to  industrial  conditions  are  mere  mental  com- 
binations built  up,  it  is  true,  from  sense  perceptions  of 
real  parts  existing  outside  the  mind,  but  which  do  not 
exist  as  combinations  outside  the  mind.  Such  decisions 
are  generalisations  which  it  is  anticipated  will  serve 
some  general  need,  but  if  the  decisions  are  found  to  be 
impracticable,  the  general  needs  are  not  served,  which 
is  only  another  way  of  saying  that  the  generalisations 


184  THINKING 

are  errors;  but  it  is  only  after  the  trial  that  they  are 
seen  to  be  unreasonable,  because  it  is  only  then  that 
they  are  seen  to  be  incorrect.  In  case  we  should  think 
this  to  be  a  contradiction,  let  us  remember  that 
after  the  trial  a  new  set  of  sense  perceptions  has 
become  available  and  they  necessarily  alter  the  previous 
generalisation,  so  what  was  previously  reasonable 
becomes  unreasonable.  It  is  important  to  remember 
that  error  results  from  combining-  too  few  factors  as 
well  as  from  combining  too  many. 

Should  Workers  Serve  on  Trade  Union  Executives? 
The  means  to  an  end  are  justified  provided  the 
end  is  justified.  Since  capitalism  has  been  proved 
to  be  immoral  because  it  does  not  serve  the  general 
needs  of  all  people,  it  follows  that  those  members 
of  executives  who  interest  themselves  in  making 
capitalism  run  smoothly,  for  example,  those  who 
support  Whitley  councils,  Douglas  (or  other)  credit 
schemes,  "  increased  production,"  craft  distinctions, 
etc.,  are  not  serving  the  general  needs,  and,  conse- 
quently, are  acting  immorally,  whether  they  know  it  or 
not,  "  ignorance  of  the  law  is  no  defence."  Therefore, 
workers  should  serve  on  trade  union  executives  only 
when  by  doing  so  they  can  contribute  anything  that  will 
develop  the  workers'  organised  might,  the  might  that 
is  needed  to  demonstrate  their  general  morality;  for 
example,  any  move  towards  the  abandonment  of  craft 
distinctions,  or  advocating  and  helping  to  carry  out  an 
educational  policy  that  is  independent  of  capitalist 
class  influence,  viz.,  that  kind  known  as  Independent 
Working-Class  Education,  which  deals  with  those 
branches  of  social  science  calculated  to  give  workers 
the  knowledge  of  the  correct  relations  between  them- 
selves and  their  masters. 

Abstract  and  Conclusion.  We  opened  this  intro- 
duction by  demonstrating  the  need  for  a  method  of 
arriving  at  truth,  and  then  outlined  the  evolution 
from  nebula  to  man,  in  which  took  place  the  gradual 
development  of  organs  of  sense  and  brains.  From 
sense  perceptions  of  things  not  classified  and,   there- 


THINKING  185 

fore,    not    understood,    men    instinctively    generalised 
notions  of  religious  practices,  gods  and  mythological 

legends  which  later  developed  into  the  several  greal 
religions  that  are  now  very  much  on  the  wane;  this 
was  one  great  line  of  thought.  The  next,  beginning  six 
centuries  before  Christ,  was  that  of  philosophy,  in  which 
men  took  to  the  investigation  of  nature  in  their  search 
for  truth,  but  as  the  results  were  disappointing, 
inasmuch  as  everything  was  changing  and  consequently 
there  seemed  no  hope  of  arriving  at  any  permanent  truth 
in  nature,  they  turned  to  search  for  reality  in  the  study 
of  mind.  It  was  a  hopeless  quest,  but  has  been  pursued 
up  to  the  present  time,  though  it  is  now  waning  and 
beginning  to  follow  religion  on  the  downward  grade. 
The  third  and  last  great  line  of  thinking  is  known  as 
science,  it  began  about  six  centuries  ago  By  taking  once 
more  to  the  study  of  nature,  and,  due  to  the  newer  tools 
and  possibilities  of  research,  it  has  had  a  long  line  of 
brilliant  successes.  It  shed  its  light  on  philosophy  and 
drove  philosophers  to  study  thinking  rather  than  the 
reality  of  mind  as  an  entity;  this  move  was  finally 
completed  by  a  method  of  dialectic  logic,  through  the 
work  of  Joseph  Dietzgen,  who  placed  thinking  on  a  level 
with  all  other  science  by  discovering  its  general  law — 
that  of  combining  parts  into  wholes  or  the  reverse;  with 
the  establishing  of  this  law  philosophy  as  such  ceased 
to  be,  its  place  being  taken  by  the  "  Science  of 
I  nderstanding. ' 

We  now  have  a  scientific  method  of  attacking  all 
problems,  but,  like  all  methods,  it  is  no  use  without 
material  upon  which  to  work.  This  material,  as  far  as 
the  past  is  concerned,  is  to  be  found  in  historical  study, 
and  with  regard  to  the  present  in  the  study  of  economics 
and  allied  subjects.  The  material  is  little  use  without 
the  method, nor  the  method  without  the  material;  those 
who  have  any  sense  worth  having  will  study  both,  for 
there  are  only  two  alternatives,  one  is  to  retire  from 
discussion  and  become  a  social  hermit,  the  other  is  to  be 
a  fool  who  opens  his  lips  only  to  be  held  up  to  ridicule 
by  the  rising  army  of  proletarian  logicians.  But  in  the 
hope  that  readers  will  not  let  the  principles  taught  herein 


186  THINKING 

drop  out  of  their  minds  as  the  book  drops  out  of  their 
hands,  but  will  begin  to  apply  them  and  so  grow  into 
the  habit  of  thinking  scientifically,  we  give  one  more 
example  by  describing  this  end  as 

The  Beginning. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


\i  !  EN,  GRANT.      The  Evolution  of  the  Idea  of  God  :   Watts  and  Co., 
London,  1908. 

Bax,   E.   Bf.i.iort.     The  French  Revolution  :    Swan  Sonnenschcin, 

London,  1907. 
BSRGSOM,     Henri.     Creative     Evolution:      Macmillan     and     Co., 

London,  191 1. 
BuCHNBR,      Ludwig.      Force    and    Matter  :      Trtibncr    and    Co., 

London,  1864. 
Buchner,  L.     Last  Words  on  Materialism  .    Watts,  London,  1901. 

CARR,    H.  Wii.don.      The  Philosophy  of  Change  :    T.  C.  and   E.  C. 

Jack,  London. 
CRAIK,  W.  W.     Outlines  of  Philosophic  Logic  :   Out  of  print. 

I  I'HOLBACH.     The  Systetn  of  Nature  :   Truelovc,  London,  1S84. 
DlETZGRN,   Joseph.     The  Positive  Outcome  of  Philosophy  :     Kerr, 

Chicago,  1906. 
Dietzgen,  Joseph.     Philosophical  Essays  :    Kerr,  Chicago,    1017. 

Engels,  F.     Landmarks  of  Scientific  Socialism  :  Kerr,  Chicago,  1907, 
ENGELS,  F.     Feuerbach — The  Roots  of  the  Socialist  Philosophy  :  Kerr, 

Chicago,  1912. 
Engels,  F.     Socialism,  Utopian  and  Scientific  :  Swan  Sonncnschcin, 

London,  1907. 
Engei.s,  I".     Origin  of  the  family  :    Kerr,  Chicago,  1910. 

Fairgrieve,  James.     Geography  and  World  Power  :    University  ot 
London  E*ressl  London,  1920. 

Hegel.     History  of  Philosophy  :    Kegan  Paul,  London,  1892. 
Hogarth,   D.  G.     The  Ancient  East  :    Home  University  Library. 
Williams  and  Norgate,  London. 

Jarrett,    Bede.     Mediaeval  Socialism  :    T.    C.   and    E.  C.    Jack, 
London. 

Kautsky.         Ethics    and    the    Materialist    Conception    of   History  t 
Kerr,  Chicago,  1918. 

187 


188  BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Lewes,    G.    H.     The  History  of  Philosophy  :      Longmans,   Green, 
London,  1871. 

McCabe,  Joseph.     Evolution  from  Nebula  to  Man  :   Milner  and  Co., 

Manchester. 
Marx,    Karl.     Critique    of  Political   Economy    (Preface)  ."     Kerr, 

Chicago,  1913. 
Marx  and  Engels.     Communist  Manifesto  :    S.  L.  Press,  Glasgow. 
Meily,  Clarence.     Puritanism  :    Kerr,  Chicago. 
Morgan,  Lewis  H.     Ancient  Society  :    Kerr,  Chicago. 

Paul,  William.     The  Stale  ;   its  Origin  and  Function  :  S.  L.  Press, 

Glasgow. 
Plechanoff,  George.     Anarchism  and  Socialism  :   Kerr,  Chicago, 

1918. 

Russell,  Bertrand.     The  Problems  of  Philosophy  :  H.  U.  Library, 
Williams  and  Norgate,  London,  191 8. 

Webb,  C.  C.  J.     A  History  of  Philosophy  :  H.  U.  Library,  Williams 
and  Norgate,  London. 


INDEX 


Abelard    . 

•      53 

Brahma    . 

•      t-^ 

Absolute,  the    . 

88-00,  <m 

Brain  work 

129-134 

Academy,  the    . 

•      35 

Broad  Mind,  the 

13 

Academicians,  the  New       .      47 

Bruno,  Giordano 

.      62 

Adaptation 

•      83 

Bilchner  . 

.    109 

Agnosticism 

•      13 

Butler 

.      81 

Albertus  Magnus 

.      60 

Anaxagoras 

28,  41 

Carneades 

•      47 

Anaximander    . 

•      27 

Cassiodorus 

•      5i 

Anaximenes 

•      ~1 

Categorical  imperative  80,  81,  83 

Anselm 

53.  6G 

Categories,  Kantian 

•      78 

Antagonism    of 

material 

Causality,  the  problem  of  .      73 

interests 

56-9 

Cause  and  Effect 

140-2 

Antisthenes 

•      32 

Chattel  slavery. 

26,  50 

<j  posteriori  ideas 

•      76 

Christianity  and  Christians 

</  priori  idea-,     . 

75.  84 

43-6,  49.  55. 

56.  59,  60 

Aquinas    . 

•      5.5 

Civilisation,  beginnin 

22-3 

Arabian  Philosophy 

•      54 

Clark 

.       81 

Arcesilaus 

•      47 

Columbus 

.       61 

Anstippus 

•      3* 

Comte 

61.   87 

Aristocles 

•      33 

Confusion  of  Schoolmen       53-6, 

Aristotle        35-6, 

37. 

41.  55.  6o 

58 

'.1     62,  82 

Constitutive  notions 

76-7 

Augustine 

14,  00,  113 

Copernicus 

.       61 

Authority,  appea 

1  to 

12 

Coueism    . 

.     162 

Averroes  . 

•      54 

Cratylus  . 
Creation,  the 

•      33 
.      49 

Bacon,  Francis. 

61, 

65.  7°.  95. 

Cudwortfa 

.      8[ 

102 

Cuvier 

.    104 

Bacon,  Roger    . 

60,    IOI 

Cynics 

•      32 

Baer,  Karl  von 

.    104 

Cyrenaics 

31-2 

Bain 

•      05 

Beauty     . 

83-4.  159 

Hark  Ayes 

•      52 

Bentham 

.      y6 

Darkness 

■   1  r 

Bergson    . 

98-9.  "7 

Darwin 

,   104 

Berkeley  . 

71"2.  74 

Deduction 

Oo,    [Ol 

Boethnis  . 

•      5-: 

1  democracy 

.  170 

Boyle 

.    104 

Democritus 

•      37 

189 


i  go 


INDEX 


Descartes        .    64-7,  73,  85,  102 
Destiny  v.  Grace  .         .     44 

Determinism,  see  Freedom. 
Determinism  and  Education 

175-6 
D'Holbach         .  .  .106 

Dialectics  .      29,  30,  31,  89 

Dialectic  method  89-92,  93,  in 
Dietzgen  .  .  .113,  185 

Diogenes  .  .  .  -32 

Double  standard  of  truth.        56 
Dualism   .  .  .  -85 


Duns  Scotus 


55,  69,  102 


Ecstatic  union  with  God 

Education 

Effect 

Eleatics    . 

Electron  theory 

Encyclopaedists 

End  and  Means 


Engels 

Epicureanism 

Epicurus  . 

Evil 

Evolution,  inorganic 

Evolution,  organic 

Evolution,  of  societies 

Feudalism 

Feuerbach 

Fichte 

Force  and  Matter 

Force  and  Matter 

Freedom  . 

Freedom  and  Will 


48 

173-5 

140-1 

•      29 

98,  105 

.    106 

167-8,  173, 

178,  184 

93,  no,  in 

38,  44-  47 

38 


178-9 
16-8 

18-21 
21-3 

•      57 

IIO-II 

87-8 

M5-5I 

.    no 

82-3,  99 

160-2 


Galileo      .  .  .  .62 

Geometry,  principles  of,  not 

eternal  .  .  -144 

Gilbert      .  .  .  .62 

God  ....  163 

God,  the  idea  of  one  25,  42 

Grace  of  God    .  .  -44 

Gravity     .  .  .    145 

Green,  Thomas  Hill  .  .  96-7 

Hamilton,  Sir  W.       .  .      87 

Happiness,  moral  aspect  of  180-1 


Hartley 

Harvey 

Heat 

Hegel 

Hegelians,  Young 

Herachtus 

Hobbes 

Holiness 

Humanitarian  princi 

Hume       .      72-3,  74 

Hutcheson 

Hutton     . 

Hypnotism 

Ideals 

Ideas,  association  of 

Immortality 

Inductive  method 

Innate  ideas 

Inquisition,  the 

Islamism 

I.  W.— C.  E.      . 

James,  William 
Jews  .  .  24,  1 

Johnson,  Dr. 
Justinian 

Kant     73,  75-85,  86 

Kepler 
Knowledge 


P] 


•  95 
.  104 
.  146 
89-93 

93.  "° 

•  27 
67,  95-  i°2 

167-9 
es  1 71 -3 
75.  81,  95 
.  81 
.  104 
.    162 

•  173 
95.  96 

83,  158-9 

60-1,  101 

69-70 

.     62 

•  54 
174,  184 

•  97 
2-3.  45.  57 

•  72 

•  54 

90,  92-93. 

104,  108 

.      62 

162-3 


Laplace    .  .  .  .104 

Lavoisier  .  .  .104 

Leibnitz   .  .         68-9,  70,  74 

Life  .  .  .  156-8 

Life,  principle  of  -97 

Light        .  •  .  .146 

Lippershey         .  .  .62 

Locke  .  69-71,  74,  95,  103 
Logic  .  36,  39,  52,  60,  122 
Logic,  philosophic  123-5,  134 
Logic,  philosophic,  applied 

to  mind  and  matter        126-37 
Lyceum,  the      .  .  -36 


Machine  production   bene- 
fits of   . 


179-80 


INDKX 


191 


Mahomet  .         .         •     54 

Majority  dot  isions,  lightness 

of  .         .         183-4 

Malebrani  be  .         .68 

Hansel,  H.  1 87 

Man         .  .     93,  no,  1 1 1-2 

Marx,  quotation  from      63,  113 

Matin. 1I1-111  .  61,  86 

Materialism,  English  101-5 

Materialism,  French  .  105-8 

Materialism,  German         108-10 
Materialists  1  onception  of 

History  .  .  n  1-3 

Materialists,  "  metaphysical  " 

no 
Mathematicians,  the  .     30 

Matter     .         121-2,  136-7,  145 
Mechanical  conception  of 


universe 

Mediator,  the    . 
Metaphysit  s 
Mill,  fames 
Mill,  John  Stuart 
Mind 


67 
45 

77-9 
95 

95-6 
121-2,  134-5 


Mind  and  Matter  36,  39,  85,  137 
Moleschotte  .  .  .  109 
Monetary'  power  .       58,  166 

Monotheism,  see  God,  the 

idea  of  one. 
Morality    .  .         163-7,   J77"8 

Moral  reflex      .         .  80-1 

Motion      .  .  .  .148 

Mysticism  .  .  .48 


Nature 

Nebular  Theory 

NeoplatonisN    .  43, 

Newton    . 

.\i'-t. 

Nominalists 

Nothing    . 

Noumenon 

Occam,  William  of     . 
malism   . 

1  Mitological  argument 

Pantheism 

Parmenides 

Perfection 


138-40 

16-7 

44,  46-9 

.    104 

94-5 

55-6 

M9 

76-7 


53 


•      56 

67-8 

66,  90 

.     68 

.     28 
1 59-60 


Pelagius  .  .  .  .44 
Phenomena  .  .  76, 84 
Philo        ...  47 

Philosophei  .  defined  .  15 
Philosophy,  Ancient  Bchoolfl  of, 

29-3°.  3i.  37.  4^7 
Philosophy,  <  ompari  on  of 
Ancient  and  Modern       .     99 


Philosophy,  pn  tblems 

1  '1 1  \    ;■  1    ;    .   tin-  . 

Plato        31,  32-5,  37 
Plotinus  . 
Porphyry . 
c 

1  iv,  1 1,  ables.  the 
Price,  Ri(  haul  . 
Priestly    . 

IS        . 

Psychologist    .  tlie  en; 

Pyrrbo 

Pythagoras 


pirii  al 


Rationalism 

Realism     . 

Reason,  pure 
Reason,  practical 
Reasonable,  the 
Regulative  notions 

. 
Relativity 

Renaissance       .    54, 
R<  volution,  French 
Revelation,  ( rerman 
Right 

Kos.  ellinus 
Rousseau. 


tif       1  1    10 

.      29 

5,  66 

47-8 

49.  52 

149 

52 

81 

104 

49 

95 

37 
27-8 


.      86 

53.  55.  97.  IQ3-5 
7Q,  82 

.      80 


79. 
63.  7 


152-5 
81,  86 

•  95 

•  «7 
,  1 00 

92-3 
.    109 

163-7 

•  53 

IoO 


Scepticism 
Si  -jitics  . 
Scheele 

St  helling  . 

Scholasticism  and  Scholasl 

52  3.  82 
Schopenhauer    . 
S<  uiiv  e,  positive 

Si  Ottisfa  School 
Sensational  School 

(See  also  Bacon,  Hobbes 
Locke). 
Sense  perceptions       .  130 


37.  44.  73 
30.38 
.  104 
.      88 


93  4 

95 

105 


192 


INDEX 


Shaftesbury 

.      81 

Time,  the  essence  of  reality  98-9 

Shaw,  G.  B. 

•      97 

Tithes 

•      57 

Silence 

•    !47 

Trade  Union  Executives, 

Smith,  Adam     . 

.      81 

morality  of  serving  on 

.    184 

Socialisation  of  property, 

Trinity,  the  Alexandrian 

.      48 

limits  of  justification 

176-8 

Trinity,  the  Christian 

46-  53 

Socrates   .          31,  32,  33, 

41.  49 

Truth  and  Error 

•    152 

Something 

•    149 

Truth,  method  of  finding 

132-4 

Sophists   . 

•      30 

Sound 

•   147 

Unit,  the  mathematical 

143-4 

Space 

•    M4 

Universe,  parts  of  the 

127-8 

Spencer,  Herbert    61,  87, 

96,  97 

Unnatural,  the 

139-40 

Spinoza    .           .           .  68, 

74.82 

Urea,  synthetic 

.    104 

Stewart,  Dugald 

•      95 

Usury       .                     . 

58,  166 

Stillness    . 

.  148 

Utilitarianism    . 

.      96 

Stoicism   . 

38,  44 

Utopians  and  Utopianisrr 

1 — 

Stoics 

38-9 

Ancient 

•    113 

Straightness 

1 423 

Mediaeval 

1 1 3-4 

Strikes 

182-3 

Modern 

114-6 

Substitution  of  practical 

questions  for  abstract 

Vedism     . 

•      42 

ones 

181-2 

Vesalius    . 

.      62 

Superman,  the  doctrine  of  .     95 

Vogt,  Carl 

.    109 

Synthetic  philosophy 

•      97 

Voltaire 

.    106 

System      of     Nature,     TJ 

e, 

argument  in  . 

106-7 

Will,  the  freedom  of  the 

44. 

68,  82 

Teleology 

.      28 

William  of  Champeaux 

.     56 

Telescope,  inventor  and 

"  Will  to  live,"  the    . 

•      94 

date  of. 

.      62 

Wohler     . 

.    104 

Thales 

.        26 

"  Word,"  the     . 

•      47 

Theology 

•      43 

Thought  . 

129-30 

Zeno  (of  Elea,  dialectician 

)•      29 

Time 

•    M4 

Zeno  (Stoic) 

•      38 

Time  and  Freewill 

98-9 

Zoroaster. 

•      42 

Printed  in  Great  Britain  by  C.  Tilling  &  Co.,  Ltd., 
53,  Victoria  Street,  Liverpool, 
and    at    London    and    Prescol 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


DEC  1  2  1*0 
REC'D  MLD 

OEC 1 2 196°, 


RECE 


LD-URL 


AM 


AUG  24: 


VED 


*"►    -   s.,oM 


1965 


_    : 


flENEWAL 


:cki  v  r: D 

;IN  LOAN  DESK 


P.M. 
:g  ■»  ..', 'H2  J  12!  3  1 4!  5!  6 


£   ^B  7      197Z 
REC'D 


MAR 

s 
111    JAN  2 


Ufil 


,- 


■■HAW&fUHj. 

119/2 

BBTD  UMIM. 
DPT  7 

M241 

251 


%  ** 


k     <S# 


Jfl 


RENEWAL    AUG  2  7  1965 

Form  L9-37m-3,'57(C5424s4)  444 


"JUL.  t*80 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
III    I  I      II  II    III     I      I  I  I  I 


AA    000  816  710    B 


58  00156  6693